BROWARD COMMUNITY COLLEGE LIBRARY
3 3301 01039143 4
1 : ■(
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
LYRASIS IVIembers and Sloan Foundation
http://www.archive.org/details/silversands196566juni
^ 4'
/
N
EDITOR'S NOTE
J7
This is the first of the four issues of the Silver Sands yearbook-magazine. Historically speaking, it is a milestone in the annals of the Junior College of Broward County's cam- pus publications. Journalistically speaking, it is a grand experiment, for the success or failure of this magazine will be the deciding factor in whether or not Broward Junior Col- lege will lead the way in this type of publi- cation among the fellow junior colleges of
this state, or return to the standard, tradi- tional yearbook. We, the Editors and Staff of Silver Sands, are trying our best to achieve success in this experiment, but only you, the students, can be the true factors in either our achievement or defeat by your acceptance or rejection of this publication.
Most of this magazine was compiled during the summer terms, and certain students who wrote for us are no longer at the Junior Col- lege. All through those months, we had dif-
ficulty in finding available writers and staff members to fill our positions and, in some cases, the editors, themselves, found it necessary to author articles in order to fill page space. We are, nevertheless, proud of this magazine and sincerely hope you will share our enthusiasm. In any event, it will be you, the students, who will pass the final judgment on this publication. Success or failure; the decision is yours.
John E. Leatherwood Editor-in-Chief
STAFF AND ADVISORS
Editor-in-Chief John E. Leatherwood
Assistant Editor Pamela Eciwards
Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley
Feature Editor David Byrne
Art and Photographic Editor Lewis Alquist
Sports Editor John Wolfe
General Staff Assistant Carol Shafer
Photographers David Porter and
Norman Summey Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes
Chairman of the Division of Language
and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter
COVER: Sunset over the campus of the Junior College of Broward County; photo by Ed Maxwell.
:r
SILVER SANDS
The Junior College of Bromard County
TABLE OF CONTENTS
t«».
THE NEW LEFT Barbara Glowaski
EULOGY FOR A COUNSELOR
(Short Story) Dr. Jack D. Taylor
CAN DREAMS FORETELL? Greg Oliver
DIGNITY (Essay) ...,^..... Robert Greve
THE FRESHMAN ,««»i.S|pik Sharon Roesch
WHY THE CHOICE Thomas Robinson
THE REFRESHING RAIN
(Essay) Jeanette Machinske
ODE TO A FEMALE OCTOGEWABSAN
(Poetic Essay) David Watkins
CHEATING ..^a.^...^.. Pat Hart
ANN'S REVIEW ^■Admr:^'Ann Bardsley
THE MOON CURSE
(Short Story) John Leatherwood
ON CAMPUS
(Selected Cartoons) Various Cartoonists
MISREPRESENTATION
(Poem) Margaret Mary Brown
fort Lauderdale, Florida
Robinson
6
9
10
U
IS
16
18 19
22
23 29
30
THEY MOLD ACHIEVEMENT April Rol
SPORTS AT JCBC Jack Cresse
NEIL S. CRISPO Mildred Edwards
THE SAB Mildred Edwards
007 DOESN'T LIVE HERE Pam Edwards
EXCERPTS FROM A EUROPEAN SUMMER
Judith M. Rehm and Barbara J. Clark GUARANTEED ... TO TURN YOU ON
Pam Edwards
THE FRESHMAN RETREAT John Leatherwood
THE ADMINISTRATION AND FACULTY 52
HOW TO STUDY George F. McCall, Jr. 61
SHINE BRIGHT, PALE MOON
(Poem) Jarrett C. Pharr 62
THE RAMPAGE OF BAFFLING
BETSY Ann Bardsley 63
THE ISLAND OF JAPAN
(Selected Poetry) Tom Tohtz 64
OUR FEATURED WRITERS Back Cover
THE
NEW
LEFT
;4 2cUc& ^<Mn4€ ^^ 'Pcc&cttfA
FOR 25 years, the college cam- puses across the country were politically quiet. Except for a brief spurt of Conservative reac- tion to the New Frontier, the col- lege student showed little political interest. This is no longer true. Suddenly, as if out of nowhere, has come a rebirth of political ex- citement and interest by collegi- ans that has been termed "The New Left." The New Left is a movement of the young. It borders on radicalism and in some organ- izations is communistic. It is vital that the college students of our nation know what it is, where and how it got its start, and where it is going. For in our time, not only does the future but also the pres- ent belong to the American youth. If only for this reason, students and parents must inform them- selves of the truth about the New Left.
BY BARBARA GhOWASKI
Illustrated by
Tom Oliver
and
John Leatherwood
Activity of a political nature by college students which had an ef- fect on American political life was first manifested in the 1930's. The result of the Great Depression was the loss of confidence in the American economic system by a substantial number of citizens, es- pecially among the intellectuals. In their dissatisfaction, they turned to the Left, hoping to find the panacea. The recognition of the U.S.S.R. in 1933 focused furth- er attention on the Left. The un- fortunate result was the formation of a coaUtion between intellectual, but naive, liberals and the Com- munist Party and its front organ- izations. This became known as the "Popular Front Movement" of the 1930's.
College campuses expressed this. They were boiling over with fads, ideas and stunts which fermented a protest against parents, deans.
and more than ever before, the world situation. Students huddled around the radio listening to Roos- evelt's fireside chats or Hitler's frenzied rantings.
They picketed factories and tried to organize university janitors. They burned Hitler and Musso- lini in effigy and formed the Vet- erans of Future Wars. They dem- onstrated, paraded, and sometimes landed in jail. Radicals, pacifists, socialists, communists, and liberals were everywhere.
The main theme of the 1930's was a liberal attitude towards, and a tolerant view of Communism. These were the years of the "Share the Wealth" movement of Hucy Long, the old-age pension move-
Mme '65
ment of Francis Townsend, and the violently nationalistic, anti- Semetic, inflationistic, and some- times socialistic propaganda of the "radio priest" Father Coughlin.
In the 1940's, college students were too involved in World War Two and in the fight to save the world from fascism to be inter- ested in picketing and parading.
The "Silent Generation" was the name given to the students of the 1950's. These were the se- rious students who, due to the interruptions of World War Two and the Korean Conflict, were be- hind in their academic plans. They had not come to a univer- sity to play at politics or to be intellectually challenged by the outdated theories of Marx. They came to learn and to get an edu- cation.
IN the 1960's, there was a re- vival of Conservatism. It was a reaction to the New Frontier. But its growth was stunted when Barry Goldwater was defeated. Po- litical action in the Young Repub- lican and Young Democratic clubs exists, but it is not as vocal nor as imaginative as the Far Left.
Today's college generation is faced with a movement that had its quiet beginning with Fidel Castro's victory in Cuba in 1959, and with the first student civil- rights sit-in in Greensboro, N.C. in 1960. It was not until the sum- mer demonstrations of 1963 that the face of the movement became public. And it is not until now that the truth about it, along with its dangerous potentialities, is be- coming known.
The college student is very much concerned with the present. He feels that he does not have to be overly concerned with the future. He is more sophisticated than his predecessors, and yet is exceedingly self-conscious. He has little faith in either of the two parties, although there is a ten- dency to try to work for changes through the liberal wing of the Democratic Party. If the political- ly motivated student, whose key words are action and personal commitment, cannot find what he is looking for in die legitimate major parties, he must turn else- where.
Some of the students are turn- ing to the New Left. At tables on university campuses through- out the nation, students are sign- ing up for trips to Cuba, picketing churches, businesses, public and private projects, demonstrations against segregation and for other j)opular causes, and parading in front of the White House. And this is happening more and more as students are becoming politi- cally aware.
Although the New Left is a small minority, it is vocal, active, and growing.
The New Left is a loose con- federation of socialist and com- munist organizations. It got its start with the tremendous student interest in the case of Caryl Chess- man. Despite some feehng that he was innocent, Chessman was executed in California's gas cham- ber on May 2, 1960, for kidnap- ping.
Then came the Castro take-over
in Cuba, the civil-rights sit-ins, the student peace mo\'ements, and the rioting and demonstrations against the House Un-American Activities Committee. And so a movement came into being. Students realized for the first time they could par- ticipate in a social revolution.
The New Left manifests itself through peaceful demonstrations and picketing, through distribution of literature, through unsanctioned trips to Cuba, through sit-ins, through lie-ins, and through sleep- ins. They demonstrate against ra- cial discrimination, against the war in Viet Nam, against the rules regulating sex, against high rental rates in Harlem, against Barry Goldwater, against the House on Un-American Activities Commit- tee, against nuclear testing, and limitations on the right of free speech. The adherents of these ideas have formed clubs, leagues, and associations which maintain full-time staffs. The propagation of the ideals and goals of the New Left is a vocation in life, to some as religious a vocation as the priesthood.
THE young revolutionaries are in agreement on three major goals. One is "freedom now" for the American Negro. Thou- sands of these radicals joined with the NAACP and SNCC in Missis- sippi, Alabama, and Florida to march and picket for the equality of the Negro. The second goal is that the United States should re- treat from Viet Nam and stop fighting "revolutionary socialism" throughout t h e underde\clopcd world. They feel the U.S. is inter- fering with the revolutionary proc- ess. The third goal is one of a longer range. The New Leftists want the United States itself to go socialist, or at the very least, to organize a new democratic society from the grass roots up based on a planned economy.
A latent sub-conscious goal is self-expression. These \oung peo- ple feel strongly the need for self- expression and the unburdening of
parental repression. They look for this in these radical and contro- versial organizations.
The New Left is a conglomera- tion of splinter groups which ha\'e very little formal connection \\'ith each other. The largest and most influential is the Students for a Democratic Society. It is largeh' non-communist and intellectual. It belie\'es in community organiza- tion and effort, and is opposed to leadership by an "Establishment." While it is non-communist, it ob- jects to the "unreasoning" and "paranoic" nature of anti-commu- nist sentiment in this country on the grounds that it weakens free- dom, restricts debate, and inhibits action. SDS leaders talk about the development of new institutions and new organizations, and of new forces to work the social changes they seek. They have not as yet come up with a specific program. They staged the suc- cessful March on Washington in which more than 20,000 students participated on April 17 of this year. Currently, the organization has about 2,500 members on more than 75 college campuses. Since SDS is the largest of the radical organizations, it is obvious the membership of the New Left is still rather small.
The most far out of the far-left is the Progressi\e Labor Party. It is considered to espouse the Red Chinese line. At its recent con- vention in New York, it an- nounced, "Americans in the ghetto streets will not go along with thej gas chamber plans of this coun- try's ruling class." The PL? de- clares that die people's needs re- quire revolution, and that it will, be prepared to wage the struggle on whatever forms and levels are necessary. Members played a large part in agitating for the Harlem race riots last summer. Actually, some of its members are simply rebelling against society hi gen- eral. Started by two Communists in 1962, the PLP is reputed to have in its possession a letter from Communist China declaring that
this organization is following the "only true Line" of socialism in .America. It has a growing mem- bership of about 1,000.
The Young Socialists Alliance is the young and militant arm of the Trotzkyites. They are Marxists who think Russia has been "de- mocratized" and "bureaucratized. " Thev organized the unsanctioned trips to Cuba. Until his death, .Malcolm X was one of their he- roes, along with Fidel Castro. Since its founding in 1962, it has never signed more than 1,000 members.
have a membership of close to 1,000.
It would not be fair to call the New Left a Communist front. It is not like the "Popular Front" of the 1930's. Yet, there is no deny- ing that the Communists ha\'e played a part in the advancement of this grass-roots movement. The degree of the commitment depends on the organization. The Students for a Democratic Society do not have the Communist control that the DuBois Clubs have, nor do the Communists have the same degree of influence in it. The New Left
THE \V. E. DuBois Clubs, named for a founder of the \AACP who became a Com- munist at tJie age of 93 and died soon after in Ghana, is the closest thing to a \outh mo\ement among the traditional Communist Party- U.S.A. Alongside the PLP and the YS.\, the DuBois Clubs are almost moderate and their leadership in- cludes non - communist radicals. They prefer to call themselves so- cialists but the over-all organiza- tion is unquestionably in the hands of the Communists. J. Edgar Hoo- ver, head of the F.B.I., has identi- fied the DuBois Clubs as a Com- munist youth group. Located in 35 clubs throughout tlie country, they
does not feel itself threatened by communism, and is, in fact, ac- commodating with it. Therefore, the Marxian threat to this nation cannot be ignored. All of these groups have adopted some of Manx's program. This is the real danger.
Why this turn to the left? Why this sudden resurgence of political activity on the campus'?
One reason is the emergency of John F. Kennedy. This college generation was in high school when he assumed the office and powers of the presidency. By his stirring challenge to go with him to "The New Frontier" and his
espousing of Liberal ideas anc} methods to "get this country mov- ing again," President Kennedy captured the imagination of the students.
When he was assassinated in Dallas on that tragic Friday in November, the collegians felt his death very keenly. As flags all across the nation flew at half mast, the American Youth felt as if a close relative had died. Three out of five students queried in a Newsweek pool said that they felt the Kennedy years to have been a special time. Some of them went
THE second reason is the stu- dents have been encouraged in their turn to the New Left by dieir college professors. Using such methods as teach-ins, the col- lege professors, who were tlie radical and left-leaning students of the 1930"s' Popular Front Mo\e- ment, have in some cases, espe- cially in the Berkeley incidents, strongly encouraged political dis- sent and demonstrations.
The third reason is the intel- lectual appeal of liberalism. The philosophy of Karl Marx and Fred- erick Engels still attracts some of
on to say, "he made the young people of today feel that life was worth living," and "he was an ideal man for someone of my gen- eration to follow." According to the students, he made politics seem an attractive profession. He returned to it some of its lost honor and added to it his own special style. The Massachusetts statesman appealed to the youth of the nation and was able to com- municate with them as no other American politician had been able to do in a long time. The nation's youth were attracted to politics because of the style and brilliance of this man.
those individuals who reason and weigh everything intellectually.
The fourth reason is a form of rebellion against the conservatism of parents. Many of the leaders of the New Left are graduate stu- dents \\'ho come from the upper- middle-class homes where politics are conservative. In order to prove their independence, they rebel politically.
The final reason is the emer- gence of the other-directed person in the urban centers of the coun- try. In David Riesman's The Lonely Crowd, he defines the model of the other-directed person as a member of society whose typical conformity is insured by
his tendency to be very sensitive to the expectations and prefer- ences of others. To this person, tlie peer group and its opinions are most important. Anxiety is the mode of insuring obedience. Con- formity is primary. The inability of the child to take the roles of his parents as his models forces him to search elsewhere for them. The peer group replaces the par- ents in importance. In die peer group, he can find acceptance and a meaningful relationship which satisfies his needs. In acceptance by the peer group he finds his purpose fulfilled.
In effect, in modern society, when he pickets or peacefully re- sists, he is accepted by his peer group. When he does not, he be- comes an outcast. The importance of acceptance by his peer group has been internalized in him by his parents and by society. It be- comes a subconscious but primary necessity.
The most ironic aspect of the New Left is that most of these groups have been begun by inner- directed persons. To the inner-di- rected person, his goals and the fulfillment of his goals in the proper manner is the most impor- tant thing. This also has been internalized in die inner-directed man by his parents and by society. Only in this case, the parents play a greater role. He enters politics to protect what he has or to get something he wants. Yet, it is the inner-directed man who is the moralizer. He has a greater con- sciousness of self than the other- individualist. The result is that the inner-directed lead, while the other-directed follow.
The movement of the New Left has really just begun. Its success or failure will depend on the ver- dict rendered by this college gen- eration. Will the future leaders of the United States \\'ho are among the college students of today ac- cept and embrace the radical so- cial ideas of the New Left, or will they turn in another direction? The choice is theirs.
EULOGY
FOR A
COUNSELOR
By DR. JACK D. TAYLOR
Dean of Students The Junior College of Broward County
ILLUSTRATED BY ALVA FULLER
THE little town of Testcor was all agog. After all, wasn't its favorite son retiring from his posi- tion as president of Major Motors to return home to live his remaining years in Testcor?
To make the celebration more exciting this fam- ous celebrity was scheduled to deliver the Com- mencement address at Testcor High School. As an added incentive H. I. Quotient was rumored to in- clude in his notes some lauditory remarks about the late I. Will Guide, Testcor's illustrious counselor during Dr. Quotients years at the high school. Quotient had always maintained that Mr. Guide had influenced H. I. in his decision to attend college. For this guidance H. I. was thankful.
H. I., also, credited Mr. Guide with masterful direction in breaking down H. I.'s twin brother's stubborn determination to attend college. Whereas H. I. had resisted all efforts to persaude him to matriculate to the University, L. O. Quotient had doggedly persisted in such an endeavor. Both of these attitudes had remained until Mr. Guide had
administered a Stanford-Binet Test to each with overwhelming results of 195 and 95 I.Q.'s for the brothers. Mr. Guide hypothesized that L. O. had suffered brain damage from an accident or high fever. Naturally, the teachers' marks substantiated the standardized test results. When the boys en- rolled in their classes, the teachers buzzed about the differences in abilities. The teachers remarked that Mr. Guide's data gave them more insight on how to deal with each child.
Thus, H. I.'s speech was supposed to give the beloved Mr. Guide credit for much of the eminent president's success.
This success was predicted by Mr. Guide and manifested itself with high marks, participation in extra-curricular activities, and election to the major offices in high school clubs. These hallmarks ex- tended throughout college as H. I. continued to awe professors with his brilliance. Even before H. I. enrolled at Stigma University, he aroused a hubbub with his phenomenal I.Q. With his amazing ability
and past record, H. I. passed most of his courses with a breeze and, in some instances, he was excused from his final examinations. No question about it — H. I. "snowed" even the faculty at Stigma.
Meanwhile, L. O. acquired a position commen- surate with his I. Q., janitor at dear old Testcor Higii. Although L. O.'s contributions did not compare to diose of H. I., he gained the distinction as tlie cus- todian of the year in Aptitude County.
L. O. looked forward to H. I.'s speech with con- siderable ambivalence. Being the brother of a famous executive brought smiles to L. O.'s face; however. L. O. always envied his brother's success. To base his brother return to the scene of his own frustrations
blended misery and nostalgia to the festive occasion.
As H. I. planned his speech, he could not avoid recollections of his successful days at Testcor. Be- cause of his college record and amazing ability, H. I. had bypassed the junior executive routine in favor of a \'ice presidency in a small automobile manufac- turing company, die Private Motor Compain. The years were kind to H. I., and as the compan>' pros- pered, so did H. I. Changing its name from Private Motor Company to Major Motor Company, the enterpriser became a leading producer of cars. H. I. moved from tenth \ice president tlirougli the ranks to first vice president and, finally, to president.
Of course, marriage to the chief stockliolder's
!
O rX^CP ^sipcaLoccocccx
^o_«
Of course, marriage to the chiei: stockholders daughter did not impede H. I.'s march to this en- viable position. Often H. I. thought that he would employ L. O. in some capacity; however, what could a man with an I. Q. of ninety-five contribute to an enterprising organization like Corporal Motors, as it was known during its period of transition?
Almost the entire town congregated to hear Testcors favorite son. An air of excitement pervaded the auditorium as the commencement exercise approached. Mr. Ace Speaker, principal of Testcor High, was extended the honor to introduce the hon- ored guest. What an introduction it was! With a I capacity for majestic oratoiy, Mr. Speaker extolled "= the accomplishments of H.I. Quotient. Not a word was mentioned about the less competent and ineffec- tive brother. After the introduction the emotion-filled citizens could hardly restrain their enthusiasm — in fact a few scattered applauds dampened the dignity of the occasion.
The main speech surpassed even the elocution of the introduction. What a pity that I. Will Guide could not hear the plaudits regarding his own accom- plishments as a counselor of this gifted alumnus. After he had mentioned his own great contributions (in a matter-of-fact way), H. I. explained modestly that this great genius would have been overlooked had it not been for a counselor who possessed the insight and perception to recognize this potential prodigy. Being the only psychometrist with the back- ground to administer the Stanford-Binet, Mr. Guide was the only educator with the ability to recognize H. I. as a genius and L.O. as an average pupil with a capacity below the level to consider college matriculation.
Just to emphasize the noteworthy guidance of his former counselor, H. I. requested the cumula- tive records of his less talented brother and him- self. This would be the climax of his speech — concrete evidence of Mr. Guide's professional coun- sehng. With the two records in his hands, H. I. Quotient, the eminent executive stated that he owed his entire fortune, his entire success, his entire con- tribution to the results of the single test. Also, the same test had saved his brother from the frustration accompanying failure in college.
To conclude his remarks H. I. exclaimed "I will read you the I. Q. scores of my brother and me." As H. I. opened the t%vo personal data cards to read the wide differential in abilities, he stared at each test score, paused, grew faint, and muttered, "Oh, no!" — "Oh, no!"
cm
DREAMS FORETELL
By GREG OLIVER
ILLUSTRATED by GREG OLIVER
It was three o'clock in the morning when Judy, a Broward Junior College sophomore, flapped her arms and flew through the air. She soared above the campus of JCBC cutting off the heads of her teachers with a great sword she firmly held in her hand. At the same time, on the other side of town, Nick, a freshman, was watching his own funeral being conducted by men of the moon.
Both occurrences are very odd ways for students to be spending their nights but, though odd, they are not at all impossible. The
above accounts were e.xperienced during those somewhat common- place journeys all of us take through the mysterious world of dreams. But what are those sub- conscious visions called dreams? What power do tliey have over us? How valuable are they to our lives? And, above all, can dreams foretell our future?
According to Henri Bergson's The World of Dreams, such thoughts are the illusions of the mind during sleep. The psycholo- gists of the present day consider dreams to be a valuable part of
psychoanalyzing the nature and origins of a person's difficulties. Sigmund Freud has taught that dreams are not meaningless thoughts, but are full of informa- tion of great importance to the dreamer. Judy will be happy to learn that to dream of flying through the air is an omen of good fortune. To dream of car- rying a sword signifies the posses- sion of great power, and her cut- ting off her teachers' heads means an unexpected legacy will be left to her.
As for Nick's dream, author
Henry J. Wehman says in his Dream Book that if a person dreams he is buried he will meet with much misery, but if he dreams of the moon, it foretells delay in receiving money. With such interpretations, it would seem that Nick has a weary road of misfortune ahead of him.
Mike, another JCBC sophomore, often dreams about money. Weh- man says, "To find money, mourn- ing and loss; to lose money, good business; to see it without taking it, anger and disappointment; to count it, gain." Marian, also a sophomore, dreams of going ice- skating in the nude. To dream of nudity denotes pleasure with a sorrowful end. Her ice-skating shows she will engage in some unprofitable undertaking.
Dick, a sophomore aviation stu- dent, dreamt the night before his first solo flight that he was headed straight for the sun. As he was going up in the airplane the in- struments jammed, he couldn't turn the plane or slow it down. Dick will be happy to learn that the dreaming of an airplane means
he will receive a large sum of money. He will be successful be- cause to dream of the sun por- tends success in money matters.
"Night after night in my dreams, my teeth continuously fall out," explained Pat, a freshman. This is a warning to watch her health; it is also a portent of financial diffi- culties.
To dream of an automobile ac- cident as Charlie, a sophomore, does, foretells disappointment. Helen, a freshman at JCBC, dreams of snakes surrounding her bed. This is a sign she will achieve success as a result of hard work. If a snake should bite her, she will quarrel with a friend or relative.
Did you ever dream of passing botany with an "A" as sophomore Emory does? It is unfortunate for you as this accomplishment is a warning that you will be let down. Whenever Wanda, a fresh- man, dreams, it is always the same situation, with few exceptions. "I always find myself in an old house admiring the quaint beauty of its
age, when suddenly I am fright- ened by something — be it a cob- web, a basement or an attic." Au- thor Leo Francis describes such a dream in his Dreams and Their Meanings. "It is a bad omen to dream you are wandering through an old house. In addition, if you dream of fear you will be de- ceived by someone near to you."
Are you among the many male students who dream of being ship- wrecked on an island with many beautiful girls? It is a good omen to the dreamer of girls for it promises long life and riches. But the dream of being shipwrecked is a sign of ill-fortune. Whether you or others are involved, it is a bad omen for lovers.
Talmud, the Hebrew Bible, says, "A dream which is not explained is like a letter which has not been opened." To understand their meanings may give you an insight into your future; by heeding a warning sounded in dreams you can often avert trouble. After all, you could control your own des- tiny. "To be forewarned is to be forearmed."
0
By ROBERT GREVE
For Miss Patricia Kyle's
English 102 Class
OH what man is this that dares to define aes- thetic universals with the cowardly words which I write today? Be he a fool or be he in Love?
But I say to them that question: if you have ever felt humbled by the greatness of the sea, or by its compassion, or by its violence; if your earthly boundaries have been, for a moment, weakened by the majesty of Beethoven, or by the beauty of Tchai- kovsky, or by the simplicity of Strauss; if you have been awed by the soul of a child, by its naive purity, or by its trust; if you have felt love for your God and His love in return; if you have played before the moon and could yet face the sun; if within your realms you have taken only the best and have done without if the best could not be had; if you have cared for yourself and not been vain; and if you have done each of these things with deliberation and moderation — then you will know what dignity is, for it lies within you.
And thus it is, my friend. Whether you show success or failure, if you have shown dignity, you then will be shown respect.
10
• . • entlu4.6.iGA4ny de6yi^ and antidnatiO'it
. . . the Freshman year is a time of learning and reaching toward a goal.
THE professors, administrators and students who work within the modernistic buildings of the college present a routine, a way of life, that is almost totally new to the entering Freshman. The faces are strange, the procedures are not clear, and the atmosphere is adult and progressive. Although he feels confused and perhaps even a little afraid of failure, his enthusiasm, desire, and anticipation mount within him from the moment he registers. Hope becomes an integral part of the Freshman, and everything he attempts is touched by it. This, cou- pled with desire, enables him to overcome many obstacles during the year, including his feelings of frustration and lack of self confidence.
The differences between college and high school range from the small complexities that baffle and
confuse the Freshman, to the large pitfalls that the Sophomore has already forgotten. Sometimes it comes as a surprise to the new student that it is possible to attend classes on the same campus with a friend and yet for an entire term never come face to face with him. Class schedules all differ and it is not unusual for a student to attend classes only on certain days of the school week. It is a novelty for many Freshmen to attend classes with students of various ages. The word "Freshman" denotes no spe- cial age but merely one in his first year of college. Ex-service men, wives with families, or teachers themselves may comprise a class along with upper classmen. All are bound together by the quest for knowledge.
Differences between college and high school
11
Class schedules all differ and it is not unusual for a stu- dent to attend classes only on certain days of the school week.
affect the Freshman in various ways. Sometimes he revels in a new-found independence while at other times he finds the adjustment difficult and has trouble allocating time between studies, dates, and a possible job. Learning that with freedom comes responsibility is often one of the hardest lessons for the college Freshman. Although he may have come in contact with facts about college life be- fore, it is still a jolt, pleasant or otherwise, to find that no one comes to the student to direct him in every move, every choice, and every hour of his day. Bulletin boards, faculty advisors, and guidance mate- rial are made available to the student, however, it is up to him to keep himself well informed. Nothing is quite the same as the desolate feeling that spreads over the Freshman as he stands at the door of a room for an interview, advisement appointment, or testing, only to find that the deadline was the day before and he has lost valuable time, contacts, or money. Certainly he feels thwarted but, more than that, he comes to the realization that only he is the "captain of his fate and master of his soul."
The understanding that the success or failure of his college career is entirely up to him is one of the factors that matures a Freshman during his first year of collegiate environment. The choices he makes concerning classes, friends, and every aspect of campus life will affect him in the future. The first year of college is definitely a time of impor- tant decisions, although it is seldom that the Fresh- man realizes this at the time.
Studies are much more difficult in college and no longer are academics a game in which a student tries to see how little he can do during a term for
a passing grade. The Freshman encounters well educated adults who are prepared for their profes- sion. All have attained a master's degree and many have received their doctorates. The instructors po- litely address students correctly by their last name, impressing them with the formality and privilege of education.
The desire to be recognized motivates many students during their first year in college. In the higher institutions of today, where one is recorded as a number and referred to as such for years fol- lowing, the need to be noticed and accepted is great. Often the Freshman finds that he is becoming inter-
In the higher institutions of today, where one is re- corded as a number and referred to as such for years fol- lowing, the need to be noticed and accepted is great.
12
**.— —
The first year of college is definitely a time of important decisions, altfiough it is seldom that the Freshman realizes this at the time.
ested in fields totally different from those of his high school career. He may be exhibiting leader- ship qualities that he did not know existed, and his enthusiasm for activities on campus is great. Many times the shy, reserved student comes out of his shell in college, finding himself for the first time unhampered by the group of classmates that he has known since elementary school.
New to the Freshman are many facts and cir- cumstances that he finds very difficult to accept. His difficulty in accepting them may lead to disconcert- ment and feelings of resentment, but it is part of that maturation process known as college. No mat-
ter how much the Freshman has heard, nothing quite prepares him for that feeling of utter frustration which comes when he finds that two of his neces- sary classes meet at the same time, and his schedule is now unbelievably confused. The fact that he can- not slip by in a class without studying a great deal is discouraging, as are so many other facts of col- lege life.
Pride and a feeling of accomplishment become the guideposts of a job well done. A grade is no longer merely a letter that signifies passing or fail- ing, but a symbol representing hours of study, re- search, and money. The college grades or professors' approvals are not easily earned and the Freshman finds that perhaps he is not as accomplished or ex- perienced as he had thought. It is at this time that he realizes that he truly is "a novice, esp., a student during his first year, as in a college," as Webster's Dictionary defines the term "Freshman."
It is only gradually that the new student over- comes the feeling of being a novice on the college campus. The simplest procedure becomes a task when faced by the Freshman. At first, even the com- putation of a term grade average is difficult. Hours, credits, and points must all be considered and un- derstood to compile a grade average or to under- stand the fulfillment of academic requirements. Some students remain in the Freshman stage, in this re- spect, until the time of graduation, when they are informed of missing credits.
Books are no longer distributed in the class- room with neatly lined cards but, instead, must be purchased carefully according to term, course, and number. The cost of books is expensive and the new
The choices he makes concerning classes, friends, and every aspect of campus life will affect him in the future.
13
student usually learns (after costly experiences) to buy second-hand books and to trade with other stu- dents. All these things, which at some time will be- come habits, are now new and confusing. Parking lot regulations, "class-cut" system, and the registra- tion procedure in time become second nature to the once baffled Freshman.
From the choice of classes to the choice of a career, the Freshman year is a time of learning and reaching toward a goal. The sighting of this goal and the means to attain it lie with the Freshman. He must evaluate, compare, and choose; not only must he do this with courses and friends, but with values and principles. He encounters a wide variety of personalities and philosophies during his first year of college, and it is his responsibility to formulate a philosophy or set of standards of his own — which he does unconsciously whether he realizes it or not.
With the widening of the Freshman's outlook on life, it is essential that he keep an open mind. His opinions and choices should be solid but flex- ible enough that if, after evaluation, he finds that he was mistaken about a career choice or the opin- ion of a person, he will be able to admit that his judgment was wrong. It is only in this way that he will benefit from his mistakes.
The Freshman listens, ponders, and wonders. He argues, reconsiders, and angers. Speculating on everything from sex to politics, he finds, as ulti- mately all students do, that he is one of a group and, yet, alone. As his scope widens he thinks more universally. Studying takes on a greater meaning and lesser things are pushed into the background. The relief one feels for passing a Zoology test is not welcomed because of some vague threat from the teacher or parents, but because to the student, pass- ing Zoology represents coming one step closer to attaining a career or a degree. Membership in a po; litical or pre-professional organization on campus means not just the acquisition of friends or status, but the obtainment of valuable information or expe- rience which may help to determine or secure a final career.
Frustration and disappointment are unavoidably encountered during the first year of college. No one can dream or work toward a goal without sometimes facing failure or realizing that one has misplaced one's trust. Often, without even realizing it, the Freshman desperately seeks to find a model, an idol, someone he respects and admires. Perhaps nothing brings such sadness than to learn that faith and admiration have been placed in someone who is not at all worthy. Although the experience is dis- illusioning, it teaches the new collegian to put his faith in ideals and his trust in someone or some- thing grander and more universal than any one human being.
After some disappointing experiences, it is not difficult for the new student to feel completely alone and depressed on the crowded college campus. The Freshman soon finds that there is no time for self pity because life continues around him with or with- out his volition. It is at this time that desire and an inexhaustible supply of hope carry him through. He learns that one mistake or failure does not mean total disaster. Attaining his goal may take more time and effort than originally planned, but he knows that in the end, it will be worth the effort if the goal is all that worthy.
The Freshman is indeed a person who is find- ing himself. Although all his problems will not by any means be completely solved and some things will undoubtedly continue to confuse him, he will have attained a great deal of knowledge and expe- rience when he gains the title Sophomore. Mistakes will be a part of his education, but they will serve to mature rather than permanently injure him. He will be more sure of his beliefs and ideals because he has had a chance to prove or disprove them and, although he is perhaps not certain, he has a better idea of to what he wants to devote his life. He is someone who will know triumph and disappointment on a varied scale, and he will live a year of hard work and excitement. He is someone to be little envied and greatly understood; he is a Freshman.
Hope becomes an integral part ol the Freshman, and everything he attemps is touched by it.
14
WHY THE CHOICE ?
By THOMAS ROBINSON
If you stopped a group of fresh- men and asked them why they came to JCBC you would cer- tainly get various replies. Even if the reasons are the same, people express them differently. What- ever their reasons, the freshmen have arrived.
This past summer various high schools in the county replied to a questionnaire which asked that a percentage of graduating seniors give their reasons for enrolling at the Junior College. The responses were interesting and unusual.
Divided into four possible choices for attending, the catego- ries consisted of academic, finan- cial, social and other.
In the academic category, an- swers ranged from, "My grades were not good enough to get into a four-year university," to "JCBC is known to have a fine scholastic standing." Another student felt that spending his first two years in a small college would help him to adjust to college life.
Although many of the answers did not specifically say why the students were coming to the Jun- ior College of Broward County, many said that their primary rea- son for going to college was to get an education. Jane Casey came because she feels it is a way to prepare her for a good job when she graduates, Patricia West came to gain knowledge, and Jim Walton just doesn't want to be ignorant.
Others were attracted to JCBC because of its outstanding courses and its high rating in the state. Martha Contner was attracted by the nursing program; Susan Brue- ning by the Data Processing pro- gram; and John Teitscheid because of the wide range of preparatory
courses. Diana Pace, a receiver of a JCBC Honors Scholarship, stated her reason as, "I have learned of the fine academic reputation the Junior College of Broward County has and believe it is an excellent school."
"To be successful in the future," and, "To have a profession to fall back on," were the replies of two students when asked why they are going to college.
Linda Farkas wants to build a better foundation before entering a four-year university. Jerry Ha- ney is at JCBC because of an in- decision about his major subject; "I will attend junior college until I determine what my vocation will be." Danny Lively is a bit skep- tical about college: "If I can do college work it's better to find out in a junior college."
Those were some of the aca- demic reasons why a number of high school seniors chose JCBC as the school in which to begin their college education.
It is surprising to find that not many people put down their rea- sons for attending as social. The most common reply under this category was, "All of my friends are going there," or, "I know a lot of kids who will be there." A few people, however, gave the reason that it will give them a chance to meet new people.
The most frequent answer given under the "other" heading bad to do with hving at home. Some stu- dents feel the best thing about Junior College is that it saves money for them or for their par- ents. Social reasons undoubtedly enter into remaining at home, but
finance plays the most important role. "I want to live at home as long as possible"; "I'd like to stay at home for the first few years "; "It is close to present living ac- commodations."
These are only a few of the rea- sons the students give for wanting to go to a junior college — the Jun- ior College of Broward County in particular.
Of course there are other incen- tives for attending JCBC. One person was interested in the short- er term of school. Dan Johnson became philosophical about it: "Since I am undecided about my future, why should I waste money elsewhere?"
Percentagewise, it adds up that 62% came for academic reasons; 45% came for financial reasons; and 12% each for social and miscellaneous reasons. If you added it up and observed that it came to more than 100%, you are right. You must take into consid- eration that many students gave several reasons for being at JCBC.
If you don't care for percent- ages, it can be stated another way. In order of their importance to the students of the freshman class, academic is first, financial is sec- ond, and social and miscellaneous reasons are third.
No matter what the reason for donning the rat cap, whether it be because of the desire to be- come educated, to associate with old and new friends, or as one person put it, "I don't want to leave my mother," they, the fresh- men, are now a part of the stu- dent body of the Junior College of Broward County.
15
BY JEANETTE MACHINSKE For Mrs. Neda Hill's English 102 Class
16
Ml I
THE rain stopped falling just a few minutes before I stepped out the door. The soft, gentle breeze which blew against my cheek and ruffled my hair was warm and moist as though a wet piece of cotton was covering niy face. The clean smell of wet earth was wafted to my nostrils as I breathed deeply.
Although the rain had stopped, the sky was still filled with clouds in varying shades of gray floating lazily before me. In the distance blue-black moun- tains of clouds were massed against the horizon, pouring out their tons of water upon the waiting earth below.
Palm trees swayed in the breeze like graceful
ballet dancers. Leaves skipped along the ground turning over and over like happy children doing cartwheels. Water trickled from the eaves of the porch and glistened on the emerald green leaves of the ixora bushes. Tiny drops of crystal water spar- kled on the pink hibiscus blossoms like diamonds as the first rays of the sun poked through the part- ing cloud cover. Gay ripples played across the pools of water standing in the driveway.
The storm had passed. Once more God's earth was refreshed by the cool, clear water which had poured down from His heaven. I stood in wonder and awe before the beauty of this land after the passing of the summer shower.
17
Cjde to a female UdogenaUan
BY DAVID WATKINS
For Mrs. Neda Hills English 102 Class
The caressing touch of each finger to a key,
whispering hush of felt striking wood, the grop- ing and gnashing of ebony and wire, all lavish them- selves to my supervision, to my fate, and to my everything.
Yet my piano is not wood. She is pressed uni- corn horn transplanted and crystallized from an aqua-tinted raindrop; she is gargoyle skin, webbed and silken-thatched; she is the plucked, feathered carpets from the shiny parlors of Olympian maidens; she is the stretched beams of tossed-away prisms, and the retrograde whirlings of excavated minds.
Yet my piano is not wire. She is spun moonbeam trapped in a rusted thimble; she is the tarnished porcelain from bloody spiral stairways in the Lou\Te; she is all the evaporated thoughts that have con- densed on the roof of the world.
My piano is my soul, my treatise on each sculp- ture and syndrome I fancy or profane. A cynic of cynics do I become when I mount her lap and pat her head.
My piano is more than a friend. She senses my moods and releases my dreams; she bickers and pouts when I doubt my esteem; she echoes the songs of my flesh into the prolonged nights \\'hich I know as days; she consoles my laughter and sighs at my despondency.
I cannot see into me without her eyes. I cannot curl my fingers around eternity and dangle my arms off this scaffold of reality without having her as a lifeline to shore.
When I touch her, flesh against flesh, there can be no tomorrow, there can be no forever, and there can be no darkness. She cries out in my anger, whis- pers to my passion, and lavishes herself upon my moments of delight, my hours of creation, and my songs to the very brashness of the gods that gave me a woman I could enslave in the timeless void of unimaginable words.
18
CHEATING
f] GHOUIIilG
COLLfGIOH
peoBLtn
By PAT HART
WITH twenty - three min- utes left of the final ex- amination, student 32502 wound his watch. Exactly seven minutes later he stood up, walked to the front of the room, and turned in his paper. The instruc- tor took it, glanced over it, and tore it up.
This hapless student had tried one of the many ingenious meth- ods of cheating that students use everyday in American classrooms. Unfortunately for the student, his instructor was both observant and well advised. Still, colleges are faced with the ever increasing problem of cheating.
The ways of cheating are many and varied. This particular stu- dent had inserted a minute scroll inside his watch and had replaced the crystal with a magnifying lens. Thus, by simply winding his watch the student obtained the
pertinent answers needed to pass the exam.
Other methods of cheating range from simple crib sheets to elaborate earphone devices. A standard joke among students is that of taking an exam while turning the pages of an open text; book. As ludicrous as this may seem, it has been tried.
One popular method is lining a clear plastic cartridge pen with paper containing the necessary formulas or answers. Writing on clothing and hands, although a tried and true method, has its set- backs— the ink can smear and the writing can be easily seen by the instructor. The way that works best but requires the most in- genuity is to obtain a copy of the exam before it is given. This isn't often feasible in large universities, but it can sometimes be done in small colleges. The main problem
with this method is trying to re- member all the answers, not to mention all the hazards involved while trying to get the exam in the first place.
Writing on desk tops or on lap boards can supply a few short answers which may save the day, or if caught, may cost the whole course.
The reasons for cheating are as many and varied as the methods. Mr. Neil Crispo, the new director of student activities, feels that much of the cheating in American schools is caused by the idea of competing with one's self. He be- lieves that some of this cheating could be done away with if, "We could put education on a basis of competing with each other. If it's a choice between you and the other person, you will always come first."
Tom Spencer, president of the
19
Undergraduate Student Govern- ment at the University of Miami, made this comment: "We've had no cases of a good student ever cheating. Those who do cheat, usually do it from necessity — such as a football player trying to maintain his grade point average."
Some of the instructors at JCBC believe that a majority of students do cheat or would cheat. One of these instructors said, "Half of my students cheat now and if I gave them a chance, the rest of them would, too."
Other instructors have said that, "Not many students resist the temptation to cheat," and "Everyone would cheat if they weren't afraid of getting caught."
There are instructors, though, who feel, "College students are usually a pretty good lot and can be trusted to make the best decision."
The students themselves have varying views on cheating. Some will admit to having resorted to cheating in order to pass a course but others maintain that it isn't worth cheating just to get a grade. They feel that getting an educa- tion is the basis for college work and cheating on an exam doesn't help them to learn anything, but just takes away from their self- respect.
One student said, "It is a terri- ble experience to know the answer to an exam question but not be able to think of it. This is the time when a person is most likely to look on another person's paper."
A sophomore at JCBC said, "Cheating is a despicable practice* If you have to cheat to pass a course, you shouldn't be taking it in the first place."
Other students say that cheat- ing is merely a means to get out of school. "The faster you pass a course, the less time you have left in school. I'd do just about any- thing to pass, including a little cheating on the side."
There are various types of
20
cheating and some students have morals about only a few. One student wouldn't consider copying on an exam, but was willing to turn in a friend's term paper as her own just to avoid the work of research and writing. One stu- dent commented, "If the assign- ment isn't really important, then it really isn't important if you cheat."
With TV classes and IBM grading, some students hold that they are trying to beat a system set up against them. The feeling of personal contact in classrooms has been lost and now the student says, "It is only a machine that I am cheating. It doesn't really matter."
The majority of the students asked, however, felt that cheating had no place in college life. They said that cheating would hurt their education and hinder their own progress through school.
There are many ways of deal- ing with a student that has been caught cheating. At JCBC, no set policy is followed. Dr. Taylor, Dean of Students, said, "We don't
like to set a policy. We prefer to leave it up to the individual in- structor."
This college, of course, frowns on cheating, but offers no penal- ties by a set standard. The indi- vidual instructor can take what action he sees fit. Sometimes this means a failing grade in a course or an assignment; sometimes it means re-doing the assignment. When a student cheats on an exam, it may be explained to him why he received a failing grade or it might just come to be an understanding between himself and his instructor. This lack of policy leads to misunderstandings, sometimes, but leaves the instruc- tors more freedom in their own control of the classroom.
The University of Miami has an Honor Court that meets in pri- vate and deals with all problems of cheating. The Court is made up of ten members of the ad- ministration, faculty and student body, combined. All of their de- cisions are kept from public knowledge.
A student caught cheating at
the University of Florida also goes to court. This court however, is made up entirely of students and operates under the laws of the Florida State Constitution. A trial is held and a verdict is given by a jury of students. The usual punishment is a number of "penal- ty hours." Penalty hours are academic hours required above the usual number for graduation. When these penalty hours are completed and the student is eligi- ble for a degree, all the records of his cheating are removed from his file and nothing remains to tell anyone that he was ever caught cheating.
There are numerous other ways to penalize cheating. Expulsion or mandatory withdrawal from school are two. Unfortunately, such in- cidents can become common knowledge and can do considera- ble harm to both students and instructors.
No matter how it is handled, students realize, as one girl said, "If you cheat, you take the chance. If you get caught, you should pay the penalty."
0
Mrs REVIEW
Being a critic is good for the ego. The critic is master of all in the field he surveys, and can praise or wither at will. I, for my part, cannot claim to be a literary expert, and so it seems perhaps presumptuous of me to judge the efforts of those who are far more talented than I. I read a great deal, both for knowledge and for pleasure, and I know what I like. On that perhaps flimsy basis are my opinions formed. There are times when I have goofed com- pletely, as when SHIP OF FOOLS, which I Uiought tedious, was a best seller. However, my views usually reflect those of others who have read the same books. My reviewing subjects are, because of our quarterly publish- ing schedule, not necessarily cur- rent.
My choices are from the Best Seller list, from popular reprints, books much talked about, and ran- dom selections so good or so bad as to be worth reviewing. Let the reader beware.
Topping the best seller list this summer was Arthur Hailey's HOTEL, a big novel with some- thing for everyone. Set in a large New Orleans hotel, this book goes behind the scenes of the hotel business through a variety of ap- pealing characters and situations. Central character in the related episodes is Peter McDermott, the efficient, young assistant manager, who has a blot on his record to live down, and two pretty girls to live up to. Peter must face a be- wildering series of crises that in- clude a racial incident, a hotel thief, a tipsy diplomat and his wife covering up for a crime, and
by Ann Bardsley
a tragic accident. Minor crises and characters help to lend an authen- tic flavor to the business that read- ers of HOTEL will never again consider rather tame.
HOTEL has an exciting climax and the traditional happy ending. It is an excellent choice for a long, lazy, Sunday afternoon.
The current civil rights move- ment has inspired a host of books about the South and its racial crisis. Some of these volumes are excellent, while others are merely collected cliches by uninspired hacks.
WE SHALL OVERCOME, by Michael Dorman, will surely rank among the best non-fiction to come out of the social revolution taking place south of the Mason- DLxon line. Mr. Dorman is a re- porter for a New York newspaper and has been on the scene of all the southern integration crises dur- ing the year 1962-63. He does not claim to be unbiased, but does make a sincere effort at objectiv- ity. Most of the integration activ- ities of that year centered upon the college campus and, appropri- ately, the book opens upon the tragedy of Ole Miss and closes with the peaceful desegregation of the University of Alabama.
Michael Dorman recreates that momentous year with an accuracy that keeps the reader on the edge of his seat. He goes behind the headlines and beneath the slogans. The Ole Miss riots are revealed in shocking detail, as are the fran- tic negotiations between Cover- nors Wallace and Barnett with the Department of Justice.
WE SHALL OVERCOME is an in-depth, reporter's eye view of a national crisis. Once begun it is hard to put down.
Sober historians and gossip lov- ers alike will delight in Lillian Rogers Parks' MY THIRTY YEARS BACKSTAIRS AT THE WHITE HOUSE. This remarkable book, first published in 1961 and now reprinted in paperback, is an intimate glimpse into the White House and its occupants as seen by the maids, cooks and butlers who work there.
Written in a lively, entertaining style, BACKSTAIRS AT THE WHITE HOUSE surprises us with some goosepimply ghost stories about the spirits that haunt the, Presidential mansion, especially the rather well-documented ap- pearances of Abe Lincoln. The joys, sorrows, and idiosyncrasies of first families from Taft through Eisenhower are revealed through the eyes of the author, a White House seamstress, and her mother, who was head maid before her. Housekeeping problems, weird gifts like the scroll written in blood that one first lady received, parties, exotic guests, and visits by crackpots bringing personal griev- ances or messages from God are recalled by Mrs. Parks with wit and a trace of nostalgia.
This fascinating memoir serves an added purpose. Every reader who has ever had an embarrassing experience — no matter how hor- rible — can feel comforted by the knowledge that his humiliation has been topped by the diplomat's wife who actually lost her satin panties in the presidential recep- tion line.
MY THIRTY YEARS BACK- STAIRS AT THE WHITE HOUSE is well worth reading, and hard to forget.
I
22
C»i>V|
ViV^C
";
ye-kft-t ^^eAtheryvC'ei'
^lt^v,<.»- West
EBENEZER Marlowe had lived in the great city of London for the full sev- enty-three years of his life. Se- vere hardship and heavy toil had made a hard and bitter man of him and he had learned early in life that one would receive help only when one could give some- thing in return. This pathetic bit of knowledge, along with other twisted philosophies of mankind's attitudes, had turned Marlowe away from society. He had be- come a virtual hermit obsessed with the passion of carrying out personal vengeance upon his fel- low man before providence saw fit to take him from the society of the pitiful world.
For the past forty years Mar- lowe had made his meager living as the proprietor of a small pawn shop located in a back alley of Piccadilly Circle. His miserly ways had amassed him a fortune which he kept locked away in a storeroom of his establishment. Marlowe had made both home and occupation out of his shop and he was rarely seen leaving it, even for just the slightest mo- ment. To his customers he was always pleasant, greeting them with a smile and good cheer. But this was a mere mask cover- ing Marlowe's character; for be- hind his smiling shell, lived a being whose vengeful and bitter outlook upon life would eventu- ally lead him to a horribly mor- bid fate.
It was the Autumn of 1891. Night had fallen upon London as clouds of fog rolled out from the Thames and spread themselves thickly over the city. Ebenezer Marlowe had retired from his daily activities and, as the chimes of Big Ben mournfully tolled the hour of eleven o'clock, he was having a disturbed sleep. As he lay on the dingy cot of his bed- room, he could hear the chimes tolling again and again. Suddenly they stopped and all was silent. Once again Marlowe attempted to pass into a slumber but a dull and sporadic rapping on his front door brought him to his feet. Lighting a candle, he hesitatingly
walked down a narrow passage- way into the front room of his shop. The rapping continued. Marlowe, a man not easily fright- ened, called out harshly and clear- ly, "Who is it, who"s there!" Noth- ing but silence was his answer. Again he called and again re- ceived only silence. Not wasting another moment, Marlowe quick- ly went for his revolver safely secured in a cabinet drawer. Clutching it tightly to his side, he moved once again towards the door. Then, with swift speed, Marlowe unbolted the latch and threw the door wide open.
He found himself face to face with a rather startled youth car- rying a small bundle over his back. Marlowe demanded the youth's business. The boy, having fixed his eyes on Marlowe's re- volver, stammered out his story. Marlowe was told that a Maxi- milian Danvers, who was thought by many Londoners to be a stu- dent of the occult and of sorcery, had passed away the day before and, leaving little capital with which to pay his unsettled debts, it was found necessary to sell sev- eral of the man's personal effects to obtain sufficient money for the funeral. The youth explained that the bundle he was carrying con- tained a number of Danvers' be- longings. Marlowe passed the boy a harsh look and asked him to step in. Once inside, the bundle was hastily opened and Marlowe began a careful study of the var- ious articles.
Marlowe scrutinized everything as though he were searching for a lost and very valuable gem. But he was unimpressed by the lot save for one object, a small mahogany chest locked tightly with both chain and padlock. De- termined to acquaint himself with the chest's contents, he demanded the key for the chest from the boy but was told that there were several keys in the bundle and that the boy had no knowledge as to the one which fitted the pad- lock. Marlowe impatiently tried every key he was able to find
23
without success. Surely the pad- lock key must be somewhere within the bundle. Once again Marlowe attempted to find it. Thrusting his hands deep within the bundle, his fingers suddenly touched a long metal object. He withdrew his find and discovered, much to his delight, that it was a key. He hurriedly attacked the padlock with it, which at a turn of the key, fell open. Removing the chain from the chest, Marlowe opened it and found six small scrolls carefully stored inside. Upon examining one of the scrolls, he found it to be covered with Arabic lettering and some sort of a strange design. He replaced the scroll and told the boy he would pay five pounds for the chest and its contents, no more, no less. The bargain was sealed and the boy, returning the other articles to his bundle, brought the sack up over his shoulder and quickly left the shop.
MARLOWE returned his re- volver to its hiding place, and with his newly pur- chased prize in one hand and the candle in the other, returned down the passageway to his bed- room. Placing the candle on a table, Marlowe removed the six scrolls and took them to the light for a more careful examina- tion. He found all of them to contain Arabic lettering and six different designs, one on each of the scrolls. The greatest of curi- osity now aroused, he acquired a burning desire to discover the meaning of the scrolls. Marlowe had a vague remembrance of hav- ing a book somewhere in his pos- session which dealt with Arabic writing. He realized that if he could only find that book, the problem of deciphering would be greatly lessened. He began an extensive search of his shop which lasted throughout most of the night, but as the first rays of the rising sun streamed through the city of London, Ebenezer Mar- lowe found his book.
It was now Sunday, and as was customary in keeping of the Sabbath, Marlowe's pawn shop was closed for the day. This gave the old man the entire day to pass as he thought best and the foremost thing on his mind was the deciphering of the scrolls. He worked with his task at a fever- ish pace, not stopping for a mo- ment. The day passed into night and it was not until the following morning when Marlowe closed his book and returned it to its storage. The task had been com- pleted, and for the first time in many years, he felt almost over- joyed with accomplishment. Mar- lowe had discovered that he had in his possession a formula for the retaining of youth written by an unknown prophet some five- hundred years after the birth of Christ. The first five scrolls con- tained the secret of the formula itself but the sixth scroll was a curse, or something like a warn- ing, to all those who used the for- mula without the consent of Al- lah. Marlowe reasoned that there were a chosen few whom Allah believed pious enough in spirit to be blessed with perpetual youth and only these few were able to use the formula without conse- quences.
Marlowe believed this sixth scroll to contain nothing but a ridiculous and pagan superstition not worth anything but to be ig- nored and discarded. He also learned that the six strange de- signs appearing on the scrolls were concerned with the curse of the sixth scroll. He found them to be taken from an ancient lunar calendar and reasoned that the fate spoken of in the curse would be fulfilled on the night of a full moon. This time element Mar- lowe also ignored but concerned himself with only one idea — per- petual youth. He thought to him- self what a grand thing it would be if he could regain his youth. With the fortune he had amassed over the years he could easily ful- fill his dream of vengeance, and at the same time, he could enjoy all of the fun and frolic of the day. This was the chance he had been waiting for and fate had fi- nally seen fit to grant him his wish. Ebenezer Marlowe was now trapped in his own obsessions and it would be a mere matter of time before he would feel the sting of the ancient curse.
In the days that followed, Mar- lowe could be seen making fre- quent trips to the druggist shop a few blocks away from his own establishment. His acquaintances began to wonder what the old man was about but Marlowe would speak to no one. He re- mained as silent as possible, and to the amazement of everyone, Marlowe's shop was closed to all business. Actually, Marlowe's trips to the druggist were for the pur- pose of gathering all of the needed ingredients for his experiment and his shop was closed so that his work might not be disturbed. It was just one week exactly after Marlowe had purchased the scrolls when he was ready to make his experiment. He re- checked the measurements of his ingredients with the information he obtained from the scrolls and found everything to be in readi- ness. The great Parliament clock
24
had just finished tolhng the hour of nine when Marlowe mixed his chemicals in a large vial, and with a wondering smile of delight, drank them down.
For a few moments it was as if nothing had happened, then suddenly Marlowe's body was racked with terrific convulsions and spasms. He crashed about his room sending furniture and all various kinds of objects smash- ing to the floor. Then Marlowe fell also, his body overcome in a swoon. Four hours passed before he awakened from his sleep. At first Marlowe remained prostrate on the floor as if in a daze and then began to grope around in search of his candle. When he found it lying in a corner of his room, he withdrew a match from his pocket, lit it, and applied it to the candle. Marlowe then stood erect, with his candle in his hand, and walked a few paces to a mir- ror which was hanging on the wall. He gazed into the reflector and what he saw startled him. Reflected back at Marlowe was the image of a man of about thir- ty years of age — handsome, tall, and erect. Marlowe couldn't be- lieve what he saw to be true. He put his hand to his face and found it to be smooth instead of wrin- kled and leathery. He soon real- ized that the transformation had actually taken place; that his pre- cious formula had proven true. Marlowe's uncertainty turned to reality and his concern turned to joy, unlimited joy which threw him into gales of laughter. Now he was capable of dealing with the disgusting human race as he saw fit. With youth and fortune, he thought to himself, how could he be stopped from reaching his inevitable triumph.
BUT overshadowing this op- timistic faith in Marlowe's future was the thought of the people themselves. The sev- enty-three-year-old Ebenezer Mar- lowe now no longer existed. He would eventually be missed by his
acquaintances and many questions would be asked concerning his whereabouts. No doubt someone might think that foul play had occurred. What would happen, Marlowe thought, if he himself were arrested and questioned? How could he escape? How could he possibly explain the existence of the formula, the transforma- tion, the obtaining of perpetual youth? It would be an impossible task. Marlowe threw himself down in despair. He thought of the human race as a mass of vicious insects trying to rob him of his discovery and triumph. He realized that he could not let this terrible thing come to pass. He must conceive a plan, a brilliant plan, to counteract any human resistance to his personal destiny. Daylight had once again come to the city of London, and at Marlowe's pawn shop all was in readiness. He had passed the re- maining hours of the night in deep thought as to the course he would follow. He had conceived a truly brilliant plan and was most anxious to put it into action. First and foremost, Marlowe had changed his identity. He was now John James Marlowe, Ebenezer's nephew and only living relative. Second, he would explain to his questioning neighbors that Ebene- zer had summoned him in a letter a few days before to come at once to his bedside for his uncle feared that he was dying. Marlowe would then continue to explain that upon arriving at the shop the night before, he found his uncle dead, saying also that he had no- ticed the room to be filled with a number of medicine bottles which proved that his uncle had no doubt been nursing a severe and long-acquired illness which finally overcame him. Last, Mar- lowe would explain that his un- cle's property was now in the hands of a financier and was to be sold. The plan was foolproof. In a few short sentences Marlowe would explain the entire incident quickly and simply and would
give no chances for questions to be raised.
The day passed as Marlowe had expected. His story had been told by himself only five times, but carried by a multitude of others, it had worked its way throughout Piccadilly Circle. Be- cause of its convincing thorough- ness, Marlowe's explanations were believed by everyone who heard them. There was, however, one small detail which he had neg- lectfully overlooked; the where- abouts of his uncle's body. As chance would have it, Marlowe was asked that question and he was momentarily stunned by it. His answer, that the body had been taken to a rural suburb across the Thames early that morning to be prepared for burial, was begun in a hesitating man- ner but finished off with such ob- vious sincerity that it was taken to be a truthful answer. By that evening, Marlowe had moved his living quarters from the dingy pawn shop to a stately mansion overlooking Hyde Park. He had won the day for himself and now believed more strongly than ever that his obsessions and ultimate destiny would be fulfilled.
A year passed and in that time the name of John James Marlowe became associated with the most fashionable society of London. He had used his fortune wisely to gain prominence and power and was on the road to war against the human race. It gave Marlowe great amusement to think of his new position in life and how he would use it to bring his dreams of vengeance to real- ity. The hate and bitterness he had acquired never left him. In fact, now that he realized he was capable of striking back at man- kind, his twisted feelings were even more pronounced. It became just a matter of time before Mar- lowe's obsessions led him on the path of human destruction. He had passed the first year of his new life establishing himself in London's high society and now,
25
as he stood on the threshold of his second year, he felt that he was fully prepared for the task he had created for himself.
Marlowe moved swiftly and thoroughly, wielding his vicious tactics like the sword of an aveng- ing angle. All those who had at one time or another dealt Mar- lowe an injustice suffered greatly for their mistake. First there was Sir Gregory Beachem whose sig- nature appeared on an I.O.U. debt payment of one million pounds. Marlowe knew that Beachem's textile industry was in a bad way and that a demand for a payment of one million pounds would com- pletely ruin him. Marlowe lost no time in buying the I.O.U., at a greater cost than it was worth, for the sole purpose of destroying Beachem. The demand was made, Marlowe received the debt pay- ment, Beachem went bankrupt and committed suicide. Next there was Ramsey Fcx, a brilliant pol- itician and orator who had be- come the power behind the Prime Minister. A false embezzlement scandal created by Marlowe brought Fox a crashing defeat in a vital election and ruined his political career forever. Then there was T. V/insIow Trumble, editor of one of London's great- est newspapers. Marlowe pur- chased the holding shares of
Trumble's publishing company and had the proud man thrown into the streets. Thus the war was waged and many a great man fell to ruin at the hands of John James Marlowe. It seemed that the great destiny he had dreamed of was fast becoming reality and Marlowe laughed and gloated over the turmoil he was creating. He had claimed his hour of vengeance and was making the most of every minute of it.
IT was now Autumn of 1893, the second year of Marlowe's new existence. He was passing a quiet evening at his Hyde Park residence, sitting before a blazing fire in the drawing room. He had just finished reading the seventh chapter of Emily Bronte's Wuther- ing Heights and had placed the book on a small reading table at his side. He was about to retire for the evening when he was sud- denly overcome by a sharp pain in his stomach which sent him reeling back into his chair. He made an attempt to rise again and was able to stagger to the foyer where he collapsed at the foot of the staircase. Trying to drag himself up the stairs proved futile. Marlowe fell into a series of convulsions and lost all con- sciousness. A few moments later he came to his senses and found that the pain had ceased. Mar- lowe rose to his feet, looked won- deringly about him, and slowly mounted the stairs. Suddenly he realized that he was not the same man. Something had happened, something so drastically frighten- ing that he was afraid to gaze at his reflection in a mirror. But that wondering curiosity of the unknown which all humans pos- sess drove him on until Marlowe was standing before his bedroom looking glass. What he saw sent a sharp chill of sheer horror knif- ing down his spine and he uttered a shrill scream at the gruesome sight. He was gazing at the re- flection of the most repulsive and grotesque creature that he be-
lieved could ever exist. Ugly be- yond description, the creature was the complete picture of evil; its face full of cancerous sores and its frame hunched and twisted. As he gazed transfixed at the image, the remembrance of the curse of the sixth scroll shot through Mar- lowe's tormented mind. He turned away from the mirror and hurried to a window. His eyes stared out at the night and then he saw' something which petrified him; something which he had prayed not to see — a radiant full moon suspended in a sea of black end- lessness. The sight sickened him and he thought to himself what a terrible fool he had been for allowing his mind to be absorbed by the presence of the damned formula. Marlowe went complete- ly mad. The realization of the curse's fulfillment upon him drove the crazed man into a frenzy. He tore out of the room and rushed down the staircase. Standing mo- mentarily in the foyer, Marlowe moved toward a closet, grabbed his top hat and walking stick, threw his great coat over his shoulders and ran out of the house.
Marlowe, now under the spell of the ancient curse, quickly crossed the street and entered the park, clutching his walking stick as if it were a club. Groping among the shrubbery, he sudden- ly came to a clearing beside a lake where he saw a young cou- ple sitting by themselves on a bench near the water's edge. Mar- lowe had a sudden and unmoti- vated urge to kill them and he began to move closer to the bench. Suddenly the crazed man, completely obsessed by the thought of murder, rushed vicious- ly upon them, bringing his cane crashing down upon the head of the boy. The girl, seeing the hideous beast that was John James Marlowe, fled amid wild screams of terror. Marlowe gave quick pursuit, and capturing her, beat the girl unmercifully to death. Looking about him, he
26
saw that his wicked deed had been unnoticed, but the girl's screams had brought several po- licemen into the park. Marlowe escaped from the scene, crawling on hands and knees through the shrubbery, and was able to return to his home. Upon entering, he tossed his hat, cane, and coat aside and went directly to his chambers. There Marlowe fell into a deep sleep as if he were a panther resting from a fresh kill. At the hour of nine in the morning Marlowe was awakened from his slumber by loud, re- peated knocks at the front door. Shocked by this, he realized that his present grotesque state of ap- pearance would prevent him from receiving his unknown visitor. He threw his hands to his face in despair and realized that the ter- rible sores on his skin were no longer there. He rushed before his mirror and saw the image to be that of his own youthful self. It was a miracle. He thought to himself that the entire terrible affair of the last evening was probably nothing more than a dreadful dream. At that moment, Marlowe heard a servant answer the door and admit the visitor. Donning his robe, Marlowe went down the staircase to the foyer where he found his visitor to be a policeman. The conversation
between the two men was brief and to the point. Marlowe was told of the murders of the pre- vious night, was questioned as to where he had been during the evening, and asked whether or not he had heard anything at all which might aid Scotland Yard in the investigation. Marlowe's answers were, of course, quite convincing and he assured the po- liceman that he was ignorant of any knowledge pertaining to the crime.
Marlowe became well aware that what had occurred the pre- vious night was far from a dream. The tragic news was being shout- ed in the streets. Every newspa- per in London carried the story of the brutal murders. Detectives and policemen swarmed over the area searching and questioning. What had happened was most definitely true. As Marlowe re- turned to his room his mind was wracked with torment. The reali- zation of what he had done, the horrible transformation, and the curse, the wicked curse which had now trapped his very being, plagued him. But there was a consolation. Hadn't he returned to his youthful appearance? Hadn't he been transformed from that terrible creature back to his own self? Surely he was not un- der the spell of the curse at the present. It could be possible that it would never plague him again. This optimistic faith in the fail- ing potency of the ancient proph- ecy cleared Marlowe's mind and he was once again able to smile and think that he had won him- self another victory over his fool- ishly ignorant fellow humans.
Day past into night, the second night of a full moon. Marlowe, sitting quietly in his library, was once again overcome by the fa- miliar convulsions and emerged from them transformed into the horrible creature he had been just twenty-four hours before. Once again he stole out into the fog- choked blackness and once again he committed murder. Marlowe
was afflicted by the dreadful curse for four consecutive nights, and during this time, he had left such a trail of vicious murders that the populace, of the area found it very unsafe to venture forth into the streets after sun- down. In fact, a curfew had been instituted in the vicinity of Pic- cadilly requiring everyone to be off the streets by six o'clock in the evening. As for Marlowe him- self, he had no longer been seen leaving his residence at any time by any of his many neighbors. He was suspected by no one of having any part in the murders, and for a time, John James Mar- lowe was a prisoner of his own passions, locked desperately away within his great house, secluded and alone.
EVER since the third night of his terrifying affliction, Marlowe had dismissed his personal staff and had engaged himself in a pitiful attempt of war against his own bewildered mind. He believed that he could succeed in crushing the power of the curse if he could once again gain con- trol of his own senses and there- fore throw off the hold the an- cient spell had on his very being. Thus he waited for the passing of a second month embodied with both fear and anxiety. Then, much to Marlowe's delight, the eve of the night of the first full moon came to pass. It was an occasion filled with much mystery and pessimism, but Marlowe's overpowering self-confidence in his own abilities allowed him to face the passing of the remaining hours with an air of premature victory. Actually, Marlowe couldn't wait to see the golden full moon rise over the city. He believed that his earnest striving to regain the complete control of his mind would, indeed, release him from his dreaded curse. And now he waited, locked safely within his chambers as the full moon began its slow ascent into the night. The great glowing sphere
27
reached its climbing summit and then stopped, suspended in the dark sky as if it had been hung there by the hand of God. And far, far below, staring intently at the silent moon, stood Marlowe transfixed in a vigil; a vigil which would suddenly and violently be rewarded. He anxiously awaited the familiar tremors and convul- sions which would engulf him and hurl him into a world of un- believable nightmares, but noth- ing happened. The transformation was not taking place. Had he suc- ceeded, Marlowe thought to him- self, as he stood before his win- dow? Was it possible that he had defeated the curse, that he had gained a victory? Surely this must be true. He turned from the win- dow, overcome with roaring laughter, and left the room. He was indescribably happy with the sudden turn of events. The moon was at its zenith of fullness but Marlowe's youthful appearance re- mained unchanged. He was now standing at the head of the stairs, and as his thoughts wandered from the curse and the full moon glowing brilliantly through the darkness, the mental resistance he had constructed to oppose the transformation began to weaken. As he took the first steps down the stairs, Marlowe suddenly be- came aware that all was not well. He began rubbing his hands to- gether in a writhing motion, over and over, again and again. Then, before he was aware of the grow- ing pains deep within his body, Marlowe was viciously overcome with violent convulsions. He lost consciousness, sank to his knees, and tumbled down the stairs. The transformation now complete, Marlowe awakened from his swoon, his very being and soul replaced by the spell of the curse. Then the horrible hours were passed as before, with murder as Marlowe's only reward.
The following morning Mar- lowe awakened from a deep slum-
ber to find that he once again had regained his youth, but his blood-stained clothing, which was strewn throughout his chambers, served as a grim reminder of what he had done. The news of another Hyde Park murder was on everyone's lips. Detectives and police were everywhere, newspa- pers carried the horrible stories of murder, and London was screaming for action. It was as if the world had been turned up- side down. Marlowe, having just purchased a newspaper, was stand- ing in the foyer of his home read- ing the known details of the mur- der. Suddenly his eyes read some- thing which made him start back in sheer horror. The murder weap- on, a gold-studded walking stick, had been found lying beside the brutally-beaten body. It would be just a matter of time before Scot- land Yard would trace the cane to its owner. Marlowe rushed to his chambers and began a hurried search of the rooms. He emerged from his task a broken and be- wildered man. His walking stick was nowhere to be found. Mar- lowe realized that in one split sec- ond of neglect he had been totally ruined. He had fallen prey to his own evil passions and greed for revenge and there now seemed to be no escape left open to him.
The weight and chokingness of sudden defeat fell over Marlowe like a dark heavy shroud. All had been lost, all was now gone. Sure- ly there was escape somewhere beyond the gloom. He must find it, he must flee, he must run or die. Now alone, deep within the prison of fright, Marlowe lost all sense of reality. He flew into a wild rage like that of a mad beast caught in a snare and waiting for death. He longed to strike out against the world and tear it asunder; to unleash his madden- ing fury; to escape the confines of his own hell. Now was the time, delay might bring capture. Marlowe, with his great opera
cajje securely fastened about his neck, was rushing along the stair- case - landing, potential escape coming closer with every step. He was descending the stairs when a profound remembrance shot through his twisted mind — the scrolls, those wretched pieces of shriveled parchment with the damned formula scrawled upon them. As he thought, his face be- came contorted in an expression of sadistic pleasure. He would de- stroy the scrolls, tear them, burn them, obliterate them. They would haunt him no more. Marlowe would have the last laugh in de- stroying the very things that destroyed him.
He went back to his chambers and took the scrolls, still safely secured within the chest, from a secret vault in his bedroom wall. Clutching the chest in his hands, Marlowe hurried down the stairs and entered his study. He tossed the small box in the fireplace and emptied its contents on the black- ened stones. Taking a match from his pocket, Marlowe struck it and, with a laugh, applied the flame to the scattered scrolls and to the chest itself. The ancient wood splintered and cracked as the flames grew with consuming greed. Marlowe watched the fire, shout- ing with delight. He laughed and jeered as the objects burned and blackened in the flames. Mar- lowe's vile anger satisfied, he turned to leave but it was then that a portion of the chest burst, spewing fiery embers in all direc- tions. Some struck Marlowe's cape and quickly ignited the fine cloth. Before he knew what had hap- pened, flames were blazing all about him. He tore at his cape but it held fast. He gasped and stumbled before the great fire- place as the searing flames con- quered all. John James Marlowe lay burning with his scrolls and all that could be heard were his screams as the last embers of em- pire burned into ashes and ashes unto dust.
28
M
y
k I
0
"Think oi it, Znurk! A tomb from some lost civilization!"
r — I.
i-^f^
Btoj«DCoo*/ry
TREE
^=^ — ^
nn^
.!^^\
y / / 'a)
X'M A
THE BOMB
By MARGARET MARY BROWN
For Miss Patricia Kyle's English 101 Class
ILLUSTRATED BY ALVA FULLER
In the days of old when hnights
were hold And dragons roamed the land, Twas hard indeed to make great
speed To win a maiden's hand.
One had, in fact, to do a deed Of such tremendous scope. That one brave knight set out to
court With very little hope.
Twas not that he was cowardly For he was brave 'tis true, But this poor knight was ruiining
out Of daring things to do.
So Lancelot, that u>as his name. Set out with resolution To ask his wise friend Merlin W hat would be the best solution.
Now Merlin said that since there
were No dragons left to wrestle The knight should go at once and
buy Lance Awnings for her castle.
So Lancelot, although he thought The task extremely small. Went out and bought Lance
Awnings And then on his love did call.
I know that now you're wondering If she said yes or not, Well, you can bet your life she did 'Cause she liked Lance-a-lotl
30
ilcfjiEbemcnt
BY APRIL ROBINSON
IN the annals of history, many gods and goddesses have been regarded as the source of beauty and culture in man.
Much history of past civiliza- tions is revealed through the
culture that lives through the ages. We have studied the lives of the Egyptians, the Chinese and many others from their cultural remains.
Many students at the junior
college are helping to mold the culture and develop the civiliza- tion of our time. The culture that is developed in the students of today will help to express our civilization to the man of tomor- row.
SILVIA LOPEZ, a student of ballet, has been dancing for six years. She belongs to the Broward and the Dade County Civic Ballet and she has frequently performed on stage.
Her first experience in musical comedy, however, was last year when she played Susan in the JCBC production of "Finian's Rainbow." She found that she enjoyed it and will continue studying in the field of musical comedy when she transfers to a higher university level.
Although she wishes to con- tinue her dancing and acting, she plans to work toward a degree in fashions. She is a model in her free time, and she feels th^t mod- eling and dancing are closely re- lated, as they both use ballet positions and in both, "You deal largely with the discipline of the body."
Silvia has so large a field of interests, that she says she doesn't need any more opened to her, but rather needs only to develop one.
31
Quite frequently, if a student is interested in culture in one form, he is active in more than one phase. JAMES SUGUITAN is in- terested in many fields of self expression. Almost everything he does in the arts is for his own satisfaction.
He has written much poetry, and as well as having it published in the campus literary magazine, P'an Ku, he was managing editor on the magazine staff last year.
He started writing poetry in the eighth grade when he wrote descriptions and poems for the Little Flower's School literary pamphlet. At St. Thomas Aquinas, Jim continued taking a creative writing class which gave him much opportunity to express his emotions. He said that it doesn't really take much time, but he only writes when the mood strikes, "like on a moonlit night." He said, "When an outside stimuli works on you, you are more prone to write, especially poetry."
Besides expression through poetry, James does some painting
in oils. He won first prize in an art show in high school with a painting he called "Sunburst." From there the painting was sub- mitted to Barry college. After also winning first prize there, it continued on to New York and Philadelphia art shows.
He describes the picture as a form of "bumpy modern art," with a tree, a cloud, the sea, and the sun shining through the cloud. He claims that the original painting he entered was called "Tropical Serenity," but the school asked for more submissions. It was then when he submitted the canvas that he used to clean his brushes. He had no idea what it was sup- posed to represent until the art teacher began describing what she saw in what James had thought was simply the brush - cleaning canvas.
James plans to follow a career of teaching English and the mod- ern languages, but he feels he will continue both writing and paint- ing as long as he finds an outlet for self-expression.
m^M
^
IV
Often students find new fields opened to them after they enter college. ALICE CAMPBELL de- veloped an interest in dancing largely because of activity con- nected with the Junior College. She chose dancing partly for the exercise and partly for the music involved.
Last year she performed a Charleston dance for her talent in the Hollywood Home Show. After that, she continued taking dance in various forms, including yoga with music, and since then she has been in a dance recital.
Alice plans a career as a secre- tary or a business teacher. She feels that any dancing she does as an outside activity will prob- ably continue just for fun.
32
JULE HARKE, an alumnus from Ft. Lauderdale High in '65, is planning a career in teaching music. Alter he finishes junior college, he plans to attend either Florida State University or Princeton. "Both," he said, "have a fine music department."
Jule plays guitar and piano but is mostly interested in chorus. He hopes to someday direct a chorus of his own. He sang in the high school chorus and in the Ft. Lauderdale boys choir.
Some students wish to keep the cultural part of their life separate from their career. JACK VANDERPLATE wants to make English and literature his major field of study, for if he were a music major then music would be his job, "And jobs are work." He is content to continue his music for enjoyment.
Jack sings in a barber shop quartet they call the "Sunshine Southernaires," which has per- formed on occasions at the Yankee Clipper and the Gait Ocean Mile.
He also sings second tenor in the college chorus and the Ft. Lauderdale Symphony Chorus. Be- sides his activities in the vocal field, he is a student of piano and organ.
Often it is found that a student decides his field early in life. STELLA BEALL, a part-time stu- dent, found her field long ago when she decided to pursue the realms of music. She is a member of the Ft. Lauderdale Symphony Chorus and also accompanies the chorus director, George Sistrunk, while he teaches private voice lessons.
Stella was a piano student at JCBC for four semesters, and is interested in a career as an or- ganist. Her experiences in piano
include pianist for "Finian's Rain- bow" and pianist for South Brow- ard's last year's production of "Music Man."
Stella is taking organ lessons from Mrs. Lettie Ozaki, organist at Park Temple Methodist Church. She plays organ for the First Methodist Church and plans to continue her music education at Stetson after graduation from JCBC. "Opportunities for organ- ists," she feels, "are far greater than for piano unless one expects to become a concert pianist."
33
^:>.
RHONDA ACHOR, a graduate Irom Stranahan, is interested in dancing and drama. She has been a dance student for eight years and has a background in ballet, acrobatics and tap. After joining the dance club at Stranahan, she widened her interest in dance to the field of modern jazz. She now feels that ballet is "too precise and formal." "In modern dance," she said, "you have a chance to im- provise and move as you want."
Rhonda plans to make dancing her career someday, but will also obtain an elementary teaching degree.
A '65 alumna from South Broward, PENNY GATHER, has been taking ballet lessons for sev- eral years. She feels that she would love to make it her life's work, but she hasn't yet decided to make that final decision.
Only recently Penny has found dancing to be a different and complete world of its own and
she would like to become a part of it.
Penny has always been inter- ested in music and she plays the piano and the oboe. She was the drum major at South Broward last year and found she enjoyed directing the band, but dancing is a relatively new and exciting world open to her that she wishes to pursue.
STEVE LARVENZE, a music major, exercises his talents out- side of school. He plays drums, string bass, and trombone in a jazz trio. The group plays mostly modern jazz and Latin American rhythms. They have performed at the Pan American and the Yankee Clipper.
Steve has also had experience in teaching music to the begin- ning and intermediate band classes at Nova, and has taught privately under the direction of Mr. Fitchhorn.
34
SPORTS at JCBC
by Jack Cresse
FROM PHYSICAL EDUCATION, TO INTRA- MURALS. TO INTER-COLLEGIATE. THE COACHES AND INSTRUCTORS OF THE HPR DEPARTMENT ARE TRUSTED WITH THE NEVER ENDING TASK OF KEEPING JCBC PHYSICALLY FIT THIS IS THEIR STORY. THE SPORTS STORY OF THE JUNIOR COL- LEGE OF BROWARD COUNTY
T„
-HE importance of maintaining the physical as well as the mental well-being of the student at- tending college never has, and never will be, over- looked. Of course, the main purpose of any institu- tion of higher learning is preparing the individual mentally for future life. But to disregard the phys- ical aspect of education would be purely inexcusable. The importance of physical education has been a part of all societies dating back to the earliest em-
pires. The Olympics, inspired by rulers before the birth of Christ, and perhaps the most spectacular of all athletic events, represent the ultimate in amateur athletic accomplishments. In all great things there is a starting point — a beginning. Every great ath- lete had a start somewhere. A professional baseball player may have had his in Little League. But the greater majority of all professional as well as ama- teur athletes would not be where they are today if it were not for the stress on physical exercise and
35
team play in this country's educational institutions, from elementary school through college.
As in high school, physical education courses are required for graduation at virtually every junior college and university in the United States. The Jun- ior College of Broward County is no exception.
Each student, with the exception of those over 29 years of age, those with military service, or those with medical excuses, are expected to take at least four hours credit of physical education. This is one of the requirements made of the JCBC students. It would seem natural that the material gains of phys- ical exercise would merit considerable consideration in the scheduling of all classes without making it a requirement. But there are those who would dis- regard the opportunity available. It is for these stu- dents that the administration makes the HPR courses a requirement.
lifting, and tumbling; and Aquatics, which include swimming, diving, life-saving, and scuba diving.
The school catalog aptly sums up the beliefs concerning Physical Education. It reads: "Physical education is that part of the college curriculum which is concerned with the physical well-being of each student with consideration for the social, intel- lectual, and emotional aspects of his development as they relate to the physical in the learning of skills, development of endurance, strength, and organic vigor."
• * •
It is indeed true to assume that the students need for physical activity is adequately met by the array of HPR courses. Yet, as is evident in all schools, these courses amount to only half the available resources, at least as far as the average student is concerned. For the HPR Department pro-
Unlike those of high school, a wide variety of courses are offered. In fact the Health, Physical Ed- ucation, and Recreation Department offers more classes than any other department.
For term I of this school year, the HPR De- partment offered approximately thirty courses. In comparison the Science Department offered half that number. Of course this is naturally so, since there are such a wide variety of sports to be found, so many in fact that the HPR Department has divided them into four basic areas.
These include Individual and Dual Recreational Activities, such as bowling, golf, tennis, and even fencing and ice skating; Team Sports, including foot- ball, basketball, volleyball, and soccer; Physical Fit- ness, offering such courses as gymnastics, weight
vides an excellent intra-mural program. Although these activities are attended by those with above- average ability, they are available to all students. For the first time in the school's history these activ- ities are to be operated on a year-round basis. In the past, they were made available only in the first two regular semesters, but were eliminated in the two summer terms. Perhaps the rumors that the current four semester system the Junior College op- erates under might be abolished in favor of a regular trimester system have prompted this change. What- ever the reasons, the change is a fine one, current with the growing college's needs.
The only limiting factor in I-M action is that which prevents a varsity athlete from participating in the given sport that he participates in at the
36
varsity level. In other words, a varsity basketball player may not play on an I-M basketball team. However, he may play Softball or football. Some- times physical education majors are used as coaches on the I-M level, providing experience ". . . the best teacher."
I-M activities are many and varied, as men- tioned. Keen competition, a necessary ingredient in any sport, is given an extra incentive by the hand- some trophies awarded to the over-all champions in each sport.
As in HPR courses, both individual and team sports are to be found. A total of ten activities filled the last school year, and more are planned for this year.
Mr. R. L. Landers and Miss Elaine Gavigan, as I-M heads, will devote much of their time to
these activities, even though both are tied up in other areas. It is a credit to the HPR staff and the Junior College that such a dedicated pair partake so much of their time to make the JCBC I-M pro- gram what it is today.
In addition to his work in I-M's, Landers finds time to assist the head basketball coach, Mr. Clin- ton Morris, and the newly-appointed baseball coach, Mr. Leroy Wheat. He also finds time to referee local high school basketball games.
Miss Gavigan is head coach of the college's coed tennis team, in addition to her duties as ladies' I-M director and HPR instructor.
If these two individuals punched a time clock, their total hours for a week's work would easily accede 60.
Intra-mural activities include football, basket- ball, Softball, volleyball, tennis, ping-pong, handball.
bowling and golf. Landers lines up the men's activ- ities in these events, and Gavigan handles the ladies' activities, excepting those less suitable for feminine participation, of course.
One other activity has not been mentioned as an I-M, but very well could be. It is the college Judo Club, headed by a student. Bob Ripple. Ripple is well qualified for the job, having attained the rank of Brown Belt, which simply means you don't mess with this fellow, brother, unless you're a Black Belt or something. All kidding aside, Ripple has done a fine job with the judo men and has made his club among the most popular on campus — at least the most respected.
• * •
There are, as mentioned, material gains to be had from intra-murals, as admittedly there are in other extra-curricular activities. Yet there is one gain that is conspicuously absent from most other activ- ities. For there is the spirit of competition — not in mind, but in body — for this is the true aim of all sports. Without it, there is merely play.
Competition also is found to be the only link between I-M"s and inter-collegiate activities. There are many differences clearly evident between the two. Yet there is always the common denominator — competition.
All the ingredients of sport reach their highest proficiency at any college in team competition be- tween schools. Here skill and competition are re- fined to as near perfection as is possible on the junior college level.
The best, and only the best, athletes find posi- tions on the school's basketball, baseball, golf and tennis teams. Many things enter this world, which is far apart from the bowling class that meets Wednesday afternoon. Here a grade is not recorded. Performances are more closely recorded. The actual sport is more demanding. All is entirely different. It is on a higher plane. Here the tedious labor of the head coach is rewarded; the school name is up- held; and the team's many hours of practice are subjected to their stiffest test.
The school, the coach, the players. All are more or less dependent upon each other.
A successful coach is a winner. He is a winner because he is able to recognize fine talent. He is able to mold this talent into a fine working unit; a unit whose main objective is to win — to uphold the school's good name. To do so is to obtain self satis- faction. To win is to obtain satisfaction, but is a loss a failure? In some ways,-" yes, it is. But in others it is not. How you played the game is an important factor too often neglected in evaluation of per- formances.
37
Here, several other factors enter into consider- ation.
One is team work. The finest players will not win consistently if there is not a highly developed degree of team work.
Another is good coaching. The finest players cannot perform without the guiding mind and hands of a good coach. As mentioned, a good coach is one that recognizes and knows how to develop fine tal- ent. But there is more. With the coach rests the burden of evaluation and correction. He must field the best of the available talent. And, when the team fails, it is he who must decide the corrective meas- ures to be employed. It is almost as if he were a general, directing soldiers and planning tactics. Of course, just as the best general will meet failure with inferior troops, the best coach will find victory unobtainable with meager talent. Observe Casey Stengel.
The Junior College of Broward County is for- tunate to have the fine coaching staff it does. Dur- ing the first years of inter-collegiate activities at the college, success was less than desirable. But being the young school it was, the results were more or less expected. Last year the results of the coaches' labors were finally rewarded when all three of the varsity teams managed winning seasons.
The basketball team, in its third year, had a respectable 11-10 record and a third-place finish in conference play. Things look bright for the future as head coach Clinton Morris has had fine success in landing top area talent. The results of this season will tell much of the coaching, the players, and the school itself.
The baseball team, in its second year, managed a 13-12 record although seriously hampered by the loss of top players. Highlights of the season were three wins in four attempts over state champs. Man- atee Junior College.
The coed tennis team, in its first year, per- formed brilliantly, losing only to the University of Miami girls — their only loss in six tries. The Miss Gavigan Group defeated Dade Junior twice, Barry twice and the University of Miami once. The 5-1 slate was the best, percentage-wise, of any JCBC team ever.
Athletics are often used as a basis for evaluat- ing a college by the general public. Sometimes a school is better known for the state championship it won rather than the academic success it enjoys.
The latter should be the basis of evaluation for the two have only one thing in common. They start with the same letter. Other than this, they are as far apart as night and day. A school with a fine football team might not be the best place to get an education and vice-versa.
But when a school is better known for its ath- letics, it should not be considered academically lack- ing. It would seem that if academics are at a high level, then they would naturally be unrecognized by the public. It is when they are at low tide that they are recognized. It might be well to ask then, "Do we want to be recognized?" A school that is academi- cally sound is like a good baseball umpire. Neither is noticed. Let the umpire make a mistake and all will know his name. Let him operate without error and his presence is barely considered. Let a college earn a bad record and everyone says, ". . . NO GOOD." Let the college be academically sound and there is not a murmur of discontent.
Academics are not for spectators. It is here that the difference between academics and athletics is found. Athletics are definitely for the spectator. Sports thrive on support. This is the reason why Notre Dame is better known for football than the average GPA of its graduating class.
If all that has been said is true, then there must be a sort of balance between the two. Academ- ics and athletics balance out at the better schools, one being recognized, the other not. At JCBC the academic standards are good and the athletics are reaching maturity. This may be the year that the scales become balanced. With the addition of golf and men's tennis to the sports program at JCBC, the school is beginning to blossom out athletically. In this area, the school is starting to establish itself. In academics, it has become notably settled. The college is growing and with this growth come higher demands, demands that will be met, both academ- ically and athletically. The scales will continue to balance themselves and JCBC will continue to be a proud school.
I
38
I
From Sociology Lectures
to Director of Student Activities
Mr. NEIL S CRISPO
By MILDRED EDWARDS
\^
A new perspective of activities is in store for the students at JCBC. Mr. Neil Crispo has a new- position and he brought with him his unique and invigorating style. Mr. Crispo has assumed the duties of Director of Student Activities, replacing Mrs. Nan S. Hutchison, the new Dean of Women at Florida Atlantic University.
As his new appointment be- comes more demanding, Mr. Cris- po will eventually discontinue his instruction of sociology. He will, however, continue to advise the Student Government Association for another year.
A graduate of Florida State Uni- versity, where he received his B.S. degree in Social Sciences and his M.S. degree in Sociology, Mr. Crispo has new and extensive plans and ideas for die coming year.
Widi the exception of a few modifications, the Student Activi- ties Board will be run on the same basis as previously established. Mr. Crispo hopes to plan "Activi-
ties that correlate with the aca- demic curriculum of the students, and have more activities that will enrich the environment of the stu- dent body." He would like to bring more renowned individuals to the college to give lectures and perhaps to spend a few days on campus. With this new forecast, the students will not only be able to talk with these various individ- uals in question-and-answer ses- sions, but also in personal and in- formal comersations.
As the Director or Student Ac- tivities, Mr. Crispo plans to make the students aware of the existence of the Student Activity Board (SAB) and its functions. In addi- tion, he plans to increase the ac- tivities made available for stu- dents during a semester period.
When asked whether his new appointment will offer any chal- lenges, he replied, "Yes, definitely. I like new challenges, especially this one, for it will bring me closer to the student body and the aca- demic resources of the school."
39
March 29th — the musical production "Finians Rainbow'
Th
e
by Mildred Edwards
SAB
Trike race — the March 28th SGA Picnic.
Ballet number durii tation by the Ruth
Within the workings of this in- stitution there is an organization functioning known as the Student Activity Board (SAB). The main purpose of this board is to co- ordinate and encourage campus activities which are beneficial to the students and to the college. The authority of the SAB is un- questionable and the board is re- sponsible only to the President of the College.
Representation of the students and of the instructors is one out- standing feature of the SAB. In contrast, in many colleges which have similar organizations the boards consist of instructors and administrators only. The Student Activity Board at JCBC is com- posed of five members of the fac- ulty and four members of the student body. The members from the faculty are appointed by the President of the College and the student members are appointed by the President upon recom- mendation by the Student Gov- ernment Association. As the school continues to grow the membership of the board will increase also.
40
L
I
life numiia t.-B im by ife fefe
es of this il-
1 tie Studen; i). The mail! j id is to CO- ■ rage campii!. beneficial to I the collesf ' : SAB IS K- board is re- President c:
the studens rs is one oai- ' the SAB, k' olleges whif:. nizations tlf istnirtors d The Student 'CBC is cor- ' ;rs of the fa:- Bbers of i''- lembers fro: oiited by li^ lOege d tt' , ire app«""^; upon tecoffi'i Student GoV'j AstheschM'i lemefflberstiip' icrease also-
h Lyceum presen- ompany.
There are many outstanding functions of the SAB, one of which is to enforce the rules and regulations which govern all clubs and organizations, with the excep- tion of athletics, publications, de- partmental activities, and drama- tics. The board also screens all requests for new clubs and organ- izations. If the prescribed stand- ards aren't met by a student group, or if the board doesn't agree entirely that the purpose of an organization is in the best in- terest of the students and of the college, it will be denied recogni- tion. It will also be denied the use of college facilities, represen- tation in other college organiza- tions. Student Government, intra- murals, and all privileges pertain- ing to the campus.
The board is responsible for all student social events and activi- ties— dances, Lyceum programs, contests, benefits, etc. — and peti- tions must be filed and advanced approval secured for each event.
One of the most important functions of the SAB is to com-
May 26th — the second SGA Picnic.
pose a recommended budget to be submitted to the President of the College concerning the Stu- dent Activity fees. These fees consist of the $15.00 activity fee paid by each full-time student at the beginning of each term.
Dr. Lee Henderson, of the State Department of Education, Junior College Division, commented that, "The Constitution of the Student Activity Board of the Junior Col- lege of Broward County is a good one, for it spells out the respon- sibilities of all the students on and off campus." Former Director of Student Activities, Mrs. Nan S. Hutchison, reported that the eval- uation committee in April, 1965, was also pleased to learn that JCBC had such an organization (SAB) operating on campus. The committee praised the SAB for the job it has been doing as a rul- ing board.
To date, the operation of the Student Activity Board has proven very successful, and with well-qualified members it should remain as effective in the future.
March 18th Lyceum — "The Barber of Seville" presented by the National
Opera Company.
41
007 DOESt
By Pam Edwards
THIS is an article about the library. Contrary to first impressions, the title does have a sig- nificant connection. So, what is there to write about a library? Well, it's a building or a complex of areas, it contains 20,100 books, it seats 224, it's open 62 hours a week, and you'll find the main collections on the second floor of building L. Inter- esting? Not particularly! But, that's it, in a nutshell, the physical description of your library, the library at JCBC. Is that all? Not by a long shot!
What types of books does the library house? Who selects these books? What will the library offer the students in the near future? These are questions that should interest every student on this campus, but how many can answer them? Thus, the purpose of this article.
The title is not merely a gimmick to make you read this article; it's a fact! More than likely you won't find the James Bond epics listed in the card catalogue, but if you have to find the political out- come of the Hundred Years War, the originator of the heroic couplet, or the definition of the thermionic diode, you couldn't have come to a better place. The college library exists to supplement classroom work with independent study and research. Recreational reading doesn't come under this category. So, unless Broward Junior College opens a department of Home Economics, Joe's news stand is probably better stocked with volumes on "How to Sew in Ten Easy Lessons" than the library on this Junior Col- lege campus.
A lot of time and effort goes into the selection of the books found in the Broward Junior College library. The reviewers don't wear "I'm Particular" buttons on their vests, but they are particular. Every month reviewers for the American Library Associa- tion review books especially for liberal arts colleges. Of these reviews, about 3500 are selected and pub- lished in "Choice," a monthly magazine of the American Library Association published for liberal arts colleges. This is the principle device used in the selection of books for the JCBC library. Even gifts are either accepted or refused in a discriminating and tactful manner. To be sure, the accumulation of books in this Junior College library is no "hit or
^^
m •a
m
miss" venture. The selection is exactly what the word implies — very select.
The immediate expansion program for the li- brary is already becoming a reality. Six central class- rooms on the ground floor of the library building have been converted into one large study area. This provides a place for students to study who are using their own materials, such as text books, etc. Reserve books are also kept in this room, as well as the daily newspapers and duplicate copies of LIFE, TIME, SATURDAY EVENING POST, and SPORTS IL-
42
LIVE HERE
LUSTRATED. Thus, the Hbrary reading room on the second floor is reserved for students using all other references provided by the library.
One expansion factor of the library is constant. This is the steady inflow rate of new books — specifically five hundred a month. To comply with this accumulation, 20% more shelving has also been added.
Last year, $6,000 worth of books were known to have been stolen from the library and of these only one-fifth were returned. These figures suggest one
of two things: that this college has more than its share of slow readers or that it is swarming with kleptomaniacs. In either case, if you are the proud owner of one of these choice specimens, congratula- tions, you have contributed to a statistic!
When asked what purpose a college library serves, Mr. Grady Drake, head librarian, gave this viewpoint: "College presents two general aspects to the student — that of formal learning and that of social development. The college library is primarily concerned with formal learning." Unfortunately, many students on this campus are guilty of distort- ing this concept. These students believe that the library exists to further their personal social develop- ment. At least that is the impression given when the library suddenly takes on the atmosphere of a branch office of the student center. The head li- brarian has described the self-discipline problem in the library as "appalling." This may sound like an expression of a pet peeve, but when was the last time you were trying to do some last minute cram- ming for a Chemistry exam and the two girls across, the table found last Saturday night's dates to be the subject of the hour? To quote a passage from The Prophet by Kahlil Gibran, "in talking, thinking is half murdered."
What attitude should the student take toward the library so that the individual receives the great- est benefit possible from what is offered to him? Mr. Drake gave this response: "In class lectures, students are exposed to ideas, facts, and controversial opin- ions. Their own interest and curiosity should propel them to find additional information to substantiate or refute these ideas, facts, and controversial opin- ions. The ideal situation is one in which through faculty lectures and the library reading, the students develop their own independent and personal body of knowledge."
The next time you venture into the library, by accident or on purpose, take a moment to look around the room. More than likely all you will see is a lot of books, doing nothing but just lining the walls. This "wall-lining" was a rather expensive item. When was the last time you were offered an $80,000 gift, absolutely free?
43
Excerpts from H Cnropean Summer
Reminiscences of foreign travels
from the journals of two instructors
of the Junior College of Broward County
THE CASTLE OF CHILLON — MONTREUX, SWITZERLAND
JUNE, 1965
Like some great beast come down from the mountains to drink, Chillon Castle hovers on the edge of Lake Leman turning narrow- sHtted eyes up to the Alps and open-arched windows down, across the lake. In the belly of the stone creature is the thirteenth century dungeon with its "seven columns, massey and grey," as Byron called them. The third pillar from the low entrance has a glass plate protecting Byron's name, carved there in 1816. Modern drip-dry ladies stop, grab for somebody's hand and whisper, "That's Byron's name — it really is." And then
By Mrs. Barbara Jean Clark
Anne Hathaway's cottage, Stratford-on-Avon, England
and Miss Judith M. Rehm
_^ JUNE, 1960
illATHER than the Harrogate- York route, we chose the Lake District road to Windmere, Gras- mere, Wordsworth's Cottage, Kes- wick and Carlisle to Scotland. The woods were lovely and, like the rest of the English countryside in early summer, quiet, peaceful. "A corner of England" in the native's memory is quickly rea- lized in them and in the beauty
Spanish matador El Cordobes in the arena at Barcelona
44
of the wildflowers — lupen, fox- glove, and poppies — that we can touch today, with a little imagina- tion, from the windows of our Anglia, they seem so close to us. Dove Cottage is not very large, on a main thoroughfare sur- rounded by hedge. Here the poet saw into his environment to do with it as his temperament al- lowed him; here in tranquillity he returned to renew his sense of proportion and tolerance, his se- curity from the earth. In contrast, the human variety and often lack of proportion in the city con- tinued to dominate Blake's in- tense images, while the tranquillity of nature, where it could be found, he believed had little to do with men's lives. I disagree with Blake.
JULY, 1960
Most of the decorations found in the churches of Rome were
Photo Credits:
Color photos through courtesy oi Miss Judith M. Rehm and Mrs. Barbara Jean Clark.
Photo of El Cordobe's from LIFE Magazine
they remember him from school, or something, and consult their blue guide sheet to find out what Byron was doing there besides carving his name a hundred and forty-nine years ago. They read of Bonivard — chained four years — sixteenth century — too long ago. The opaque silken cobwebs hanging like draperies in the bone- chilling room are almost too thick to be real. Even Byron seems un- able to take the webs seriously when he has Bonivard claim, "With spiders I had friendship made, And watched them in their sullen trade." But one has only to breathe in the cold, lean against the moist stone and look long at those black swaying things in the corner. Even the drip-dry lady
moves out fast, clutching some- body by the hand.
Outside the sun gets at the stone and dries it off, makes potted geraniums and crawling vines bright green, floods into the huge halls. It doesn't quite make it to the thirteenth century latrines, but the castle men probably didn't either since the castle has only two, nearly inaccessible, with one seat each extending over the lake. But there are plenty of places to wait where sun and men can fuse into a mood of timeless contem- plation. Window seats beside the lake may be medieval, but they speak to a modern need — the need to collect oneself in the pres- ence of vast mountains, deep wa- ters and the stones laid by men.
Courtyard ot Chilian Castle
added 300 to 400 years ago until the present decade, such as those in St. Peter's. Michelangelo's work for his first commission, "The Dis- position of Jesus from the Cross" or more commonly called "The Pieta," is the first statuary on the right side within the cathedral. This sculptor saw Mary not as a woman of fifty, heartbroken at the most agonizing moment of her earthly life as she holds her nearly dead son in her arms, but as a girl of eighteen, benign, revealing her eternal hope in mankind and her own purity of concentration in the thought.
AUGUST, 1960
Our usual comforts and cleanli- ness influence us to reject Spanish poverty and filth, and to be disgusted by the ragpickers of Madrid who make a part time business of begging. Yet it is too easy to walk away rationalizing you can't feed all of Spain's poor. In Toledo, I saw my first bullfight, "en la sombra," for I could afford
to pay for the better seats and to bargain with the saloonkeepers in their own tongue. El Greco's vi- sions of his country's two class system are not so insane, after all. (Wasn't it a militant court that acknowledged him unstable?) Both were present to watch the na- tional sport; only the green uni- formed "soldados" carried rifles 'o prevent any disturbances from some of the villagers apparently happy on vino, yet we had noticed these official escorts and overseers in other cities, in Barcelona, Zara- gossa, Valladolid, and in the coun- try near the Pyrenees border. Their ominous proximity re- minded me I might try to under- stand one of their few forms of public entertainment rather than simply dislike it. Why not cele- brate when a brave torero con- tends with, and kills ingeniously, the threat of power upon him? The bullfight is their comedy; it is our tragedy as we react so seriously and literally to the scene
of bandilleros sending shafts into the bull's shoulders, his attempting to gore the horses in his anger and revenge, his beauty, strength and seeming invincibility in the arena cut down in the final thrust of the "espalda."
In reality, as in Spanish art, the contestants are more evenly matched than we suppose. My pounding heart in the last mo- ments, my turning away at the strike, and intense ache are a mix- ture of American sentimentality and a failure to understand, if not accept, a violent, dramatic way of offering and hopefullv achieving an answer to a difficult life with few possible, graceful successes. For the city girl from "The Hub of the Universe" the matador and his bull have performed well this afternoon, and have even recalled, with surprising awareness and a chuckle, her initial receptions in New England questioning a South- ern education. It was time to leave!
45
cJntlod action:
The look is complete; the clothes are so much a part of the whole that the girl's looks come first. Only that second glance will tell you how well dressed she really is. The result — absolutely great !
THE COURREGES — Belted drop-waist wool jumper fea- tures solid red top with red and green plaid skirt. By Picadilly for Juniors 5-15. About $15. Model: Pixie Davis.
-»>^«H8c
AFTER FIVE — Black crepe sheath with sequined bodice — bowed sleeveless bolero jacket is detachable. Young junior design featured in Burdine's College Shop, about $30. Empire waist A-line combines black crepe over cream. By Gerald McCann of London, featured in Burdine's Gold Coast Room. About $40. Models: Pixie Davis and Jane Mall.
THE CLASSIC LOOK — (Left) Dacron-cotton A-line skirt by Harburt, about $12. Long sleeve pinstriped shirt by Gant, about $9. Cable knit cardigan in 100% wool, by Cole- brook, about $18.
(Right) Madras A-line skirt with side-front pleat. By Junior- ite, about $8. Long-sleeve oxford shirt by Ellen Tracy, about $5. 100% virgin wool cardigan by Garland, about $13. Models: Jane Hall and Karen Winkopp.
46
Guaranteed
Su &^atn S(/f{fatc/i
"OP" ART — Dacron-cotton A-line "Hip-Hound" skirt. For Juniors by Mr. Vifo of Miami. About $8. Cut-out lool< in a wool courreges jumper with hip-slung belt. By Juniorite, about $18. Both argyle and checked turtleneck tops in dacron-cotton and nylon knit. With matching stockings, by Juniorite, about $10. Models: Karen Winkopp and Cheryl Fuini.
BELL-BOnOMS — "Stems and Buds" by Mr. Dino. Striped bell-bottom pants, about $12. Matching cut-out top also about $12.
"Caprisians" knits by Smartee. Bell-bottom pants about $15. Sleeveless striped top about $7. Jacket about $15. Models: Cheryl Fuini and' Jane Hall.
47
. , ta tccttt u<uc (M
BEHOLD THE BIKINI! — Blue gingham hip-hugger by
Jantzen, about $20. Modeh Cheryl Fuini. Blue striped two- piece suit with yellow trimmed top. By Catalina, about $19. Model: Karen Winkopp. White arnel skirted hip-hug- ger, about $18. Model: Jane Hall. Blue and white flowered print two-piece by Jantzen, about $18. Model: Pixie Davis.
48
. L
KNOWLEDGE
LEADERSHIP
SUCCESS
THE FRESHMAN
RETREAT
by John Leatherwood
DR. E. G. WILLIAMSON
V.
WORKSHOP NUMBER 4: STUDENT GOVERNMENT
HE finish of a brilliant speech; a thunderous, standing ovation; a fond wish of goodnight and the second annual Freshman Retreat of the Junior Col- lege of Broward County came to an end. For two days, August 12 and 13, almost 150 students and a sizable number of educators had attended lectures, speeches and workshops, at Fort Lauderdale's Beach Club Hotel, in which were explained the purposes.
aims, and plans of the Junior College. All said and done was for the benefit of the selected freshmen leaders in the hopes that these students would find their places, take front positions, and achieve worth for themselves, their fellow students, and their college.
Attendance of the eight workshops, designed to give a complete look at all aspects of campus life, took up the bulk of time, but all was not work. There
49
The educators discuss Retreat pros and cons at a morning coffee break.
were a breakfast, two lunches, two banquets, recrea- tion and get acquainted sessions, and a dance, all during which the students found ample time to take a relaxed break.
Leadership, the main point of the Retreat, was stressed throughout most areas of discussion and its purpose was probably best summed up by Dr. Rob- ert Weigman of the University of Florida when he said, "The person who leads the group is the one who serves it most effectively." As equally impres- sive was Florida Atlantic University's Dean Robert Breitenstein's remark that, "The junior college grad- uate exceeds in academic excellence over the student who has been raised as a freshman in his own four year university." This launched another aspect of discussion — no one has to apologize for attending a junior college.
The freshmen who represented almost every high school in Broward County, were told that upon entering a four year institution after a junior college graduation they will earn slightly less "A's" than the four year students but far less "D's", "F's" or
John Leatherwood discusses the scope of the Junior College literary magazine, P'an Ku, at the Campus Communications Workshop.
:''M
Dr. Melvene Hardee delivers the closing speech
Freshmen I number 1
isten intently to the informative discussions of Workshop Junior College Pros and Cons.
A session activities.
of the Student Government Workshop discusses Freshman
"I's". They were also informed that a "D" in college is an "F" in disguise, to join extracurricular activities but not to spread oneself's interests too thin, to keep a 2.00 average but to strive for a 3.00, and to get that degree for it is the key that unlocks the door to the college of one's choice.
Dr. E. G. Williamson of the University of Min- nesota, one of the two Retreat guest speakers, gave an eminent discussion at the first banquet. His main point of remark, "The striving for excellence is the characteristic of an educated person," was stressed admirably throughout his talk. Florida State Univer- sity's Dr. Melvene Hardee comprised the other member of the guest speaking duo. Her keynote speech, "What's Junior About the Junior College?", was an excellent opening to the two days' events, but her finale, in which she used her famed traveling companion Rockhead Freshman and, through the use of six different pieces of coral rock, each depict- ing Rockhead in a different light, took him through every phase of the Retreat in a remarkably inspiring speech, was a truly grand performance. Stating that, "Process is the most important part of a retreat,"
50
I
Margi Kitzmiller takes time out at poolside for an interview.
Dr. Hardee took the meat of the two days' dis- cussions and ingeniously threw it back to the as- sembly in a brilliant summation. It was a fitting end to a very fine and worthwhile affair.
During the afternoon of the last day of the Retreat, many sophomores made it a point to inter- view a number of the freshmen in regards to the various happenings and points that were made in the days' sessions. There were four main questions asked: what one thing about the Retreat was most impressive to you; if you have made previous opinions about the Junior College has attending the Retreat changed any of them; what have you gained most from the Retreat; and did you hold a leader- ship position in high school. The answers received were surprisingly rewarding and informative. When asked if any of his previous opinions had changed, Mike Katz answered, "Definitely. At first I was skeptical about Broward Junior but now I've made a complete change in my opinion. I am very happy to be here and the Retreat has inspired me to get out and get the job done." Margi Kitzmiller was as sincere in her reply, "I was afraid that JCBC would be filled with clique groups but I'm happy to find that a clique atmosphere appears absent in college." When asked what most impressed him about the Retreat, Dave Brown commented, "I am surprised
Elaine Frate Mike Kati Carol Shafer
with the smoothness of the Retreat, the well-planned organization, and the good food served to us. I ex- pected less." Bill Mandeville explained, "The sopho- more and faculty leaders knew what they were doing and really had something to offer. I like the array of teachers and the great amount of intelligence dis- played."
When Elaine Frate was questioned as to what she gained from the Retreat, she answered, "I had no thought of extracurricular activities before the Retreat but now I desire a club membership." Carol Shafer was, "Prompted to join Silver Sands and, possibly, a Student Government committee." When asked what overall gains he had made by attending the Retreat, Greg Fitzpatrick replied, "I've gained a better understanding of college and know what to expect."
Many freshmen were pleased with the idea of debating a sound argument with their instructors, and the well used phrase "you get out of it what you put into it" really stuck with them. But probably the most striking achievement of this year's Retreat was the selling of leadership for, at the close of the final hour, the great majority of the freshmen had been inspired to leap into the job and take command. This alone made the Freshman Retreat a truly vibrant success.
Dr. Dorothy Leach promotes student leadership at Workshop number 5. The Dance; Freshmen and Sophomores alike jumped to the rolling
beat of the Cellar Dwellers.
51
IN MEMORIAM
|
JOHN YDST, A.B. |
M |
S. |
|||
|
MATHEMATICS |
|||||
|
JUNE |
27, |
igDB - SEPTEMBER |
5, |
19S5 |
On this day ^ we, the students of the Junior College of Broward County, wish to express our love and appreciation for the dedicated hfe of a great and understanding teacher. Mr. John Yost lielped the vast majority of those with whom he worked. It is with a sense of deeply felt loss that we have him leave us to go to a rewarding life in the future. Wherever he will be in the timeless years to come, we know that he will see his God and know that, with us, his mission on this earth was done well. The Editors and Staff of Silver Sands humbly dedicate the following Administration and Faculty pages to the memory of Mr. Yost.
52
Presenting
The ADMINISTRATION
and FACULTY
of the
JUNIOR COLLEGE
of
BROWARD COUNTY
1965-1966
COLLEGE ADMINISTRATION and ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
E. P. Lauderdale, Ed.D.
Dean of Instruction
Harvey B. Dates, Ed.D.
Dean of Administration
JacK D. Taylor, Ed.D.
Dean of Students
Lester B. Trussler, M,A. Dean of Admissions and Records
Bernard M. Campbell, B.A., M.A.
Assistant Director of Special Programs
Norma B. Chernok, B.S.
Director, Medical Assisting Program
\ ^\
Gordon Chesser, B.S., M.S.
Assistant Director of Admissions and Records
Grady Drake B.S., B.S. in L.S.
Director of Library Services
Ray M. Gover, B.S., M.A.
Assistant Director of Admissions and Records
.^
\
V
Walter H. Jarecke, B.S., M.A., Ed.D.
Director of Advisement and Institutional Research
Rex C. Kidd, B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D.
Assistant Dean for Special Programs
Albert Robertson, A.B.
Supervisor of Business Affairs
Glen A. Rose, B.S., M.H.P.E.
Assistant Director of Special Programs
53
Margaret E. Brashears B.S., E.D.M.
Counselor
Gibson A. Cameron, Jr. '■^ A, A.S., Ed.M.
"^ ja" Counselor
..;JiJO
Louise R. Dowerman A.B.. B.S. in L.S.
Librarian
George F. McCall, Jr. B.S., M.Ed.
Coordinator of Placement
SPECIAL SERVICE STAFF
James F. McGowan
B.S., M.A.
Director of Law Enforcement and Police Administration
^ Ronald A. Narel B.A., M.A.
Counselor
Mary Pardee A.B., B.S. in L.S.
Librarian
Margaret F. Porter B.A., M.Ed.
Reading Specialist
Lois D. Shull, B.A., M.A.
Librarian
Roger B. Solomon B.S., B.D., M.A., Ed.S., Prof. Dip.
Counselor
Leon Watts, B.S., M.A.
Counselor
Rex Brumley, B.S., M.A.
Chairman of the Department
Nancy E. Estes B.S., M.A.
Elaine Gavjgan B.S., M.A.
Wilbur H. GIfford B.S.P.E., M.P.H.
DEPARTMENT of HEALTH,
PHYSICAL EDUCATION,
and RECREATION
Alma J. King B.S., M.Ed.
R. L. Landers B.B.A., M.E.
William M. McGehee B.S., M.A.
Clinton E. Morris B.S., M.A.
■ »» .9* K William A. Porterfield
B.S., M.A.
Leroy W. Wheat B.5., M.A.
54
,^1
DIVISION OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
Frances Abbott B.S., M.S.
Biology
A .^^\
- ]<. x^ Alvin D. Aurand
■* %i B.S., M.S.
Engineei'ing
William G. Bailey B.S., M.Ed. Chemistry
Wallace E. Bell B.S.E., M.Ed.
Mathematics
Dan H. Bishop
B.S., M.A. Physics
VWi^fKf'
Robert C. Cassell B.S., Ph.D.
Chairman of the Division
Lucius D. DeYampert B.S., M.S.T,
Geology
David E. Erikson B.A., M.A.
Mathematics
Arthur H. Foss A.B., A.M.
Head, Dept. of Math.
Minerva Holmberg A.B., A.M.
Biology
Lucille Holmes B.S., M.S. Biology
Annie L. Lang A.B., A.M. Mathematics
Joel M. Martin B.S., M.A.E.
Director of Planetarium
V John W. Medusky
B.S., M.S., M.S.T.
Mathematics
Ben Bockstege, Jr. B.S., M.S
Mathematics
Henry Paul Graziano B.S., M.Ed. Biology
ft»», <J» I Neal T. Morar
B.S., M.S. . _-, Biology
Alan B. Cantor B.S.Ed., M.A.
Mathematics
V. 0. Guinn B.S., M.S.
Chemistry
Ralph H. Naleway B.S., M.A.
A\ "". Mathematics
George Douglas Clement B.S.E., M.Ed.
Mathematics
Ronald Haire B.S., M.S.
Chemistry
Ellen G. Nelms B.S., M.Ed.
Chemistry
James C. Cindon B.A., M.S.
Geology
Richard D. Hill, Jr. B.S., M.Ed.
Head, Dept. of Physical Sciences
, «* U Dudley A. Palmer
B.S.A.
Horticulture
55
^*^l
Mary Louise Perfect B.S., M.S.
Mathematics
C. E. Rhodes B.A., M.A.
Physics
Frank P. Sivik B.S., M.S.
Biology
Charles S. VanArsdall B.S., M.A.
Mathematics
Lewis A. Warwick A.B., M.A.
Mathematics
Albert A. Will, Jr. B.L.A., M.S.
Horticulture
(K— ..-„ Willard S. OeLara
fsi*9^fM B.M., M.M., D.M.
Chairman o( the Department
mS^
1*1
I>gK '^W Audelia Blankenship
, - ^ B.M., M.M.
Music
George J. Cavanagh B.A., M.A.
Speech
Elvira Dunlevy A.B., M.S.
jk^. Speech
Majorie B. Esco A.B., M.A.
Speech
DEPARTMENT OF FINE ARTS
William George Kern B.F.A., M.A.
Art
Betty McMillion A.B., M.A.
Music
Mildred Mulliken B.A., M.A.
Speech
1,1 David E. Pactor
B.S.. M.A,
Lawrence D. Tobe B.S., M.A.
Art
L k
Mary E. Wallace B.S., M.A.
Art
Jimmy 0. Woodle B.A., M.M.
Edward F. Kotchi B.S., M.Ed.
Assistant Dean for Technical Education
TECHNICAL EDUCATION
^i
Lawrence R.
Dieterich, Jr., B.S.
Director, Hotel- Motel Administration
56
%
Walter A. Faiks B.S., M.S.
Technical Education
^^
Gordon Mondin B.S.
Technical Education
John A. Sci(;liano B.S.Ed.
Electronics
Constance M. Borgschulte B.A., M.A.
Ann C. Bricgel B.A.. M.A.
English
Charles W. Brogdon B.S., M.S.
English
Marina BurdicK B.A., M.A.
Spanish
A.B., M.A.
English
Alfredo A. Cabaliero B.A., M.A.
■>> Spanish
' -7K «c| Barbara J. Clark
A.B., M.A.
English
DIVISION OF
LANGUAGE
AND LITERATURE
Homer M. Ledhetter, B.S., M.A., Ed.D. Chairman of the Division
Harry E. Crews B.A., M.Ed.
English
Lee Farthing Dickerson B.S., M.A.
English
Helen A. Easterly B.A., M.A.
English
Lucile Glaze B.S.. M.A.
English
Harold B, Hayes B.A.J.. M.E., Ph.D., in MX.
Jouf nalisin
Neda E Hill B.A., M.A.
English
Grace K. Johnston A.B., M.A.
English
Willard R. Kempton
A.B., M.A.
Head. Dept. of Mod- ern Foreign Lang.
s-H Jean Magers
" B.A., M.A.
English
Elsie E. Owen A.B., M.A.
English
57
John Pawlowski B.A., M.A.
Spanish
Donald C. Rigg B.A., M.Ed.
English
Norman S. Stebner B.S., M.A.
English
jf ^xk Frances Pedigo
' ^ A.B., M.A., Ph.D.
English
Jarrett C. Pharr A.B., M.A.
Spanish
Judith M. Rehm B.Ed., M.A.
English
Mary Russell B.A., M.A.
English
David Alan Shaw B.A., M.Ed.
English
Natalie G. Smith B.S., M.A., Ph.D.
German
Arthur Vanmeeveren B.A., M.A.
English
John Carter Weldon A.B., M.A.
Fiench
«,S, Roy L. Yater
^f B.A., M.A.
/ English
John F. Lot7 B.S., M.A., Ed.D.
Chairman of the Department
Timothy W. Donohue B.A., L.L.B., M.B.A.
Denver L. Ellison B.S. & B.A., M.A.T.
Joan H. Holloway B.A., M.A.
Doris M. IHorton B.S., M.S.
DEPARTMENT OF
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
AND ECONOMICS
Charles B. Howell, Jr. B.S., M.B.A.
, _, I Dennis W. Neely
.-< -A. A.B., M.Ed.
Mary Paul B.S., M.S.
Reyburn R. Roulston B.A., M.A.
Maxine G. Schenks A.B., M.A.
Peter S. Shenosky B.S., M.A.
Marion N. West B.A., M.A.
Millicent Williams B.S., M.B.A.
58
DIVISION OF SOCIAL SCIENCE
■ I Wayne E. Barton
T~> «~' B.A., M.A.
, ■ Education
Stewart Brown B.A.E., M.Ed.
Head, Department of Political Science
t; <^.«^
John M. Bunch B.A.E., M.Ed.
Head, Department of History
Paul W. Cauffiel B.A., M.S., Ed.O.
Head, Department of Psycfiology and Education
Dewey M. Stowers, B.A., M.A., Ed.D.
Cfiairman of the Division
**' Gilbert S. Guinn
B.A., M.A.
History
,,^ _^ _» Curtiss W. Oakes
\Wi*»/| B.S., M.A.
Political Science
John L. Redding, Jr. A.B., M.A.
History
George Roberts A.B., M.A.
Psycfiology
li Harry J. Schalenian, Jr.
-* *~ - B.S., M.A.
Geography
Ralph Clark
A.B., M.A.
History
John P. Hays A.B., M.A.
History
E. J. A. Schindeler B.S., M.A.
Political .Science
Neil S. Crispo B.S., M.S.
Director of Student Activities; Sociology
Louis J. Kilmer B.A., M.A.
Sociology
Harold J. Theriault ^f B.S., M.S.
History
Charlotte Ford B.A., M.A.T.
Political Science
Dorothy Leach B.A., M.Ed., Ed.D.
Psychology
John D. Wells A.B., M.A.
Philosophy
<^<9 Jlmmie C. Styles
■S U B.S., M.A., Ed.S.
DATA PROCESSING
M. J. Ellis B.S., M.Ed.
59
William R. Odom B.S.. M.S.
o
Fred I. Scott B.S., M.Ed., M.A.
Margretta M. Styles B.S.. M.N. Director
NURSING EDUCATION
Rosmond A. Gallery B.S., M.A.
Helen V. Dumas B.S., M.A.
Mary C. Dunne BS.N.E.. M.A.
Wilthelma Holt, B.S.
Sandra V. Kindred B.S.N., M.S.N.
Mary C. Ladwig B.S.N., M.Ed.
r-m m: n^m Adele Miller,
'* *^ W B.S., M.A.
/I '^a/iewieU to- P^ieAMeMi (luAnmcj.
As this, the first issue of Silver Sands, goes to press, we have received the sad news that our found- ing president. Dr. Joe B. Rushing, is leaving the Junior College of Broward County. Dr. Rushing has
Joe B. Rushing
B.A., M.A., Ph.D. President of the Junior College of Broward County
resigned to become president of the newly-formed Tarrant County Junior College District in his native Texas.
President Rushing's resignation is a kind of milestone in the history of JCBC. When Dr. Rushing first came to Broward County, our college was an idea. He made that idea a reality, first at the old airport campus, with 700 students and a staff of 42, and later at the Davie campus he himself planned. Today, under President Bushings leadership, we have expanded, and expanded again. We have a staff of 250, an enrollment of 4,583, and a national reputation for educational excellence. In addition, Broward Jimior has become a cultural center for our community. It has attracted students, professors, and their families; has presented plays, radio programs, and exhibits; and has sponsored lecturers and per- fonners of world-wide stature.
Dr. Rushing should be justly proud of his achievements as he leaves us. His departure is, in a very real sense, the end of the beginning at JCBC.
We shall miss Dr. Rushing greatly. We con- gratulate our founder upon his nesv position, and we wish him well.
60
HOW TO STUDY
By GEORGE F. McCALL JR.
L.
JET me say at the beginning, there is no easy way to learn. Learning takes time and long arduous hours of work. This work pays dividends that cannot be equalled by any other endeavor. Study is re- warding when done properly and in a business-like manner. Paramount in your mind should be the idea that this study is being done for your benefit, not the instructor's.
The skills you will need in college are: reading, writing, listening, comprehending, memorizing, tak- ing examinations, making notes, budgeting one's time, and many others. You already have a certain pro- ficiency in most of these skills, but are you ready to put them to work? Can you use these skills effi- ciently and to your best advantage?
Study is a Do It Yourself program. Learning is a natural process, requiring stimulations and control to be productive. Your capacity to learn is far greater than you realize; you must, however, do many things to keep the level of learning efficiency reasonably high and personally satisfying. These things only you can do. It makes little difference what you have inherited, what other people have done for you — no one can give you knowledge, skill or ability. These you must acquire yourself through the process of learning.
You must Get Ahead and Stay Ahead. It is far easier to keep ahead of the course requirements and assignments than it is to catch up once you get behind. Preview each unit of study before it is presented by the instructor. Use your course outline along with your textbooks to stay ahead. Try this preview method and find out what a difference it will make in your attention in class, your ability to make clear, well-organized notes, your readiness to enter voluntarily into class discussions, your ability to ask intelligent questions, and your general feeling of confidence about the whole college situation.
Do not be afraid to conform. You can raise the level of your personal efficiency by conforming to the specific requirements of the school and to the way your particular instructor "plays the game." The "non-conformist" tends to condemn and reject that which he does not understand, while conforming rigidly to the dictates of his own limited knowledge. The non-conformist revels in his own oddity. The person who conforms and "plays the game" will make better grades than he who does not, because the conformist readily accepts the disciplines neces- sary for efficient learning.
Do not be ashamed of ignorance. There is no one quite so ignorant as the individual who thinks he is not. When you admit, without shame, resent- ment or embarrassment, that you do not know, you have taken the first step toward learning.
Learning takes time. Do not get in a rush. When an instructor asks you to prepare a term paper, theme, or assignment to be handed in at a specified future date, go to work on it at once. Evenly distribute the work over the allocated time with the assignment completed and ready a few days prior to the due date. Paramount in your mind should always be: I am doing this to learn as much as I possibly can by completing this assignment to the best of my ability, not for the benefit of the instructor or just to get the job done. Learning is a slow, steady process which can never be hurried or compressed into capsule form. You cannot reduce learning into a few hours just to meet the deadline.
Read, Look and Listen with an active, open mind and with a definite goal. Preview each new unit to get the general idea of the whole unit prior to detailed study. Study with questions always be- fore you. Ask yourself questions that begin with the words Who, What, When, Why, Where, and How as you Preview, Read, Recite, or Review a unit. This will give direction and meaning to your learn- ing. Real learning is only effective when you can
61
make active use of what you have read, heard or seen and can reproduce such learnings. Students who spend about half their study time or more on recitation tend to make better grades than those who do not.
Prevent Catastrophe. Consolidate your learning gains. Do not attempt to master a new unit in one sitting — it cannot be done. You cannot hold minute detail in your mind from study time to examination time without a series of reviews of the material of any course for a semester's duration. If you try, you will find the results disastrous and disappoint- ing. The more efficient method of learning, remem- bering, and recalling material is to study the unit just to the point of immediate recall; then leave it and review it the following day. Plan to periodically review every week to ten days, making sure you can still recall the material easily and readily with- out either textbooks or notes. Keep testing yourself on ways you can apply this new learning in unfa- miliar situations or problems. Schedule reviews every so often during the terms so that you will be able to avoid the panic of having to cram for examina- tions.
Learn to like people. Let them know you HI them. When people know you like them, your schoc your teachers, school administrators, your family an yourself, they respect and like you in return. Tl path of communication between men is not a on way street. If you want people to respect you, yc must show by your behavior that you respect ther The purposes of teachers and students are exact! the same; therefore, students and teachers mu work together.
Practice these basic study methods for a fe weeks until effective study habits begin to forr Man, being a creature of habits, should make habi work for him, not against him. If you still are expi riencing difficulty, or are not enjoying your collej work as you should, call the Student Personnel O fice and have a conference with one of the counse ors. You may have some little difficulty that require special attention.
Come in as soon as you are ready to discus your career plans or your choice of a major fiel of study.
You are always welcome.
r>
SHinf BfilGfil, PflLf
By Mr. Jarrett C. Pharr
Instructor in Spanish: Division of Language and Literature.
Illustrated by Lew Alquist
Guns are silent, my fighting done. The road South calls, a trail is clear; I'm headed home, though sick with fear, I dread to reach Savannah.
My horse is black, the moon is full, A pale light shines on death's wan tone; Although I ride a known path home, I seek a lost Savannah.
On through the night and ghostly mist. My mount runs strong, dull hoofbeats sing Sadness enshrouds me hovering, I sense a dead Savannah.
Forward into lonely stretches, ^0
Passing famine, life so fleeting. Naked hunger, wounds yet bleeding; I weep for my Savannah.
62
RAMPAGE OF 8AFFLIM6
BETSY
by ANN BARDSLEY
She is just a scattered collection of wispy breezes now, ruffling the Scottish heather and push- ing a bit of tumbleweed across the plains of Ne- braska. Not so long ago we called her Betsy, and her mighty winds cut a swath of destruction across the tropics.
She was born in warm waters far to the south, and as Betsy began her northward journey, pack- ing a powerful punch. South Florida watched anx- iously. Our fears seemed foolish, for the big storm meandered past our danger zone and moved toward the Carolina coast. Cape Hatteras was already be- ginning to feel her winds and tides when fickle Betsy wheeled and headed south, turning our pleas- ant Labor Day routine into a race against time. We boarded and taped and sandbagged; and loaded up on candles, Sterno, and Spam. As always, bread be- came as scarce as gold.
Big, Bad Betsy lashed the Bahamas in blind fury, and then hesitated, unsure whether to make Florida or Cuba her next victim. Resolution restored, she headed west, raking the fabulous "Gold Coast" with winds as high as 140 mph, and ten-foot tides.
There were flooded streets and homes, broken win- dows, soaked rugs, uprooted trees, and boats beached on the highways. Death came, too, as a falling tree in Tampa, a flapping shutter in Palm Beach, a heart attack in Homestead, a live wire on a Miami street. First-aid stations and shelters, like the one here at Broward Junior, were havens for those who could not trust their homes to the fury of the gale.
When it was all over, we began the weary task of cleaning up the mess. A government inspection team came, and was kind enough to declare us a "disaster area," but all in all, we got off easy. For Betsy moved on to bigger and better things, dev- astating the coast of Louisiana with 14-foot tides and winds officially clocked at nearly 190 mph. The damage there is still being counted. The exact num- ber of deaths will probably never be known.
If there is a lesson in the saga of Big, Bad Betsy perhaps it lies in the fact that, although a voyage to the stars lies just beyond the horizon, we are not yet masters on our own Earth. We can destroy ourselves at the flick of a finger but we cannot stay the winds or hold back the tide.
63
POETRY BY TOM TOHTZ
FOR DR. HOMER M. LEDBETTERS ENGLISH 230 CLASS
ILLUSTRATED BY KAREN WINKOPP
^o Fujiyama
The morning I walked out And beheld your majesty In the clear and thrilling
dawn, The rising sun painted your
white crown The color of cherry
blossoms. I bowed my head, and my
heart Sang with joy.
Co the "=10.
r
I
arrlord *Tx!/Ao«>e Oou(<> oQre jCept at ^.aaukuni oAriMe
Brave sons who fought for your land, Your souls awakened by three claps Of the hand, May find rest in hearing Mac Arthur
sleeps. But his justice keeps Alive your Imperial land. Be not sad of our victory Or of your losing; Be glad for his choosing To let Japan live and hatred die.
* Yasukuni Shrine is a sacred place in Tokyo where it is believed the souls of Japan's outstanding warriors are kept. In the Shinto religion, one claps the hands three times to gain the attention of the soul to whom he wishes to pray.
64
I" OUR FEATURE WRITERS
JACK CRESSE, author of "Sports at JCBC," is a Sophomore with extensive experience in journalism. The first half of his Freshman year he was a staff writer for the Venetian Crier and was promoted to sports editor during the second semester. Jack is presently associate editor for the Crier, and is also working as a sports correspondent for the Fort Lauderdale News.
MILDRED EDWARDS, author of "Neil S. Crispo" and "The SAB," is a 1964 graduate of Dillard Senior High School, where she served as a varsity cheerleader. Mildred is now a staff writer for Silver Sands and an initiate of Circlettes.
BARBARA GLOWASKI, author of "The New Left," is a recent Au- gust graduate of JCBC. She is now attending Florida State Univer- sity and was just appointed Under-Secretary for Junior College Affairs. At JCBC, Barbara was a Freshman senator. Treasurer of SGA, a member of Phi Theta Kappa, and Sophomore Girl of the Year.
PAT HART, author of "Cheating," is presently attending the Univer- sity of Florida School of Journalism and Communications. This past summer she attended JCBC and served as feature editor for the Venetian Crier. Pat has also been photo editor for the Seminole, yearbook of the University of Florida.
SHARON ROESCH, author of "The Freshman," is attending JCBC on an honors scholarship. During her Freshman year she served as a Freshman senator, a member of the Student Speakers Bureau, and worked on the college radio program. Sharon is presently Secretary of SGA, President of SNEA, Second Vice-President of SFEA, and an initiate of Phi Theta Kappa.
ti
1
EDITOR'S NOTE
All that remains of Silver Sands I are some five hundred unclaimed copies, very little student disap- pointment, a lot of public praise and a great deal of success. Well over two thousand copies of the
yearbook-magazine have been dis- tributed— a record achievement in the annals of Broward Junior Col- lege publications.
But it is just a part of the collec- tion, others must follow. And, so, here is Silver Sands II. Most of the faculty feels we could never excel
our first attempt, many of the students think it quite possible. Whether we have or have not can be seen on the following pages. Look, read, enjoy, and be the judge.
John E. Leatherwood
Editor-in-Chief
STAFF AND ADVISORS
Editor-in-Chief John E. Leatherwood
Assistant Editor Pamela Edwards
Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley
Feature Editor David Byrne
Art and Photographic Editor Lewis Alquist
Sports Editor John Wolfe
General Staff Assistant Carol Shafer
Photographers David Porter,
Norman Summey, Bill Martin and Ken Smith
Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes
Chairman of the Division of Language
and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter
COVER: The annual Broward Junior College Christmas tree lighting; photo by David Porter.
Seal of Silver Sands
H3VJI
SCIMA
SILVER
SANDS
College of Brouiard County
Fort Lauderdale. Florida
DECEMBER, 1965
TABLE OF CONTENTS
THE BLUE AND SILVER
COLLEGIATE INTEREST POLL 2
THE QUESTION OF SUB ROSAS
Matthew J. Faison 5
FALL FESTIVITIES 8
THE RUSHING TESTIMONIAL Pam Serre 24
APPOMATTOX — AN AMERICAN
TRAGEDY (Essay) Dr. Harold B. Hayes 26
ANN'S REVIEW Ann Bardsley 31
IN REMEMBRANCE OF THANKSGIVING 32
RESPONSIBILITIES (Poem) Dean Bayer 34
HANDS OF LOVE (Poem) Colleen Fairbank 35
ISAIAH 9:6, 7 36
THE URGE TO KILL (Short Story) Marty Roland 38 SPORTS: PEACH BASKET
PREDICTIONS / INTRAMURALS John Wolfe 41
FOOTBALL AND THE JUNIOR COLLEGE
Bill Kelley 44
PACESETTERS WITH A HOLIDAY FLAIR
Pam Edwards 46
THE LYCEUMS Carol Shafer 48
SERVICE CLUBS OF JCBC 50
SGA Ann Bardsley 54
THE COLLEGE STUDENT AND THE DRAFT
Russ Sepielli 58
PATH OF IKEYA-SEKI Joel Martin 60
THE SILENT COLLEGE DILEMMA Charlie Burt 61
ON CAMPUS (Selected Cartoons)
Various Cartoonists 63
OUR FEATURED V/RITERS Back Cover
'T^ BLUE CUtd SILVER
COLLEGIATE INTEREST POLL
THIS POLL, WAS DEVISED AND CONDUCTED BY THE SILVER SANDS DURING THE MONTH OF NOVEMBER. THE PURPOSE FOR SUCH A SURVEY WAS TO DETERMINE AS ACCURATELY AS PRACTICAL PURPOSES ALLOW THE INTERESTS AND PREFERENCES OF JCBC STUDENTS. THE CATEGORIES CONSIST OF A WIDE RANGE OF VARIOUS SUBJECTS. EACH OF PARTICULAR OR GENERAL INTEREST TO ALMOST EVERYONE. BALLOTS WERE CIRCULATED AND THEN FILLED OUT BY THE STUDENTS. THE ANSWERS WERE THEN COMPILED BY OUR STAFF. THE RESULTS. CON- SISTING OF THE TOP SELECTIONS FROM EACH CATEGORY. ARE PRESENTED ON THE FOLLOWING PAGES. NOTE: THE PREFERENCES ARE LISTED IN THE ORDER IN WHICH THEY WERE CHOSEN.
|
Most Outstanding National Figure President Lyndon B. Johnson Barry Goldwater John F. Kennedy |
Most Outstanding Personality of the 20th Century John F. Kennedy Sir Winston Churchill Dr. Albert Schweitzer Ambassador Adiai Stevenson |
|
Most Outstanding World Figure Sir Winston Churchill Pope Paul VI U. Thant |
Novelist Ernest Hemingway Ian Fleming John Steinbeck |
|
Most Influential Historical Figure Abraham Lincoln Sir Winston Churchill Jesus Christ |
Poet Robert Frost Edgar Allen Poe Carl Sandburg |
Playwrighf
Tennessee Williams Arthur /Wilier William Shakespeare
Spectator Sport
Football
Basketball
Baseball
Artist
Pablo Picasso Michelangelo Norman Rockwell
Participator Sport
Football
Tennis
Bowling
News Broadcast
Huntley-Brinkley Report Walter Cronkite CBS News Night
Sports Figure
Johnny Unitas Sandy Koufax Mickey Mantle
Magazine
Playboy
Seventeen
Life
Most Interesting College Course
English
World Civilization
Psychology
Mathematics
Sociology
Newspaper
The Miami Herald New York Times Fort Lauderdale News
TV Show
The Man from U.N.C.L.E.
I Spy
The Tonight Show
Automobile
Jaguar XKE Corvette Sting Ray Ford Mustang
Comedian
Jonathan Winters Bill Cosby Red Skelton
Past Motion Picture
Gone with the Wind
West Side Story
The Ten Commandments
It's a Mad, Mad, Mad, Mad World
Female Vocalist
Barbra Streisand Joan Baez Petula Clark
Recent Motion Picture
Goldfinger
Shenandoah
The Sound of Music
What's New, Pussycat?
Vocal Group
Supremes
Peter, Paul and Mary
Lettermen
Motion Picture Actor
John Wayne Peter Sellers Sean Connery
Instrumental Group
Ventures
Tiajuana Brass
Dave Brubeck Quartet
Motion Picture Actress
Bette Davis Julie Andrews Elizabeth Taylor
Vocal-Instrumental Group
Beach Boys Beatles Rolling Stones
Stage Actor
Richard Burton
Sir Lawrence Olivier
Rex Harrison
Instrumentalist
Al Hirt Peter Nero Duane Eddy Louis Armstrong
Stage Actress
Julie Andrews Anne Bancroft Barbra Streisand
Fast Songs
Loule-Loule
Satisfaction
Wipe-out
Mo-Jo Workout
Get Off of My Cloud
Male Vocalist
Andy Williams Johnny Mathis Elvis Presley
Slow and Other Songs
More
Moon River
Theme from "A Summer Place"
Cast Your Fate to the Wind
Goldfinger
ffl ouoion Of
By
MATTHEW J. FAISON
Can the college admit organizations which are admittedly illegal, throw parties at which no restric- tions are made about serving liquor to minors, and have entertained reputations that are a great deal less than enviable?
Can the college turn away organizations which profess again and again a desire to serve the campus as organized social clubs, clubs that could possibly inject adrenalin into the heart of apathy which infects most school service projects and functions, and, moreover, in which a large portion of the student body has shown interest?
These are the horns of the dilemma the college administration must grapple with. The history is interesting. The future will be dramatic.
For months the issue of fraternities and the ques- tion of their legality and usefulness has been pon- dered by the students and the administration of the college. There have never been any clearcut pro- cedures set down for the handhng of students who are members of off-campus fraternities. No severe disciplinary actions have been initiated by the col- lege, the fraternities continuing to flourish.
Past semesters have seen the college and Student Activities Board refuse the petitions of the fraterni- ties to come on campus as true Greek letter societies. At the same time, however, the fraternities were refusing to compromise with administrative standards.
Controversy raged. The school newspaper, Ve- netian Crier, obtained photostatic copies of state laws seeming explicit on which colleges and uni- versities were to be afforded the privilege of allow- ing fraternities on their campuses. Broward and all other junior colleges in the state of Florida were excluded from the list.
These laws were printed last March and reprinted again in issue No. 4 of the Venetian Crier on October 1st of this year.
232.39 Secret Societies prohibited in public schools. It shall be unlawful for any person, group or or- ganization to organize or establish a fraternity, sorority or other secret society whose membership shall be com- prised in whole or in part of pupils enrolled in any public school.
State law 2.32.40 substantiates the above law by making it illegal for any pupil in a public school to join or pledge a fraternity or sorority. The teeth provided to the administrations of the various public schools, which include junior colleges, by the law are in section 232.41.
County boards are hereby required to enforce tlie
provisions of this law by suspending or, if necessary,
expelling any pupil . . . who refuses or neglects to
observe these provisions.
The administration has not yet chosen to expel or suspend any of the fraternity or sorority members, although a large portion of the active members are known to the Director of Student Activities, Mr. Neil Crispo, and to Dr. Jack Taylor, Dean of Students and interim college President. The school has made clear its position to act when it sees fit at any time in the future without warning to the students involved.
o o o
For a good many years fraternal organizations have influenced college life. Often the organization of social fraternities and sororities has been of service to the student and to the institution. On other oc- casions, the results of fraternity actions have been detrimental.
Before one can discuss the worth of such organiza- tions on this campus, one must first understand the differences, deficits, and advantages of the many types of fraternities.
The oldest and most selective of these organiza- tions are the honorary fraternities such as Phi Beta Kappa or Phi Theta Kappa, which serves on a junior college level. Also included in the general classifi- cation of non-social fraternities are the professional groups. On this campus. Phi Beta Lambda, a business fraternity, and Delta Psi Omega, a dramatic fra- ternity, are representative. The functions and pur- poses of these organizations are, as their name implies, to promote scholarship in the case of the honoraries, and to provide a common ground for people with similar professional goals and interests as in the case of the professional fraternities.
Social fraternities and sororities, on the other hand, exist in the interest of fellowship and as a media for social contact. It is not to be denied that social fraternities contribute to their colleges and universi- ties by promoting various funds, charity drives and the like, but the chief reason they continue to exist is the social life they offer.
In order for the Junior College of Broward County to incorporate social organizations as part of student activities as most other junior colleges in the state have done, including Miami-Dade and Palm Beach, a considerable amount of support by the administration and the school board would be required. Neither group has expressed any great feeling for the move- ment to date.
In order to get to the substance of the problem it
Members of Sigma Tau Sigma, one of the more noted of the Junior College sub rosas, take avid part in WPA work like that pictured above. Such activities are categorized as "petty vandalism."
becomes necessary to see the problem as it is seen by the fraternity member himself.
Walter Swanson had been a member of Sigma Tau Sigma since its inception in high school when it was formed by members of the various service clubs at the school. He was president until recently when he resigned in order to meet requirements for candidacy in the student government election. Swanson has been a leader in the cause for legal fraternities on this campus and was more than willing to be inter- viewed.
The reasons fraternities ever began are probably countless. Walt explained why despite the threats of the administration his fraternity continued to grow. "The reason we get as many people as we do is that colleges are associated with fraternities. The word fraternity and Greek letters just have a magic about them."
There is an economic consideration included in the decision on whether or not to join a fraternity. In many large universities students avoid fraternities because of the cost. In contrast to that, one of the main reasons fraternities exist at non-resident junior colleges seems to be the money a member can save. Most of the fraternities at Broward charge dues of $5.00 a month and that $5.00 usually provides enter- tainment for two week-ends during that month. Swanson explained the strategy. "To go out on a date, even to a movie, usually runs about $5.00 — we pay that much in dues for the whole month. One hall party at any of the local halls usually costs about $100 for the room and the band and we have enough money left over for a small party later on in the month."
Swanson was quick to point out that his fraternity never has a party on the same night as a school j dance or program. Thus, entertainment was pro-j vided for three week-ends of the month for about $5.00 excluding extras.
Mark Fried, president of Phi Lambda Theta, agreed with Swanson. "Nobody in their right mind would have a party in their own house." Fried said that his fraternity paid the same amount for dues as STS and that their system of renting a hall for parties was similar. "Most dues pay for the place and the band. Besides," he added, "it gives you someplace to go."
Most of the ill will between the administration and the fraternities can be traced back to a party that was held last year when the place that was rented was damaged. The owner brought his com- plaints to the college since the group involved rep- resented themselves as a sanctioned organization. The question of drinking was brought up.
Sigma Tau Sigma, like all fraternities, has had to make its own decisions about drinking. "We usually buy the mixers," Swanson said, "but not the booze." When asked about provisions for complying with state law and underage drinkers he said, "There are no restrictions about that now." It is a case of bring your own — if you can buy it you can drink it. STS does make use of a disciplinary board which has the power to ban a member from parties or to make an offender, usually the guy who drank the most at the previous party, serve as the bartender. As a badge of honor he has to wear a dunce cap.
The purpose of the disciplinary board is, in Swan- son's words, "to make sure that everything is in
"Let's face it, we're breaking the law.'
orderly fashion. To assure that everyone acts like a gentleman so we can come back."
Places are not always easy to come by. Considering the drinking issue, Swanson thought a moment. "Let's face it, we're breaking the law."
Fried's answer to the liquor question was similar. "Everybody brings his own. Most of the time we don't even buy the mixers." Occasionally a fraternity will foot the liquor bill. "We tried that once; it didn't work out."
Discipline problems are less complicated for Fried. "We always hire a cop."
The future of fraternities on the campus seems to be at best uncertain, at least as far as the college is
officially concerned. Fraternities might have a defi- nite place in the college social strata and they might serve in a political sense. Swanson feels that they could be instrumental in the formation of a two party system in coming elections. He spoke of last year's SGA in reference to shortcomings in the pres- ent system. "If they (the administration) had let some of the fraternity people run in the last election, we might have had a better student government." To set the record straight, all but five members of last year's freshman senate were fraternity or sorority members. Most of them were dropped due to grades or resigned as senators when the ruling was passed that all fraternity members who were in any student activity would have to either quit that activity or their fraternity.
Swanson believes that fraternities can offer the college something in the way of a more complete social life, something which he feels is lacking now. "It's hard to get to know anybody without some social activities." Again Fried agreed. "You get to meet new people — I met a lot of guys that I have learned to like."
The interview lost some of its early tension and Swanson quipped, "It's good to have friends — -some- body you could borrow a dollar from — if they had a dollar."
Some of the fraternities have taken steps to pre- pare for the future. Sigma Tau Sigma has applied for and received the right to incorporate and is recognized by the state. Phi Lambda Theta has flirted with the idea of seeking the sponsorship of an International Men's Club and petitioning the college for permission to come on as a service organization. But foremost in the minds of most fraternity mem- bers is that time when the college will act — either to admit them as student activities or to take dis- ciplinary action.
If the college reverses and decides to allow fraternities on campus, they will no doubt come under the auspices of the Student Activities Board and will be subject to the rules that apply to all service clubs with a few possible exceptions. In the past, similar offers were either ignored or refused for various reasons. One of them being that originally the college would not allow the use of Greek letter names and the idea of changing their name and buying new pins and accessory paraphernalia dis- couraged the fraternities to whom the offer was made.
The last question thrown at the past president of Sigma Tau Sigma and the president of Phi Lambda Theta was how their fraternities would react if the administration opened the doors.
Fried, whose organization may be on the verge of becoming a service club, was cautious. "We have a different kind of members in the fraternity now than we did in the beginning. They are interested in what they can do for the school." He got to the point. "If the school offers us anything presentable, we would like to come on as a fraternity."
Swanson was brief. "They would come on just like — that." He smiled and snapped his fingers.
Semester number one has past and with it has gone part of the college year. Dur- ing its days, we saw many changes take place and many unforgettable moments occur. Construction phase 2 came to a completion, our President Joe B. Rushing resigned, one campus election had little votes and another had a lot of mud. We saw our college receive full accreditation and learned the meaning of "sub rosa." But, above all. Semester I brought a lot of fun, frolic, and festivities. The action was all a go go and it all a went went — into our lives and into our memories. The following fourteen pages will recall the highlights of these events, events that gave us Fall Festivities of '65.
flUGU
. ^
Execution of justice; the "mob" carries a Rat off to his final reward, a bath in the JCBC lake.
f4
Other rats found their way, and heads, into the reflection pool. Noticeably worn from being put through the paces, Scott Ander- son prepares for more "high command" interrogation.
10
3 - SfPTtlUBER 18
RAT ACTIUITIES
A sophomore called "Hey, RAT," and a freshman doffed his little blue cap and bowed humbly. With others of his species, he was ordered to a table top, where the nervous group began a ragged chorus of "A freshman I am, SIR! ... A freshman I be, SIR!" "LOUDER!" the sophomores ordered. . ."LOUDER!"
Every day of Rat Week was like that for the harassed freshman. They wore their tell-tale rat caps and chanted self-deprecating verses for their sopho- more audience. Those whose performance didn't satisfy the sophomores were hauled before rat court, or received swifter justice at the fountain outside the Administration Building.
The sophomores, of course, enjoyed the whole thing tremendously. They were avenged for their own rat humiliations of a year before.
Exhibiting his expert leadership qualities, Tony Long drills a troop of rats.
Shades of the Spanish Inquisition; tribunal magistrates Dave
FitzGerald, Mat Faison, and Jack Cresse delivered "fair"
sentences to the condemned rats.
11
SEPTEMBER 13th VV IJ^^TT.
|
i-' |
12
The night of Monday, September 13, the Junior CoUege of Broward County proclaimed a "First" in social activities.
On this occasion, eleven Broward County bands performed at Winterhurst, playing three songs each. The purpose of the dance was to have the bands audition for future JCBC functions. Over 500 students turned out and, of these, 250 voted on the bands, rating each from "outstanding" to "totally unfit." The Jesters won the rating with over half of the voters classing them as "outstanding."
The entire event proved very successful and stu- dent reaction was extremely enthusiastic.
RHURST ^ ^ ^
13
SEFfEMBER 18
RATS' REPOSE
Here we are in the Dwight Rogers Room of the Governors' Club Hotel. The date — September 18, 1965. The room is well decorated with white dinner linen and every other table has a centerpiece. On one end of the stage there is just enough decor to set the mood.
Amid the orderly confusion, Bonnie McFetridge, social chairman, reigns over decorations, tickets, and coordinates the proceedings. The Civinettes prepare to serve the refreshments, proving themselves a willing and able work force. Bob Ripple, the unof- ficial Master of Ceremonies and crowner of royalty, prepares for his part; many others working quietly
14
and efficiently escape popular notice but not grati- tude. This is a student activity in every sense.
The time comes and the room is prepared. Moving in steadily is what will be an overflowing crowd of four hundred students, all with one track minds — FUN! The Bossmen, band for the evening, start off with a nimiber bearing little resemblance to the Vienna Waltz. For a length of time (no one remem- bers how long) the vast majority of the students will go into a semi-hypnotic trance as they do every dance "in the book," plus a couple of their own inventions, all to the throbbing beat that is pene- trating waUs for blocks beyond.
Finally intermission comes and we begin the slow return to sanity. Aware of reality, everybody and his girlfriend begins to converse. After a short interval, Scott Anderson and Jule Harke conquer the uproar with surprisingly little volume as they begin their folk songs.
Bob Ripple, now on stage, announces the time of coronation. Chosen to reign over the festivities are Scott Anderson and Darlene Neely, 1965 Rat King and Queen. The entire ceremony goes off without excessive pomp or stiffness and gives a natural climax to the evening's events.
It all simis up to a terrific night as the "Rat" un- derdogs are finally given equality and human rights.
15
OCTOBER 2nd, LYCEUM
m'
The Stranahan auditorium was filled the night of October 22. Peter Nero, the internationally known pianist, played that evening and tickets for the performance were exhausted a week in advance.
His performance showed a good variation — from jazz to classical to folk. Surely there was something to appeal to every music enthusiast. Mr. Nero was accompanied by a bass violinist and a drummer, both of whom complimented the works of this great pianist.
Mr. Nero and his accompanists were well received and student opinion was undoubtedly enthusiastic. One student commented that such music usually does not appeal to him at all, but with Peter Nero playing it, it was great. What compliment could be more rewarding for an outstanding performance?
•i.>*w*-
16
PdEII
17
October 30 meant the annual JCBC Halloween Dance. Tra- ditionally there is a full moon, but no one knows for sure "weather" it came out or not. The voyage to the scene was anything but dull. Wiping the fog off of the wind- shields kept co-eds occupied while their dates made educated guesses at where the road was. In due time, a sign bearing the name "Cote Ranch" appeared through the downpour. Directly ahead a river appeared, which fortunately turned out to be a dirt road. Plow-
ing through the water, the barn could be seen to the port side. Anchor was dropped and the stu- dents waded ashore, greeted at the bam by the odor of carefully- preserved dry hay.
The Jesters turned on the beat, the cider poured freely, even when it was shut off, and the students danced with more zeal than style. The costumes were numerous and imaginative. Some were even con- troversial, like that student who came dressed as an Indian rain- maker. The band rocked out and
OCT
30th
18
The HALLOWEEN
DANCE
the rain faded from conscience as the beat permeated all.
In the midst of the action, King Ugly was crowned. Underneath it all was John Hall, winner of the collection contest, the proceeds of which went to charity. The king reigned in all his hideous glory while a couple of artificial bats flopped around.
It was estimated that 600 brave souls showed up at one time or another — a real tribute to the rain gods.
The King is crowned; John Hall — King Ugly of 1965.
19
NOVEMBER 4 — 16
n MP.
Candidates for president — Craig I
(iUHPillGilS
and Bill Greene
Candidates for vice-president — Ricl(
On November 13, the "ticket" of Greene and Swanson made good use of a hurriedly staged jam session to boost their campaign . . .
and Wall Swanson
20
A large crowd gatehered to hear the election debate
"It's unbelievable. It's just too great!" Bill Greene said when the results of the election named him the president and Rick Barnard the vice-president of the Student Government Association.
In winning the most controversial and hotly-con- tested election in JCBC history, Greene chalked up 368 votes to his opponent Craig Barkers 346, while Barnard received 369 to his vice-presidential oppon- ent Walt Swanson's 345 votes.
Following the unofficial announcement of the re- sults by Neil Crispo, Director of Student Activities, the election was contested and a recount called for. Crispo explained that the move \mis unnecessary as it is the procedure to recount the votes after an election.
Vice-president Barnard chose to comment on the problems that face the SGA this year.
"The major problem," Barnard said, "is the same problem tliat SGA has had e\'er since \\e\e been here — communication beh\'een students and their SGA. If the people do not know why we're here and what we're doing for them, dien tliey're not going to care at all about SGA. As people come to appreciate student government more, they'll come out and vote, they'll go to the meetings, and they'll see that SGA is an effective government and not just a bunch of people who got together and decided to call them- selves senators."
And the future of SGA ?
Greene and Barnard both agree that the future looks "bright."
"The recent turnout in the election," Greene said, "has shown that the students are interested in student
government. Student interest is the only thing that can help SGA. Since this is higher and brighter than ever before, I think that SGA will ha\e its best year. ' Rick Barnard said, "The future of SGA looks brighter than it ever has been. The people serving in SGA are intelligent and capable, and relations witli the Administration are better than any previous SGA ever hoped for."
It was a lively finish to a very heated week of election activities.
21
NOV. 24th
THE BONFIRE
22
The JCBC campus was the scene for the second annual bon- fire and dance Wednesday night, November 24. A good student turn-out witnessed the bonfire, in- geniously started by the "flame of spirit" coming from a giant sea- horse's mouth. Rousing cheers from the cheerleaders were led by Bonnie McFetridge and Dave FitzGerald, the clown prince. A view of things to come for the basketball season was expressed by Coach Clinton Morris and the team. As the flames died down, a spectacular fireworks display pre- sented the grand finale of the blaze.
To complete the event, the Bon- fire Dance, feattuing the beat of the Aerovons, was held on the Student Center patio.
The bonfire was sponsored by Circle K, and the Circlettes pro- vided the refreshments for the fes- tivities. School spirit and great fun prevailed, definitely setting the mood for the Thanksgiving holiday.
23
THE RUSHING TESTIMONIAL
Yligk
To
'r^4.
.- '.r""^'
'— l«'V
A numerous crowd oi guests honored Dr. Joe B. Rushing with a spectacular farewell dinner.
A testimonial is anything which bears pubhc wit- ness to one's excellence, service, or accomplishments, by an expression of admiration and gratitude. An event, such as diis, took place on the evening of October 23, 1965, at the Governors' Club Hotel. There, a numerous crowd of guests honored Dr. Joe B. Rushing with a spectacular farewell dinner, for the outstanding achievements which he rendered during his presidency to all of us here at Broward Junior College.
Among those attending the event were the faculty and staff, friends and relatives, community leaders, and representatives from various campus or- ganizations.
The program began with an invocation by the Reverend William Hinson, pastor of the First Baptist Church, and then Dr. E. P. Lauderdale, the Dean of Instruction at JCBC, presented the evening's lively toastmaster. Business Director Albert Robertson.
Speeches, remarks, and addresses were given by Mrs. Virginia Young, Chairman of the Broward County Board of Public Instruction, Mr. Richard Ward, Executive \'ice-President of the Fort Lauder- dale Chamber of Commerce, Dr. Myron Ashmore, Superintendent of the Broward County Public Schools, Dr. James Wattenbarger, Director of Com- munity Junior Colleges, Miss Sharon Roesch, Secre- tary of SGA, Mr. John Leatherwood, Editor-in-Chief
of Silver Sands, Mrs. M. W. Tustison, Chairman of the JCBC Advisory Committee, and Mr. Gene A. Whiddon, a community leader and friend.
Special presentations were made by Dr. Robert C. Cassell, chairman of mathematics and science at JCBC, who awarded Dr. Rushing with an engraved watch, as a token of gratitude from the faculty, and Mr. Charles H. Gravett, of Coral Ridge National Bank, gave Dr. Rushing a small remembrance of Fort Lauderdale Beach to put in his Mustang and take along to Texas — a surfboard, of course!
Entertainment was provided by the JCBC Glee Club, under the direction of Dr. W. DeLara. The musical organization sang selections from "My Fair Lady" and "The Sound of Music." Also, as an added surprise, Stranahan Senior Band ended the evening by playing several favorites ranging from "The Yellow Rose of Texas" to "He's a Jolly Good Fellow."
The dinner was a tremendous success, thanks to all the fine people who worked so hard to make it that way. Special thanks go to Dr. E. P. Lauderdale, General Chairman, Edward F. Kotchi, Chairman of the Steering Committee, Dr. Jack Taylor, heading the Tickets and Invitation Committee, Jimmie C. Styles of the Arrangements Committee, Mrs. Carol Innucci, Chairman of the Publicity, the Civinettes Service Club, whose members worked as usherettes, and to Tropical Press, for donating the beautiful programs.
24
£By £Pam Selle
I
%^>
A Stranahan Senior High School majorette presents Dr, and Mrs. Rushing with nostalgic reminders of Texas — yellow roses.
The JCBC Glee Club sang selections from "My Fair Lady" and "The Sound of Music."
Dr. Myron Ashmore, Superintendent of Broward County Public Schools, de- livered a fine address.
Mrs. M. W. Tustison, Chairman of the
JCBC Advisory Committee, signs the
guests' roll.
25
APPOMATTOX
26
AN AMERICAN TRAGEDY
By DR. HAROLD B. HAYES
Illustrated by John Leatherwood
A painting hangs in the art mu- seum in Galena, Illinois, indicat- ing General U. S. Grant is sur- rendering to Robert E. Lee. The artist, Thomas Nast, depicts Grant as a disheveled, beaten and crest- fallen soldier; Lee as an immacu- late cavalier, the epitome of a vic- torious warrior. It's a tragedy of history that the scene is a painting and not a reality.
History is replete with such tragedies. Achilles had his heel. Caesar had his Brutus. Cleopatra had her asp. As a result of Ap- pomattox, the South suffered un- der all of these — heels, brutes and asps.
But don't ignore the conse- quences to the North.
Lincoln could have caught the last act.
Grant could have finished his days in peace, with memories of myriads of battles and bottles. New York could have saved all the pomp and expense of en- tombing him.
Presently, the United States' annual budget and deficit spend- ing would be halved. Even with such a reduction the costs would still seem unreal.
But back to reality.
Heavy tomes about the Civil War Between the States for South- em Independence, Withdrawal and Secession, 1861-1865, reap cob- webs on library shelves. North and South. These books guard the past with prose. Each year more and more books volunteer for sen- tinel duty. Surely, you've read "Jeb Stuart Was My Co-pilot," "Coming in on a Saddle and a Prayer" and "Crusade in Gettys- burg"?
Let's attempt to clear the cob- webs these books have woven and restore some perspective to his- tory. We can do this without the danger of re-opening hostilities against Fort Sumter. Although, with the South possessing Cape Kennedy, Oakridge, Redstone,
Selma and Elvis Presley, the odds would be a bit fairer than they were in 1861. Nor should we at- tempt to revive sectional rivalries. Ask any Daughter of the Con- federacy if animosities haven't long, long been buried. After a full century such things should be for- gotten. What follows merely in- tends to prevail against the mode of portraying something for the sake of popularity at the expense of history.
Mark Twain wrote, "History is literally — his story — and all de- pends on who writes it."
The South, living in an intel- lectual void for many years after its defeat, devoted its historical and literary talents to praising the Herculean accomplishments of the Confederate armies. With the ex- ception of Lee, practically every Confederate general, who was able to dodge the Minnie balls, wrote his inaccurate memoirs. These writers were among the few priv- ileged Southerners who knew how to spell "secession." Their of- ferings were part and parcel of the South's cultural endeavors follow- ing the war.
Southern culture in the decades following the war could be de- scribed as a jug of corn, a loaf of cornbread, and how it waddled in the wilderness. Weasels were more predominant than easels. The only sculptures were those of North- erners using Vermont marble. These men hacked out hundreds of Confederate soldier monuments which stand eternal guard over county court houses — or until a freeway came by. No orchestra was capable of playing anything more challenging than "Dixie."
A search of literature in the past century reveals Southern his- torians have revealed little about the adverse consequences of Ap- pomattox. The following appraisal contains a few random thoughts on these consequences by a bored re- constructed Rebel who gets more
bored when he hears that old melody, "It's Best It Turned Out The Way It Did."
For anything to be better or best, there has to be a comparison. One cannot compare a victory to a loss. That's a contrast. The North won, the South lost. How do people know it's best? No basis for comparison exists. So, manning the bastions of dissent, let's turn the Napoleon guns around, load up with solid and grape shot, and hope the fuse doesn't sputter.
It's unnecessary to delve into the numerous causes of the war or the rights of secession. These date back to antiquity. For instance, slavery existed in the South be- cause the climate and soil were suited to agricultural endeavors. If cotton could have been grown in the North, but not in the South, would Northern secessionists have fired on Governor's Island in 1861? It's unnecessary to explore the creation of man who, Philosopher Locke said, God begot as an indi- vidual, endowed with a free spirit to pursue his own chosen course. (If Locke was right, then, admit- tedly, slavery was evil. It was a dying evil, however. In attempting to speed its death, the North per- petrated a greater evil in its de- nial of the South's right of self- rule. Pardon the cliche, but "Two wrongs don't make a right.")
It is necessary, however, to com- pare the ante-bellum South with the present. Because slavery, a so- cial extreme, was an institution peculiar to the agrarian society of the South, that society was roundly condemned as decadent in the press, in the pulpit, in the salons, and in the saloons.
Was it decadent? If wealth and extremes in social classes indicate a rotteness, then "Look Out, Yankeeland!" A trip from Harlem to Park Avenue is a two mile jump from a garbage can to a Baked Alaska.
27
Recognizing these contemporary extremes, many sociologists and Great Societyikes, taking their cue from Nineteenth Century counter- parts, claim that any system which has class distinction is decadent. Their words sound as if they were plagiarized from Pravda. But class distinctions do exist now — just as they did in 1860.
For example, in the opening chapter of Margaret Mitchell's "Gone With the Wind," a social gathering at Tara is attended by the leading aristocrats of the cen- tral Georgia neighborhood. The guest list is limited to wealthy^ planters, their families, and a few upper bourgeoisie. There are no dirt farmers, artisans or Negroes.
Today, when the Ford family throws a wing-ding in Detroit for one of its daughters, bringing her out, who is on the guest list? Not the welder from the Falcon plant. Not the Negro from downtown. Can the similarity be denied?
Politically, there is, today, a dis- proportionate number of top lead- ers in the North who come from wealthied classes, i.e., the Roose- velts, the Rockefellers, the Lodges, Williams, Lehman, Wagner, Joe, Bobby, Teddy, ad infinitum. (Space prevents the use of full names.)
If an economic, social and po- litical aristocracy is bad, then the Civil War affected a transplant of an evil from Peachtree Street in Atlanta to Woodburn Avenue in Detroit, to Park Avenue in New York, to Hyannisport on Cape Cod, et al.
Actually, the Southern aristo- crats built foundations of our re- public. Washington led our first army to victory. Jefferson wrote our Declaration of Independence. Madison was the father of our Constitution. Patrick Henry was the first man to speak out for free- dom and the Bill of Rights. And what of the Randolphs, the Lees, the Masons? All of these slave- holders were products of and lead- ers of that detested society. It's a marvel that their democratic con- tributions have not been censored out of school history texts.
It is conclusive that, for many decades after the demise of these aristocrats in 1865, demagogues replaced demigods as the South's significant contribution to govern-
ment. Bilbos and Longs sat in the seats of Davis and Calhoun. It was as if the South were attempt- ing to get even with the national government by sending its worst men to Washington. Could it have been a mere coincidence that the calibre of political leadership had fallen to such great depths?
In the past two decades strides have been taken toward political rehabilitation in the South. Many fine and dedicated men such as Byrd, Rayburn, Russell, Holland and others have been elected to office.
Yet, a great political and gov- ernmental tradition was practi- cally destroyed at Appomattox.
The deterioration of race rela- tions, an unhappy aftermath of the war, is a feast the demagogues grow fat on. Consequently, the Negro in the South, today, is the most persecuted and humiliated segment of American society.
Shall we speculate on events had the natural course of manu- mission been allowed to evolve as in the North? Compare present conditions in the South with those in the North. In the northern states slavery was abolished peace- fully and the former owners were justly compensated for the loss of their investments, usually by sell- ing them South.
Now, the northern Negro has more equality; he has a stronger voice in the government; he makes more money; and he is far better off socially than his brother in the old Confederate states.
Little reason was evident to sus- pect the eventual emancipation of the Southern slave. The trend of history had already traveled a long way down that inevitable road. The French revolution freed the serfs in 1794; the British, via Parliament, in 1831; and Russia in 1861. Thomas Jefferson cut the bonds of his servants before he died. Lee freed the slaves he in- herited (though Mrs. U. S. Grant still held hers).
Hesseltine says in his THE SOUTH IN AMERICAN HIS- TORY that in 1861 there were a quarter of a million free Negroes in the Southern states.
The speed of manumission would have been accelerated by the improvement of farming proc- esses. With the rapid develop-
ment of new methods, the need for large numbers of field hands took a concomitant downward turn.
The greatest incentive, how- ever, would have been the South- erners' own repugnance of the in- stitution. A society which played a leading role in winning independ- ence from England, which wrote the Declaration, the Constitution, and which impregnated the nation with a near-pure democracy under Andrew Jackson, would not, for j long, live an hyprocrisy. The abo- ' lition movement was born in the South, though Yankee mendacities abetted its growth there.
The trouble was, though being idealists, the planter aristocrats were also realists. They foresaw that the immediate abolition of , slavery would give rise to an even I greater evil. Events following Lee's surrender proved them to be sages.
Take a close look at the life of the average Southerner, black or white, during the malaproprian "Reconstruction." This view indi- cates that a greater curse per- vaded the South than the malaise of patriarchal servitude. It is dif- ficult to find anywhere in history a period so permeated with cor- ruptness, brutality, or fear.
Coutter says in his THE SOUTH DURING RECON- STRUCTION:
"Most of the people who filled the many offices were untrained and untried scalawags, carpetbaggers and Negroes. Had times been nor- mal their duties would have been onerous and complicated; with the times out of joint they took the easy road and speedily buried themselves in corruption . . . And yet the most speculative and exotic development in government . . . was to be seen in the part Negroes played in ruling the South — long- est to be remembered, shuddered at, and execrated."
Let's linger a second on this de- liberate attempt to kill a whole civilization, the looting of public and private treasuries, the debase- ment of proud individuals, the un- punished physical attacks, the ca- lamity of abuse and libel heaped upon the people who followed Lee with such devotion and love. Re- construction left a bitter memory in the hearts of Southerners, more so than Sherman's pillaging of Georgia and South Carolina.
The North cared little about these conditions. The New York Times said, "Congress is too busy
28
to give much attention to such commonplace matters as starva- tion and distress. We want the Southern people well under mar- tial law."
The Times got its martial law. For twelve years the South was an occupied country, almost three times longer than Japan and Ger- many were occupied after World War II. There was martial law — but no Marshall Plan. Rather than using the law impartially to ad- minister justice, the North used it to subjugate and confiscate, much as the Russians did in Eastern Europe after the last war.
Nor did the United States help to rehabilitate the economy of the South with massive foreign aid as the government did with Japan and Germany. Instead, the legisla-, ture put uneducated Negroes and unwashed carpetbaggers in control of the state governments. The Southern white was powerless and helpless until he found extralegal means to regain his franchise. Nightriders, such as Ku Klux Klan and the Knights of the White Ca- mellia, organized to cajole the Negro, and to punish crime which the occupation forces ignored.
Actually, the U. S. Congress used the high crime rate in the South as an excuse for maintain- ing occupation forces. Referring to this great increase in crime. Sena- tor Lucius Lamar (D. Miss.) asked these embarrassing questions:
When you point to acts of vio- lence, I acknowledge and deplore them; but I ask you, who has gov- erned the states where it occurs for the past ten years? Have we? Who has taxed us? Filled our courts? Controlled our legislators? The reader may recall that Sen- ator Lamar was one of the men John Kennedy used in his book "Profiles in Courage."
Today, the press takes much pride in blaming Little Rock, Clin- ton, Selma, Oxford, riots from sit- ins and freedom rides, and other abuses on the ignorance and preju- dice of the Southerner. Is there one major paper outside the South that has placed the blame where it really belongs — in the radically controlled Congress of 1865-1876? From the above mentioned facts it can be deduced that had right prevailed in 1865, the ignominious Ku-Klux-Klan, Jim Crow Laws and lynching would be alien to
Americans' vocabulary. The phi- losophy of the White Citizen coun- cils would be unborn. The white's fear of the emergence of the col- ored people would be tempered with understanding, cooperation and, above all, communication.
The excesses of abuse on the part of both the Negro and the White during Reconstruction left a residue of hate. Dr. Martin Luther King said the reason peo- ple hate each other is because they are suspicious of each other. The reason they are suspicious of each other is because they don't know each other. The reason they don't know each other is because they don't communicate with each other.
But as a result of Yankee inter- ference with communicative proc- esses, then and now, hoeing the rows of equality in the South proves a rough task.
So, the Negro was the loser at Appomattox!
The evil aftermath of Dixie's defeat isn't limited to adverse race relations. The capitol building in Washington constantly echoes the deep North-South split on political beliefs. In most cases it is more difficult to get a Northern and a Southern Democrat to see eye to eye than it would be to get Mao to shake hands with Chaing Kai Shek. This national disunity can be attributed as much to historical distrust as to avid conviction.
Contemplate how the average Northerner would react had the U. S. lost and suffered under a Rebel reconstruction of compar- able vindictiveness. Grey legions might have occupied Northern cities and towns for twelve years. Only those Northerners considered politically friendly would have the vote. All industry would have been dismantled and sent South. Per- sonal fortunes would have been confiscated. Legislatures would be controlled by Rebels, Copperheads, and illiterate immigrants. Graft would have been so terrific that Pennsylvania would just have escaped from bonded indebted- ness.
Had such conditions prevailed 100 years ago, would the North- erner, today, be a little leery of a Southern majority in Congress?
Of course, such would not have been the case even if the Rebels
had ruled supreme. Southerners were not fighting a war of subju- gation, only of independence; not of hate, but of love for self-rule. And then, the humaness of its leaders would have precluded any such spiteful treatment. Lee, Davis, Benjamin, and others were not of the same ilk as ol' Thad Stevens, Stanton, and Grant.
If the preceding points are only speculation, natural conditions would have prevented extensive military rule. The population of the North was more than 400 per cent greater than that of the Con- federate Whites.
So, compassion was vanquished at Appomattox!
The South has been called by F.D.R. the nation's number one economic problem. This hardly would be the case had the shoe been on the other foot in April of 1865. Cotton and tobacco brought undreamed of wealth into the cof- fers of the agricultural states. Eaton, in his '"History of the Old South" indicates that 60% of all the U. S. exports on the eve of the war were of cotton alone. All this ended in 1865. War, retribution, and graft literally wiped out the richest area per capita on the North American continent. Even today, total recovery is eons away. For the South has just started to seriously adopt the industrial revo- lution.
There are several reasons for this belatedness. All can be at- tributed to the outcome of the war. Being exposed to twelve years of gross military persecution inflicted by an alien society which was a product of that industrial- ization, the ex-Confederate was not likely to seek a similar realm for his own community.
It is axiomatic that some peo- ple, in face of local opposition, tried to foster industry into some Southern states. It was a futile attempt. Northern industrialists were not going to allow any com- petition, no matter how small, to thrive in the South. They might have lost a few customers. So, Northern capitalists raised the freight rates for Southern rail- roads over which they gained con- trol following the surrender. Southern factories found it im- possible to compete on the open market.
29
The major capital available for investment in the past century was vaulted on Wall Street. In spite of pleas by would-be South- ern manufacturers, little money crossed over the Potomac until the start of World War II.
Presently, the South is the fast- est growing industrial area in America, But only the naive be- lieve that this has come about as a result of human kindness from Yankee investors. On the contrary, manufacturers are finding that the returns from their investments are far greater in Dixie than in the North. The Supreme Court has somewhat equalized railroad rates; unions have less power; wages are lower; plant overhead is much less in the temperate climate; there is an abundance of cheap hydroelec- tric power; raw materials are plen- tiful; and state tax benefits are fantastic.
In 1960, it looked as if the ben- efits of increased industrialization had arrived. Then in March, 1961, a circuit court of the "victorious" government, announced that any plant moving into another state was required to take the whole work force along with it, if the workers so desired. So, thanks to the forced union with the Fed- erals, it looks as if the South is to undergo another period of frus- tration in economic advancement.
Thus, industrial progress was the victim of Appomattox.
Control of tariffs, one of the major causes of secession, would have been a tremendous boon for the Confederate states, had they won and personally exercised that control. Prior to the war, more than half of all money going into the treasury at Washington was coming out of the states that were to secede, though these states comprised only a fraction of the population. Most of these taxes were being budgeted for improve- ment in the North. With military success, all of that money would have been rerouted to Richmond and put to work for the people who paid it.
This money, too, would have been sufficiently augmented by tariffs on United States imports which would have had to compete with European goods on an equal basis. Imports would have been
bought at a cheaper rate and the tariffs would have been set ad- vantageously for the new nation.
Economic progress, also, went down in defeat at Appomattox.
In as much as the former Con- federate states have always espoused Jeffersonian democracy (states' rights) and self-determina- tion (secession) they would prob- ably just as eagerly joined in the crusade against the Axis powers as did the United States. Dixie would have been wealthier and more in- dustrialized, offering much more, materially, to the joint efforts. And the South would have fought as valiantly against aggression in 1918 and 1941 as it did in 1861.
Otherwise, relations with the United States could have been on par with Canada. Perhaps, since the Confederate Constitution, also, did not forbid secession, it is con- ceivable that some or all of the states eventually would have re- joined with the Federal union. But reunion would have been executed only if the union were to be mu- tually advantageous and not one of coercion and subjugation.
Political freedom, thus, was sur- rendered at Appomattox!
So, now down to the old cliche that "we are better off since the North won the war." The collec- tive "we" is perhaps better off. The British empire would have been better off if old George had given his sword to Cornwallis. Russia is probably better off with 600,000,000 Chinese in the Com- munist orbit. Collectively, all larg- er political units are supposed to be better off, if you follow the rule of the "Federalists."
The majority segment of a po- litical union, however, is the main beneficiary of a forced grouping. Nineteenth Century Austria was extremely "better off" when it con- trolled Hungarians, the Slavs, the Czechs, and part of the Germans, Poles and Italians. Austria had a strong military and a huge popu- lation.
Historically, nations that de- rived fame from military strength, e.g. Napoleon's France and Hit- ler's Germany, offered little to civilization except mayhem. Great- ness in a nation is not necessarily derived from increased numbers of citizens or military potential.
India and Red China today are not great nations in the true sense. Greatness comes when democratic societies are left alone to pursue their own destiny and excellence without the interference from ex- ternal forces.
Old Abe, in stealing Webster's words, said that the battle of Get- tysburg was fought and won by the North so "that government of the people, by the people and for the people should not perish from the earth." Since it was the South that was fighting for self-determi- nation and the Yankees for sub- jugation, it appears that the Great Emancipator would not have been so morose had he migrated back to Kentucky before he entered politics. He wouldn't have been forced to play the role of a hypo- crite.
Even today hypocrisy in large political segments is denying the South its legitimate role in con- tributing leadership to the nation. Eleven of our first fourteen presi- dents were from the Dixie states. Since then only two have served as president, Wilson and Johnson.
Wilson, however, lived in the North. Admittedly, Lyndon John- son is from Texas, a former Con- federate state. But even he prided himself as being a "Westerner." Besides, he won the election by default. If it hadn't been for the tragedy at Dallas, LBJ would not now, and probably never would have been, president. Is there one other man from the South even remotely in contention for presi- dential nomination at future party conventions?
Finally, democracy was the big- gest loser at Appomattox.
There is one truth mirrored in that painting in Galena, Illinois. That is the historical image of the two leaders of the two nations. One has come down as the most admired and respected general of all times. The other is remem- bered as the most corrupt and in- effectual president in the nation's history. It's said that the character of a people is reflected in its leaders.
The barbed-tongue bard from Baltimore, H. L. Mencken, was right when he called the Civil War a victory of "babbitts over gentlemen."
30
By ANN BARDSLEY
One of the most delightful vol- umes to reach the Best Seller list this past summer was Bel Kauf- man's UP THE DOWN STAIR- CASE. Miss Kaufman, grand- daughter of Sholom Aleichem, and a high school English instructor for fifteen years, has written a wise and uproariously funny pic- ture of a young English teacher and her first semester on the job.
Perhaps the most unusual fea- ture of the book is its style. It is written not in the usual narrative form, but rather as a collection of bizarre memos and circulars from the administration, student essays, contributions in the suggestion box, notebooks, letters, and glean- ings from the wastebasket. This innovation is an apt vehicle for a teacher's eye view of Calvin Coo- lidge High School — overcrowded and under-staffed, in a shabby sec- tion of New York City. From the principal's super-efficient adminis- trative Assistant, Admiral Ass, to his cowed faculty, come strange re- minders that, "The bell will ring today at 3 P.M. sharp. This, how- ever, is uncertain," and puzzling requests that "Polio Consent Slips must be collected today." From her student suggestion box the teacher gets few suggestions, but does hear that, "You're the only teacher who ever learned me Eng- lish real good," and "Linda Rosen's got the Clap." Essays on subjects like integration yield surprising results. "Can you teU by my writ- ing if I'm white or not?"
Former high school teachers may recognize many parallels to Calvin Coolidge High, where the
janitor, when needed, is never to be found, the librarian hoards the library books, windows are always broken, and students punished for going up the "down" staircase. Fierce and funny battles are fought as the teacher struggles through the maze of administra- tive procedure and triviality-in- triplicate to find a little time for her students.
UP THE DOWN STAIRCASE is an hilarious mirror of faculty life, but as one veteran teacher put it, "You'd have to laugh — or you'd cry."
A few years ago a Washington correspondent wrote a brilliant political novel that went "inside" the United States Senate, focusing upon its traditions, responsibilities, antagonisms and power struggles. Almost as soon as it hit the best seller list, ADVISE AND CON- SENT was flattered by a host of imitations, often written by corre- spondents more imaginative but less talented than Mr. Drury. The latest of these political insiders is SUPREME COURT, which is about guess what.
Author Andrew Tully is a for- mer White House correspondent and ought to know better, but his fiction is stranger than any truth could ever possibly be.
Our hero is a handsome bach- elor Supreme Court justice who, at the tender age of forty-two, has already occupied himself as gov- ernor of Massachusetts and U.S. Senator before ascending to his position as an associate justice. This remarkable gentleman — his name is Francis — also has a girl friend with whom he is having an affair. The girl friend, Beatrice, is a thrice-married actress who, deep down inside, is really a nice, mid- dle-class Jewish girl. The cast also includes Francis' crony, the Pres- ident, an extremely popular, ex- tremely conservative young man who has just been reelected by an overwhelming conservative major- ity (reaUy, Mr. Tully!) and wants to pack the Court because it's too liberal. Also included is Freddie, Beatrice's ex-husband, who plans to publish a book revealing the relationship between Francis and his girl, and a covey of Supreme
Court justices who settle those 5 to 4 decisions by slugging each other in the robing room. One character who seemed suspiciously realistic was the Senate majority leader who was trying desperately to earn the vacant seat on the bench by pushing through the Court packing bill, and dies sud- denly from the strain. I was not really surprised to discover that exactly the same thing happened to Senate majority leader Joseph Robinson under exactly the same circvmistances during the court packing battle of the Roosevelt era.
The reader is welcome, if he dares, to examine the plot of this improbable, but rather interesting cliche called SUPREME COURT.
Three of the most talked abou^ books on the stands this fall were memoirs by President Kennedy's closest associates. These long awaited books, KENNEDY by Theodore Sorenson, A THOUS- AND DAYS by Arthur Schlesinger, and MY TWELVE YEARS WITH KENNEDY by Evelyn Lincob, were all serialized by major maga- zines before they were printed and controversy has swelled about them even before publication.
Of the three, the best seems to be Sorenson's KENNEDY. Though this book is the least colorful of the three, it is the most accurate picture of the late president and his mission of what Sorenson, one of the oldest and closest of Ken- nedy's friends, characterizes as "conciliation."
Schlesinger, though a Pulitizer Prize winning historian, has gotten into much hot water over his rather sensational revelations and borderline taste. Nonetheless, his book is well written and attempts to place the Kennedy administra- tion in historical perspective.
Mrs. Lincoln makes no attempt to record the New Frontier for history; her book is rather a gos- sipy memoir on what it was like to be the secretary of the man who became President.
Despite their faults, all three are useful and interesting reading, and leave us with the wish that we could have known the late presi- dent better.
31
IN REMEMBERANC]
t)iS*jisKjisyi>8aiayi>swi>sai>syiis<jig!yi>syi^
"THE PLYMOUTH LANDING"
by Peon Frost
32
DF
in^M^^^'atvMCi'
THE PILGRIM FATHERS
By Felicia Hemans (1793-1835)
The breaking waves dashed high On a stem and rock-bound coast,
And the woods, against a stormy sky, Their giant branches tossed;
And the heavy night hung dark
The hills and waters o'er, When a band oi exiles moored their bark
On the wild New England shore.
Not as the conqueror comes.
They, the true-hearted came: Not with the roll of the stirring drums,
And the trumpet that sings oi fame;
Not as the flying come.
In silence and in fear, — They shook the depths of the deserfs gloom
With their hymns of lofty cheer.
Amidst the storm they sang.
And the stars heard, and the sea;
And the sounding aisles of the dim woods rang To the anthem of the free!
wmmmi}^MMjMmjmjmmjm
33
^^/^
; You go eve
IV \\ he
Someday \()u vvil Take me with y
Together tlie Universe wel
But not todav, I am busy;
I
I am learning; am growine.
\\ hell I .1111 (.i,l 0\\ II
\ii. I \\ ill iif\i'i Ih grnwi in\ is^'.ow ill WMiild ciiil
I hi II I V\ I II I Id ll,U t III 1 lilt'
So Wind —
Continue willn mt im
At least for a while lave things fn dn
1^ '4.mc' ^ on cm t lie <'nii^fi ii led
And I
( :ah t
ni t he ( Dinplfti-
HANDS OF LOVE
by
Colleen Fairbank
Illustrated by Sharon Frost
Hands now idle and scarred by time, Once held the youthful heart of mine. Hands then young and smooth with love, Tenderly guided, formed and gently nudget That small child that eagerly awaited Life — and all the joys and wonders,
unabated. Understanding, firmness and gentle times Are written, still, among the Unes. Now gnarled and painfully disfigured. Though soon, stilled forever will they be — These hands will always have The strongest hold on me.
35
r^ov nxda us a cl|tlb^ ts bunt, utttc us d son is gtlieu: anb tl\t goUerumcnt s{|aU be upmt i|ts sljoul^er: anh l|ts name sl|all be citUeh pTonherfuI, Coun- sellor, ®t|e ttttgl|tg doh, 'Slije eiierlast- rug (3[irtl|er, "Sllie prince of Peace. (§i tlje increase of l|ts goiiemment anh peace tl]ere sl|all be no enh, n^an ll|e tl^rone of ^aUrh, anb^ upon I|ts ktng- horn, to orber it, anb to establisij it 6jitl| juhgmeut anh biitl] justice from t|enceforti| eOen for eOer.
Isaiah 9:6, 7
by Harvey Olsen
36
i
37
"Be careful, Senor!"
I nodded silent acknowledg- ment, as I gripped my shotgun, and started down the tangled em- bankment.
The tropical downpour stopped and a warm drizzle covered my perspiring face. My light raincoat clung to my shirt and it caked itself to my sweaty body. The hu- midity in the Costa Rican jungle was suffocating and the stillness unnatural. Insects crawled into my nostrils and hair and glued them- selves to the dirt and oil on me.
I paused and looked at my des- tination, a hundred yards below. The river crawled sluggishly at the base of the forty-five degree slant. Both banks were covered with a crazy pattern of matted undergrowth. It looked like finely- cut bamboo. To penetrate it would be impossible. To hack my way thru with a machete would be back-breaking. As I looked, I knew I'd find in that twisted underbrush the reason I'd flown over 2,000 miles. To hunt and to kill — the "Anaconda," the water boa constrictor, the largest and most powerful of the boa constrictor family. A specie that was a throw- back to prehistoric days. A snake so huge that once its coils were entwined around cattle, it could easily crush the life out of them.
I also thought of the States and home and my purpose in choosing the jungles of Central America. I told all who inquired I wanted a snakeskin for a trophy. I almost had myself convinced. Down deep, I knew it was more than a gory souvenir I wanted. I was trying to prove to myself that I was afraid of nothing. That I was tougher and better than anyone else. The more they labeled it suicidal or impossible, the more determined I became to prove to them how wrong they were. The deadliness of the hunt only increased the challenge, and the desire to kill intensified itself.
I remember the surprised ex- pressions on the faces of all I told back in San Jose. At "Un Gran Hotel Costa Rica," to cover my nervousness, I joked with the bell- hop and my steady cab driver. I promised I'd bring them back a dead boa. All they could say was:
"No, please, Senor!"
Dead or alive they wanted no
part of any boa constrictor, espe- cially the "Anaconda." Even they doubted that I'd accomplish my mission safely.
My native guide coughed and it interrupted my day dreams. I turned toward him but he said nothing. He, too, was afraid of snakes. Nobody had any guts. It didn't make much difference. It was my hunt and I wanted it to be my kill. I told him, in my broken Spanish, to watch the sur- roundings. I didn't want one to drop out of a tree on me or acci- dentally walk into one. I didn't see any from the top of the hill, but I wanted to make sure.
I turned away from his fat form and started my descent. I half stumbled a few yards from the top when my foot caught itself in a low lying vine. My left hand pounded the ground and needle sharp thorns ripped the flesh open. I glanced back at the guide, but his copper colored face was ex- pressionless. He stared back at me open-mouthed. I turned away again and continued slowly, watch- ing every step I'd take. Small gnats festered around the gashes on my hand. I brushed them off but their persistence mingled with the blood and dirt. I concentrated on what waited for me by the river.
Twenty or thirty paces further, the guide called to me. He pointed up and almost directly above me. I thought he spotted a boa in the huge tree above me and cocked my gun automatically. The light rain clouded my vision and I squinted at the dense foliage above, ready to fire. My eyes searched the lower branches slow- ly and carefully. I tried to find the gnarled mass that deformed a branch or the trunk of the tree. I looked up the tree further and saw nothing. Exasperated and a little disgusted, I looked back at the guide. Instead, he motioned above the tree and slightly ahead of me. I followed his gestures and saw what he did. Three or four vul- tures circled lazily overhead. Some- thing ahead of me was dead or dying. I didn't know, but I'd soon find out.
I lowered my head and con- tinued my downward journey watching the moist jungle around me. As we both looked up, some-
THE URGE
TO KILL
i
BY MARTY ROLAND
ILLUSTRATED BY LEW ALQUIST
\
38
thing might've moved between me and the river. I left my shotgun cocked. It was a single shot. I cursed my impatience and stu- pidity for not waiting an extra day. I could've gotten an auto- matic. I might need it before the hunt was over. It was too late for regrets and my gripes wouldn't help me.
As I walked, my foot touched a patch of mud and I slipped. My knee doubled and struck a rock in the ground and my left hand again hit the earth. It made my palm raw. As soon as I pushed myself up, the bugs were back at it again. They seemed to enjoy the blood and dirt on it. My knee made me limp slightly as I started again.
Half way down, I came across the decayed body of what was left of a jaguar. It was covered with flies and worms. The stench from it almost made me vomit. I looked up. The vultures were directly overhead. Their lust after death disgusted me and I peered at the surroundings. My first glimpse of death in the jungle made me feel uneasy. I told myself there was nothing to get jittery about. Another ten steps, more or less, a bush ahead shook slightly. I stop- ped and a chill ran down my back. I raised my gun and slowly crept closer. I took a step and waited, another and waited again, until I was only a few feet from it. My gun was thrust forward and I was ready to fire. I circled it slowly and as quietly as I could. I saw nothing. I couldn't believe it. Any- thing at all wouldn't have sur- prised me as much as seeing nothing.
I lowered my gun again and glanced back at the guide. I could see him watching me, but the dis- tance was too great to tell the ex- pression on his face. As I turned back and moved on to my original path, I couldn't help wondering about the bush. There was no breeze at all, yet it moved. Some- thing must've moved it, and if so, where could it have gone? There was nothing; my search proved that. Not even a hole in the ground.
I thought —
"Had I imagined it? Had fear given me illusions?"
I tried to dismiss the thought.
39
My fingers touched the cold steel of the trigger guard. It felt good. It was reassuring. I momen- tarily glanced at the flap on the gun holster, that hung loosely at my right side. It was tucked back ready for use. Its shocking power wasn't much if I had to resort to it, but I probably wouldn't have to use the pistol anyway. I had forced a shell in the chamber of the .32 automatic, before I started on my downhill creep.
"Had I released the safety catch on it?"
I stopped and cradled the shot- gun in my arm. I pulled the auto- matic out of its holster and con- vinced myself that I had. As I pushed it back into its resting place, I looked ahead. I could see the wild closely-knit brush that fringed the river more clearly. It was higher than I thought.
"Fifty or sixty feet more, I'll be there," I told myself.
My knee throbbed as I started my measured walk and the stiff cowhide in the Costa Rican boots cut into my instep and into my ankles on the angle I was walking. The holster hung too low, I thought. I don't know why I didn't realize it sooner, but I wasn't going to stop again until I got to the river. It was level there and I'd have a better chance of mov- ing freely and firing successfully. The sooner I could get the kill over with, the sooner I could get back to the top of the hill. The slope was gentler as I moved closer. The trees were farther apart, the undergrowth less wiry. I could move a little faster, my eyes riveted on the river ahead and its surroundings.
Twenty feet from it, my boots touched mud and ooze. I started sinking slowly. Panicky, I jumped back. I didn't notice it, until I stepped in it. I could see a stretch of from six to seven feet in width, lay between me and the river. I didn't know what it was. I had never been warned of quicksand and I had never even given it a thought.
"What if that's what it was and I couldn't have gotten out fast enough? The guide might've helped me, if he could've gotten to me in time."
Sweat trickled down my greasy
face.
I had heard stories of quick- sand. The sucking, inevitable death that entombed humans and ani- mals alike. I could visualize my- self being dragged helplessly down into the earth. I could even feel the horrible sucking as it would swallow my legs, then engulf my body and finally would swirl bubbling over my head. I shud- dered involuntarily.
I was thinking too much. I was letting my imagination run wild and allowing myself to be weak. I was getting as gutless as everyone else.
I cut short my mental pictures and looked toward the river again. My eyes followed the patch of mire trying to find a way across. I had to get to the river. A short distance away I saw a fallen tree, and headed toward it. Just before I reached the tree, the brush on the other side, near the river, crackled and swayed. I stopped in my tracks and tried to make out what caused the noise and the movement. My heart quickened its pounding wh6n I saw what it was. A gigantic boa constrictor slithered in and out of the thicket. It resembled a log twisting its shape. It was no imagination this time. I tightened my hand on the shotgun and hurried to the tree. As I half sprinted, I watched his glistening coils weave slowly away from me.
I reached the broken stump and started to climb. My right foot was on the tree and my left one still on the ground. I kicked what I thought was a branch of a tree. Suddenly it came alive. It was like a huge arm that whipped itself around my leg. The shock and power pulled me down. As I slip- ped from the tree, my holster swung behind me and my right foot came down on the writhing coils below. I saw for the first time, a huge boa constrictor, and could feel that same arm entwin- ing itself around my right leg. I fired, without thinking, at the con- torting coils. Blood spurted from them. They relaxed momentarily and I tried to drag myself out. As I strained to pull free, they tight- ened again. I saw the head, for the first time. It was shaped like two cupped hands and its tongue
darted in and out of its mouth at me. It was light brownish and covered with black designs. I grabbed the barrel and swung at it. It drew back out of range and bobbed back and forth. It gave a hissing sound and the tongue kept darting in and out. I struck at the winding, wrapping coils on my legs. I raised the gun and lashed at them, again and again. The more savagely I pounded, the tighter they twisted. It was like giant fingers squeezing my legs. I could see the blood dripping over the coils and on the ground below us. The pressure kept increasing and the coils crept above my knees. My legs felt like they were on fire. It felt as tho' the skin on them was being torn off.
I knew I had to keep beating at them. I couldn't risk stopping for a moment to try to reach behind for my pistol. My arms were like j lead weights, as I repeated blow ^ after blow. I couldn't keep it up any longer. His tongue still flashed in and out of his weaving head. My legs became numb. My feet felt like they were asleep. I knew I was losing. He'd never loosen up. I hit weakly, with the shotgun in my left hand, at the twisting coils that worked themselves below my thigh. I had to get to my pistol.
I groped behind me with my right hand. My fingers touched the side of the holster. His contorting threw me off balance and I started again. This time my fingers grasped the butt end of it. I pulled it out carefully and as I brought it in front of me, the coils had reached my waist. I was get- ting dizzy. I pointed the auto- matic at the dancing head and the darting tongue. As I squeezed the trigger and fired three or four times at it, the bobbing stopped. The bullets tore into his head and it plunged to the ground. I fired a few more rounds into the con- vulsing head. The pressure stopped and the coils loosened their grip.
I was weak and still dizzy as I forced the writhing coils open. I dragged myself out and away from them. My legs were so badly bruised, I couldn't stand. As I crawled up the hill, I looked back at the bloody form, still twitching. I remembered the snakeskin.
"The hell with it!" I thought.
40
SPORTS
Peach Basket Predictions Intramurals
Sports writers must, out of ne- cessity, live a dangerous life. They are always being called upon to predict what the upcoming season will bring. This really isn't too dangerous when they know what they're doing, but when they don't, it's downright suicide. Well, since the varsity basketball season is upon us, the time has come for a few comments about the prospects for the Seahorse cagers. "I regret that I have but one life . . ."
The Seahorses are under the di- rection of Clinton Morris. Coach Morris played his college ball for Livingston St. (Alabama) College.
by John Wolfe
Before joining the Seahorse coach- ing staff, Morris coached at sev- eral high schools in Georgia and northern Florida and was assistant basketball coach at McArthur High School.
The assistant basketball coach is R. L. Landers, his first year in this capacity. Coach Landers played his college ball for Baylor University and, for the past two seasons, has served as assistant baseball coach at JCBC.
The cagers will compete in Dis- trict IV of the Florida Junior Col- lege Conference. Other teams in the district are Miami-Dade, Mon- roe, Edison, West Palm Beach,
■ o
41
and Indian River junior colleges. The Seahorses will also participate in a Christmas tournament in Co- lumbus, Ga., and have scheduled several games with university freshmen teams.
The Seahorses will play their first six regular season games on the road, awaiting the completion of the new gym to open at home. The gym will be christened on Jan. 15, when the Seahorses host the Stetson Freshmen.
Miami-Dade, last year's state champions, appear to be the class of the district. JCBC and Edison (Fort Myers) JC should fight it out for second place. Upstate, Chipola JC and Gulf Coast JC should be the best in the north, while St. Pete JC and Manatee JC should be tough to beat in the central part of the state.
Although more than half of last year's squad returns, the Sea- horses face several problems. In the offensive department, they must find someone to replace Gil Ford and Stan Cowherd, who ac- counted for more than half the offensive output last year. Among the leading candidates to take over are Kenny Kulp, Steve Cairns, Steve Nealy, and Bobby Keimedy. Kenny, a sophomore, came on strong at the end of last season and displayed a real scor- ing potential. Cairns, a 1964 grad- uate of McArthur, transfers to JCBC from Florida Presbyterian. Steve will fit right in with the fast break offense the Seahorses will
42
employ. In addition to his offen- sive threat, Steve will help greatly on defense. Steve Nealy, the third leading scorer from last year, is back and, if he fulfills his poten- tial, will be one of the team's out- standing individuals. Kennedy, a 6'4" All-County selection last year from Pompano Beach, should help the 'Horses both in scoring and rebounding.
The second big problem is height. The Searhorses have Steve Hall, a 6'6" sophomore, Kennedy, and John Gordon, a 6'3" Pompano graduate, who should help, but this lack of height will certainly hurt the 'Horses more than once before the season is over.
Defense is the third problem. Last year's defense was extremely generous in allowing their oppon- ents an average of eighty points a game. If the Seahorses are to chal- lenge anybody for anything, this will certainly have to be improved.
Other sophomores who return from last season are Bryn Jones, a rugged defensive star and an out- standing rebounder, Barry Allison and Marvin Hodges.
Last year Coach Morris launch- ed an extensive recruiting program in the county and will reap the benefits this year. Joining Ken- nedy and Gordon are Pompano teammates Bill Fauerbach and Mike Mulford. Bill Mandeville and Greg Fitzpatrick, starting guards at Stranahan last year, will help the 'Horses' defense. Also, sophomore Mark Brier is out for
the team this year and should help both on defense and in the rebounding department.
* * *
The prospects for the 1965-66 season contain a lot of "ifs." IF the Seahorses can replace their lost scoring punch, IF they can plug up the defense, and IF their lack of height doesn't hurt them too much, then the 'Horses will give somebody some trouble. Though the picture might seem dark from here, the Seahorses have the talent to do it. Kenny Kulp and others should take up the offensive slack and Steve Cairns will prove to be a leader both on offense and defense. About the defense, it can't do anything but improve.
From this comer, the prospects for the Seahorses to improve upon last season appear very bright indeed.
A Note on Intramural Athletics
An important phase of any col- lege's overall program is athletic competition. At JCBC, although the intercollegiate program is well- rounded and among the best in the state, it cannot fulfill the needs of all the students.
Thus the intramural program is of particular importance. Unfortu- nately it, like many other college- sponsored activities, is conspicu- ous for its lack of interest. It need not be that way. This year, the HPR Department is offering intra- mural competition in virtually all sp)orts in which classes are taught. With this variety, everyone can find some spKsrt in which he or she participates. Not only does the student owe it to himself to keep in good physical condition, but many of these sports can continue to be a source of enjoyment and exercise in his later life.
If you are not signed up for one of the intramural sports, then by all means drive your car over to that distant building and "get in the swing of things."
You too, girls.
* * ie
Men's basketball inaugurated the JCBC intramural year. Always a popular sport, no less than ten teams competed for the champion- ship this year. Basketball was di- vided into two leagues this year,
each with five teams. "A" League was made up of the "Adipose Wrecks," the "Hustlers," the "Spi- der and His Flies," the "Gators," and the "Bombers." "B" League consisted of the "Shot Guns," the "Road Runners," the "Hot Shots," the "Beavers," and "Deacon's Men."
In "A" League, the "Adipose Wrecks" led all the way to capture the league crown. The "Shot Guns" and "Deacon's Men" waged a fierce battle for the "B" League crown, with the "Shot Guns" wrapping it up with a 77-59 win over "Deacon's Men." In the cham- pionship game, the "Shot Guns" shot down the "Adipwse Wrecks" by a score of 79-65. The winners were led by Gil Ford, who scored 27 points, and Stan Wood. Steve Cairns and Paul Pologruto had 22 points apiece for the losers.
Immediately following the championship game, an All-Star game was played matching the top players from the other four teams in each league. The "A" League All-Stars were Steve Hall, Marvin Hodges, Bill Mandeville, Bill Fauerbach, Bobby Kennedy, Mike Mulford, John Gordon, and Kenny Kulp. Representing "B" League were Bryn Jones, Mark Brier, Mike Grizzle, Bob Murrill, Barry Allison, Robert Judson, Bruce Kinder, and Craig Skok.
Led by Marv Hodges and Ken Kulp, each with 32 points, the "A" Leaguers overwhelmed the "B" All-Stars, 98-61. Mark Brier was high point man for the losers with 21 points.
FINAL STANDINGS
"A" League
Won Lost Adipose Wrecks 3 1
Hustlers 2 2
Spider and His Flies 2 2
Bombers 2 2
Gators 1 3
"B" League
Won Lost Shot Guns 4 0
Deacon's Men 3 1
Hot Shots 1 3
Road Runners 0 4
Beavers 0 4
Next on the men's intramural calendar was flag football. With six teams competing, the season was spotlighted by exciting play and several high scoring games.
Teams in the league were the "Transcendentalists," the "Road Runners," the "Magnificents," the "Tigers," the "Crimson Knights," and Circle K.
The "Transcendentalists" won the league championship with a perfect 5-0 record. (Editor's note: If they were as hard to beat as their name is to spell, it's a won- der the rest of the league even bothered to show up.) Ken Mc- Mahon won the individual scoring title with 42 points. Max Colom- brito and Frank Gossett ran close behind with 36 and 30 points, re- spectively.
An All-Star game is to be played at the end of the season. The All-Stars, composed of play- ers from the other five teams, will challenge the "Transcendentalists." Members of the All-Star team are Max Colombrito, Bill Bettis, Mike Johnson, Tom Robertson, Ken McMahon, Max Christian, Frank Fawl, Dennis Maugere, Bart Lof- tis, John Galli, Butch Wilson, John Bundy, Bill Conley, Tom Parko, Ernie Jones, and Bill Jenkins.
FINAL STANDINGS
Won Lost Transcendentalists 5 0
Crimson Knights 4 1
Magnificents 3 2
Road Runners 3 2
Circle K 0 5
Tigers 0 5
While the men's intramural pro- gram was concentrated on foot- ball and basketball, women's intra- murals was focusing on volleyball. Although very few teams entered, the season was by no means dull. Pam Bedford captained her team to the championship by downing a determined team captained by Joyce Fillichia. Others on the championship squad were Carol Warner, Patti Carpinelli, Janice Grooms, Anne Marie Cramer, and Diane De Martino.
43
Fomiuii
Six weeks ago in Ann Arbor, Michigan, over 100,000 football fans turned out to witness the Michigan-Michigan State game. Unfortunately this situation will never occur between two junior colleges in the state of Florida.
Other junior colleges in Mississippi, California, Oklahoma and Texas support weekly football games with great enthusiasm, but starting a junior college football conference in Florida is out of the question at the present time. In order for a program of this nature to get started it would have to be submitted before the state department of education and, if approved there, it would go before the legislature. The philosophy in this state by the legislature is strictly against junior college football. The legisla- ture doesn't feel that the junior colleges are finan- cially ready to support football teams.
In 1948, Chipola Junior College organized a foot- ball team and was the only junior college football team in the state until it abandoned the sport four years later. George McCall, guidance director at JCBC, was a member of the Chipola football team in 1950-51. McCall is very familiar with the pro- gram that would have to be set up. He personally doesn't feel the state or JCBC is ready for another try in setting up a football league.
"It would cost too much and how could we be sure we would have enough people who would support it," McCall said.
Athletic Director Rex Brumley shared the same feeling as McCall in saying, "I think we would be smart to stay away from football because we prob- ably couldn't afford it."
44
It would be impossible to finance a team on just the students' activity fees, so from what source would the money come? The money taken in from gate receipts would hardly cover the expenses of lights, renting a field, and dressing out the players.
Traveling Expenses
The east coast of Florida stretches over 400 miles, not to mention the long distance across the panhandle. Having the team travel in a chartered bus would cost at least $300. Presuming the team would play at least ten away games, this already involves over $3,000.
Equipment and Meals
The team would carry forty-four players. Equip- ment for each player would cost at least $150. The total cost of the equipment for the whole team would come well over $6,000. Repairing equipment would involve an additional undetermined amount.
While the players are on the road for one night the school would only be responsible for one meal. The average cost of the meal per player would run about one dollar and a half. For the entire ten game season, these would cost $660.
Housing
Housing the players overnight would involve $300 a night. Overall this would cost three thousand dol- lars not to mention the coaches, managers, etc. Medi- cal expenses would also prove costly as all the in- juries would have to be treated immediately.
Football in junior colleges would certainly prove to be an advantage for universities throughout the
By Bill Kelley
Illustrated By Diane Dasher
state. Knowing boys are getting experience playing college ball would be ideal conditions for Coaches Ray Graves of Florida and Bill Peterson of Florida State. The two colleges mentioned could easily divide the colleges in half and recruit the players from the schools which have been divided.
Bill Bondourant, sports editor of the Fort Lauder- dale News, was asked if Broward County fans would support a JCBC football team. "I don't think so. I think it would be almost impossible to set up a junior college program in Florida and especially in this area due to the popularity of high school foot- ball. The games would also conflict with the U. of Miami and the new American Football League fran- chise coming to Miami."
Starting a football team could also prove to be the downfall of basketball, baseball and tennis teams. The money involved could easily affect the success- ful program which is currently underway. Basketball has been the fastest growing sport at the college and, with the completion of the new gym, basketball will have all the necessary tools that could lead Seahorse basketball teams to state championships.
The football program in California has not met with one-third of the success it hoped to reach. The legislature in that state has made up certain rules which all the junior colleges must follow in order to participate in football. The first two damage the program the most. They are:
1. A junior college can't play another college out- side of its area. This could mean only playing two teams all season.
2. A junior college is not allowed to give scholar- ships to any boys outside its area.
The average attendance of junior college football games in California is only 3,000, while the average high school game brings nearly 4,000. Also in Cali- fornia there is no state play-off, nor is there a state championship game. The same situation exists in the other states.
Most students in this area were good supporters of their high school football teams and many junior college students can be found at high school games every Friday night. Also, giving the boys who didn't quite earn four year scholarships another chance to show off their talents at a two year school could earn them a scholarship upon graduation. It seems that students enjoy screaming at football games and doing it once more on the junior college level would only turn out to be more fun.
With the philosophy of the state legislature being against football, there will never be junior college football teams in the near future. These men must have looked into this program before they decided to vote against it. Perhaps, if starting a program of this sort at the present time did turn out a failure, it would only embarrass the state and the junior col- leges as well.
The students of this college have a fine program set up as it sponsors golf, tennis, baseball and basket- ball teams. Would it be worth trying to start another sport at the risk of losing four?
45
This evening ensemble presents the striking contrast of white on black. The dress is of Mattelasse and features an empire waist with a white scoop-neck bodice; the A- line skirt is in black. The evening' coat, also of Mattelasse, is a vision in white. About $70 at Saks Fifth Avenue in the Sunrise Shopping Center. Model: Dawn Miller
Pacesetters ivvt
Serenity in yellow crepe is por- trayed by Safinia. This design presents an empire waist and straight skirt with special emphasis on the cut-out bodice. About $45 at Saks Fifth Avenue in the Sun- rise Shopping Center. Model: Sandy Uetz
46
riphday rimy
This versatile three-piece theatre suit features a slim skirt and lapeled jacket over a delicate lace shell. The beige rayon-acetate fab- ric presents the illusion of silk. A junior petite by Patricia Fair. About $25 at Lory's in the Coral Ridge Shopping Center. Model: Peggy Williams
Elegance and simplicity are synon- ymous in this young junior de- sign. The empire vi/aist and the wine velveteen bodice are accented with a bow; the pale pink slim skirt is of crepe. About $23 at Lory's in the Coral Ridge Shopping. Center. Model: Sue Lopez
47
^lu
LYCEUMS
What does your college offer in entertainment?
It offers a variety of selections from the area of cultural arts. Would you like to hear a folk singer, a ballet, or a piano concert? Maybe a comedian, an opera, or a choir performance would better suit your tastes. Your college's Lyceum program features all of these. Evening performances are free to all full time students.
If past Lyceum performances are characteristic of future programs, students can expect many more very entertaining evenings. Those who heard Peter Nero's piano performance showed a definite apprec- iation for it. The attendance was a record for JCBC. More recently, talented Earl Wrightson and Lois Hunt gave an excellent concert entitled "The Ameri- can Theatre in Concert." The versatile Miss Hunt sang "Smoke Gets in Your Eyes," while Mr. Wright-
By Carol Shafer
son displayed his tremendous style with "Old Man River" and "If Ever I Should Leave You." Their natural wit and humor prevailed throughout the program. These are just two examples of Lyceum's fine entertainment.
Lyceum had its beginning in 1960 when the college first opened. This year, Mr. Neil Crispo, Director of Student Activities, is responsible for the Lyceum programs. When asked about the purpose of Lyceum, Mr. Crispo commented, "The programs are to encourage the cultural development of stu- dents as well as to entertain them." Dr. E. P. Lauderdale, Dean of Instruction, complimented the students when he remarked that they are sophisti- cated in their cultural tastes.
The full house attendance of past programs has illustrated this comment quite well.
^ftmmei ^ei/citnetA
World famous Mark Twain impersonator, Hal Holbrook gave his excellent and unique por- trayal to a capacity audience on June 18 in the Stranahan auditorium. Holbrook's per- formance was a most enjoyable, never-to-be- forgotten addition to the Summer Lyceum programs.
Leon Bibb, renowned American folk singer, gave an impressive performance on July 24 at the Stranahan auditorium. His very fine production was a brilliant finish to the Summer Lyceums.
Talented Earl Wrightson and Lois Hunt gave an excellent concert in November at the Stranahan High Auditorium.
49
Service Clubs of J.C.B.C.
CIRCLE
The Circle K booth was the hub of much activity during the opening days of the first semester.
^
The student body of the Junior College of Brow- ard County can surely be proud of its Circle K club. The club has brought the Junior College publicity around the nation as well as serving the school in a true sense of the word.
The club originated on the JCBC campus in 1960 and has progressed to the point where it now has over forty members. The motto of Circle K is "We Build," and the Broward club has more than lived up to it. Along with service, the club is dedicated to the building of character in men.
On the international level the club attained the highest honor that a Circle K club can receive. This was the International Achievement contest First Place Award, which is presented annually to the out- standing Circle K chapter of the six hundred or- ganized chapters throughout the United States and Canada. The club has also received recognition from the United Fund, the Easter Seal Clinic, and its sponsor, the Beach Kiwanis Club. In addition. Circle K received the A. P. Phillips Award in 1965 for excellence in undergraduate extra-curricular activi- ties. This award is in state competition with any organization on junior and senior college campuses.
Some of the club's projects are the sponsorship of the Halloween Dance, the Bonfire, the Bonfire Dance, Health Awareness Week, the King Ugly Contest, the United Fund Drive, manning the polls for SGA elections, aiding in student registration, assisting in the bookstore, Thanksgiving food dona- tions for the needy, helping the Opportunity Center for the Handicapped, collecting for the Easter Seal Drive, ushering for Lyceum programs, and Opera- tion KID.
Operation KID is probably the high point of service by the club. For this project, every other Sunday Circle K members act as "big brothers" to juveniles who have been in trouble with the law. Circle K men take these boys out on picnics, to baseball games, roller skating, and other activities which produce a good healthy atmosphere. On this project alone. Circle K members produce an average of forty service hours per two-week periods.
This year the club is under the leadership of Presi- dent Ron Gustinella, Vice-president Chuck Drago, Secretary Bill Conley, and Treasurer Bob Klein. The campus advisors are Mr. Harry Schaelman and Mr. David Shaw. The Beach Kiwanis Club advisor to Circle K is Mr. Joe Furgeson.
This year the club will be host to the Florida District Convention to be held in March, at the Statler-Hilton Hotel. It will be responsible for the entire planning and execution of this meeting for over 250 delegates from throughout the state of Florida.
50
The Circlettes of the Junior College of Broward County play an important part in almost every phase of campus life. They are seen working in every department as student assistants and of the eighteen female members of SGA, fifteen are either active members or applicants of Circlettes.
Circlettes also play an important role in the social activities on campus. They co-sponsored the Hallo- ween Dance and the Bonfire Dance along with Circle K.
As a yearly project the Circlettes volunteer their services in Anne Storke's home for handicapped children. They are working on the United Fund and Multiple Sclerosis drives again this year. One of the largest projects that Circlettes had this year was helping to coordinate the Christmas gifts for the soldiers in Viet Nam. By working with the various branches of the service, they were able to distribute the gifts to those soldiers who receive no mail from home. The gifts were shipped overseas by a special transport plane that delivered them directly to the men. Besides setting up the Christmas gift project, the Circlettes have also initiated a "Write to a Soldier in Viet Nam" program. Not only will this help to raise morale, but it will also keep the service men in Viet Nam better informed on happenings in the U.S.
The club is presently initiating a program in which all service clubs will participate. This program is in association with VISTA and will supply aid to the children of the migrant workers. Circlettes still have their orphan. Shin Bong Hi, and are hoping that other organizations will follow their lead.
The annual fashion show at the Beach Club Hotel, which is a joint project of Circlettes and Civinettes, was presented on December 5 and featured formal wear from Gowns Unlimited and sports attire from the Tack Room.
Circlettes are seen ushering at all Lyceum pro- grams and will be selling cokes at all basketball games. They also aid in student registration and assist in the book store.
Under the leadership of President Clarkia Dennis, Vice-President Bonnie McFetridge, Secretary Sandy Pryor, Treasurer Joan Nugent, Chaplain Jane Han- cock, and Sponsor Miss Charlotte Ford, the Circlettes have planned a busy year and hope that it will be the most successful one yet.
Betty Huntting (standing) and Circlettes President Clarkia Dennis do
their part in helping to make Christmas for the soldiers in Viet
Nam a bright success.
51
«_. * i fc
Civitan is responsible for a clean-up campaign, the purpose of whicfi is to rid tfie campus grounds of unsightly trash.
CIVITAN
The Civitan club of JCBC has placed its service emphasis on getting the campus back into shape. They are responsible for a clean-up campaign, the purpose of which is to rid the campus grounds of unsightly trash. In addition, Civitan members spend their Sunday afternoons helping to landscape the area around the Administration building and are also in the process of repairing the campus road signs and curb stones.
Next semester, Civitan plans to compile a "first" for the college, a student directory. They will also co-sponsor the Valentine's Day Dance with the Civinettes.
During November and December, the club will
participate in the annual Civitan International fruit cake sale.
Civitan was represented by two members at the state-wide convention in Tampa which was held in late October. At the convention they were awarded a plaque for the most increased membership in the past year.
This year Civitan is under the leadership of Presi- dent Ron Steadman, Vice-president Dave Rowett, Secretary, Hagen Kohler, Treasurer Mike Milan Sergeant-at-arms Dave Richardson, and their spon- sor, Mr. Roberts. Their off-campus sponsor is Plan- tation Civitan.
52
mnettes
"Builders of Good Citizenship" is the motto of the Civinette club at JCBC and they fulfill this goal through their unlimited service on this campus. Dis- playing dependability-plus, Civinettes focus their efforts on assisting other students, faculty members, and the administration.
Their on campus services have consisted of dis- tributing the Student Handbooks to both freshmen and sophomores; assisting in the bookstore, the library, and the Dean's office; weekly distribution of the Campus Calendar; selling tickets to Dr. Rush- ing's testimonial; also, ushering at the testimonial; serving refreshments at the Rat's Repose. Off cam- pus, they are working on the Multiple Sclerosis drive.
Regardless of their active service schedule, Civi- nettes still manage time for the social aspect of campus life. In February, Civinettes will co-host the Valentine's Dance along with Civitan, their brother club. Twelve members represented the JCBC club at the state-wide convention at St. Petersburg, October 22-23.
In conjunction with their parent club. Plantation Civitan, Civinettes will be participating in the annual fruit cake sale during November and December.
Under the leadership of President Carolann Clif- ford, Vice-president Vicki May, Secretary Ginny Shulby, Treasurer Barbara Brent, and Chaplain Tommy Anne Tyler, Civinettes plan a very success- ful year.
The annual Civinette-Civitan picnic.
53
Th* heels of student apathy.
The Student Government meet- ings begin at 3:30 and sometimes run until sundown. They begin with routine business like approv- ing minutes and committee re- ports, roll calls, and aimounce- ments. By the time they are over, the meeting room is filled with smoke, shirtsleeves are rolled up, and the senators are mad at each other. Bills are introduced, resolu- tions passed, and clubs chartered. Debate is sometimes witty, often heated, always spirited.
This year the voters of JCBC found themselves with a new kind of Student Government. Heavy class loads, the no longer glamor- ous reputation of SGA and the usual student apathy caused a sharp drop in the number of per- sons registering to run for office in the elections of last May and September. Election officials had to look hard to find students will- ing to run, and those who did were unopposed. The candidates
who signed up were interested in politics and government, and in getting things done, but many lacked the winning personality necessary to win an election. A "no contest" election gave birth to a new breed of senator.
There is little pettiness or self- ishness in this year's SGA. Its members are, for the most part, cooperative, imaginative, and bliss- fully unafraid to voice their opin- ions. The freshman senators, and many of the sophomores, have never faced a competitive election. Their own vote alone would have been sufficient to win them their office, yet they are sharply aware of their responsibilities to "the rest of the kids."
The people who make up SGA are its real wealth. They come from all over the United States, and have a wide variety of major fields, hobbies, and political ideas. They are hard working, get above
average grades, and, though most enjoy a good table-pounding argu- ment, they show an astonishing ability to get along with each other.
Despite its great personnel as- set. Student Government is ham- strung by serious problems. The greatest of these has been lack of student support. Few students bother to run for office or even to vote. They have no idea what SGA, can do for them or how it is set up. There are many complaints that SGA merely follows the "fac- ulty line," and provides no real leadership in getting things done.
From the outsider's viewpoint the complaint is justified, although Student Government members bit- terly resent it. The core of the problem lies, say the senators, in lack of communication. "They don't know what we're doing, so they conclude that we're doing nothing," one SGA member sum-
54
lis people Its plights its potential
BY ANN BARDSLEY
marizes. Almost all the senators have ideas for improving the com- munications, especially in telling their constituents what legislation is pending, and what happens to their student activity fee.
To add to its problems, the SGA found itself, early in the year. without a president or vice presi- dent. The president elected the previous semester had not returned to school. Judy Hancock, who was elected vice president, assumed the presidential post, but fell ill soon afterwards and had to drop out of school. The result was a leaderless Student Government.
To fill the gap, the two remain- ing SGA officers. Secretary Sharon Roesch and Treasurer Joyce Lea- gan, plus the Sophomore and Freshman class chairmen. Senators Bonnie McFetridge and Larry Ellis, shared the presidential re- sponsibilities. Surprisingly, the ar- rangement worked well. Having their own members as leaders
eliminated the traditional friction between the executive and legis- lative branches of SGA. The easy camaraderie among the members replaced the usual rivalry, and SGA swung into high gear. SGA was well upon the way to overcoming the first and second of its problems when the presidential election was announced. The elec- tion was intended as a solution to the lack of e.xecutive leadership since the resignation of President Hancock, and to provide strong presidential leadership.
The election, however, proved to be a sharp divisive force in the Student Government. A majority of the senate supported the presi- dential ticket of Craig Barker and Rick Barnard. A strong and de- termined minority came out for the team of Bill Greene and Walt Swanson. The campaign was one of the most heated ever to take place at Broward. Charges, coun- ter charges, and lots of mud flew, and the election commission cen- sured the campaigners right and left. Senators on both sides of the political fence stacked their repu- tations upon the outcome of the bitter contest.
When the votes were counted, both sides waited anxiously for the result. The winners — for president. Bill Greene, for vice president. Rick Barnard. Remembers one ob- server, "It was like electing Barry Goldwater with Hubert Hum- phrey."
The election had ended in an apparent stalemate.
From this point on, the future of Student Government remains to be seen. It may be that the politi- cal wounds opened by the election will not soon be healed. If this is the case. Student Government will remain at an impasse, with tlie president engaged in a constant struggle with a hostile senate led by the vice president. The SGA members themselves will lose little by all of this, but the student body will lose a great deal.
Another possibility is that the senate will accept the inevitable, and, while reserving the right of sincere dissent, will weigh the issues without bias and try to do the right thing for the students. A third possibility is that of mass
resignations, allowing the presi- dent to appoint his own supporters to the vacant senate seats.
Of these three courses, the sec- ond seems the most likely, as well as the fairest to all involved. It is, however, not an easy one. It is difficult for people strongly dedi- cated to one personality or plat- form to compromise on an issue to which they have committed them- selves, or to get along with some- one they bitterly oppose. This may well be the biggest problem SGA will have to face.
There are many things the SGA members hope to accomplish this year, and they \\'ill talk about it to you with eloquent zeal. They are interested in bread and butter is- sues like better food, recognition of fraternities, constitutional re- visions, the dress code, ID cards, and school rules and services in general.
Yet they are interested, too, in a larger concept of student govern- ment. The SGA members would like to see Broward in closer con- tact with other colleges and uni- versities. They wish for less faculty interference in student affairs, and want to see the powers and re- sponsibilities of SGA expanded. They are sharply critical of stu- dent apathy, and are anxious to excite student interest in their go^'- ernment, and hope that the unique position that SGA finds itself in this year may excite some. Most of all, the senators are eager for the recognition and confidence of the student body. They want to prove that they are, indeed, the voice of the students, and that they can lift the campus from the apathetic morass into which everyone con- cedes that it has sunk.
The Student Government As- sociation stands at the crossroads. It has great potential to either rise above its previous reputation and more recent political divisions, or it can stalemate itself in the heat of partisanship, and sink even lower into contempt and obscurity. The responsibility for its future lies not only with the members themselves, but with the student body, without whose support and encouragement the idea of effec- tive student government may well be doomed to failure.
55
OFFICERS
BILL GREENE, President, is nineteen years old and a native of New Jersey. He graduated from South Broward High School in 1964, and is now studying Law. Bill is interested in government and politics, and considers himself a Republican.
RICK BARNARD, Vice-President, is from Ala- bama, and, at 22, the oldest member of SGA. He graduated from Miami Norland High School in 1961, and is studying Journalism and History, Rick is interested in history and politics, director of the college radio show, and considers himself a Democrat.
CAROLANN CLIFFORD, Secretary, is from New York City and is eighteen years old. She graduated from Ft. Lauderdale High in 1964 and is studying Fine Arts and Spanish. She classifies herself as a Democrat, but adds that she sometimes feels "One party is as bad as the other, if not worse, as far as being 'for' Americans and America."
JOYCE LEAGAN, Treasurer, is a native of Massachusetts and graduated from Pompano Beach High School in 1964. She is nineteen years old and is studying Elementary Educa- tion and World Literature. She keeps busy with student government, reading, and "seek- ing seclusion," and explains her political opinions as "conservatively confused."
SOPHOMORES
ANN BARDSLEY is a native of Massachusetts. She is nineteen years old, and a 1964 grad- uate of McArthur High School. Ann is study- ing Journalism and Political Science. She works on the student publications staff, and considers herself a "rather liberal" Democrat. When relaxing, she enjoys reading and oil painting.
CLARKIA DENNIS is a nineteen-year-old native of New York. She is a 1964 graduate of Stranahan High School and is majoring in English and History. She is a busy oil painter, active in school clubs and considers herself a political independent.
RON GUSTINELLA is from Ohio. He is eigh- teen, and graduated from Ft. Lauderdale High School in 1964, and is majoring in Pre-Medi- icine and Biology. He is also interested in electronics and sports. He lists himself as
mm
><tliv a Republican.
BONNIE McFETRlDGE is chairman of the Soph- omore Senate and a native Californian. She is nineteen, and graduated from Ft. Lauder- dale in 1964. Bonnie spends her spare time with modeling, sewing, sports and cheerlead- ing. She is studying Biology and Education.
JtV^&4^
f^7
GERALD MUCCI is a nineteen-year-old from Massachusetts. He, too, graduated from Lau- derdale High in 1964, and is studying Busi- ness Administration and Marketing. Jerry is an articulate student of politics and also enjoys tennis and his hi-fi. He calls himself a "Conservative, by whose definition?"
SANDY PRYOR, nineteen, is also a '64 grad- uate of Ft. Lauderdale High. A native Penn- sylvanian, she is now majoring in Elementary Education. Sandy is an active member of Circlettes and SNEA.
TRACY WILKINSON is nineteen years old and comes from Michigan. She graduated in 1964 from Stranahan High School, and is majoring in Chemistry and Math. She lists her inter- ests as "Religion, politics and people," and is a Conservative Republican.
FRESHMEN
SCOTT ANDERSON comes from New Jersey and graduated there, from Montclair High School, in 1964. He is nineteen years old and is studying English and Speech. Scott plays the guitar and likes folk music. He considers himself a liberal political inde- pendent.
BRENT BALCH is eighteen years old and comes from Illinois. He graduated from Car- dinal Gibbons High in 1964 and is majoring in Liberal Arts. He lists himself as a Con- servative Republican.
RENEE BAYUK is an eighteen-year-old native of Pennsylvania. She graduated from Lauder- dale High in 1965, and is studying Spanish and History. Renee enjoys dancing, swim- ming, tennis and singing. She is a Repub- lican.
WILLIAM BEHERENS, eighteen, comes from Illinois. Bill graduated from Stranahan High with the class of '65, and is taking Engineer- ing and Electro-Acoustics. He likes sports cars and his hi-fi. He is a Conservative Republican.
JAMES BIRKETT is eighteen years old and from New York. He graduated from McArthur High School in 1965 and is studying Political Science and Mathematics. He likes boxing, basketball, reading and politics. He leans to- ward the Democratic party, but adds that he may be open for a change.
56
THE PEOPLE
%^1
MIKE BURGIO, eighteen, is a native New York- er and a 1965 graduate of Chaminade High School. He is majoring in business admin- istration. IVIil^e enjoys surfing in his spare time, and lists himself as a Democrat.
DAVID BYRNE is eighteen years old and a na- tive of New York. He graduated from North- east High in 1965 and is majoring in Pre-En- gineering. Dave's many interests include elec- tronics, flying, politics, philosophy, "rough- ing it." He considers his political interests "independent," with "conservative leanings."
LARRY ELLIS, eighteen years old, is a 1965 graduate of Stranahan Senior High School and Chairman of the Freshmen Senate. A native New Yorker, Larry's major studies include Law and Creative Writing. His Interests are found in music and sports and he considers himself a conservative Republican.
BRUCE EVANS, is a native of Ohio and a 1965 graduate of South Broward High School. He is majoring in Dentistry, and likes music, drawing, and skindiving. Bruce lists his political preference as Democrat.
GARY FOSS is an eighteen-year-old Floridian. He graduated from Pompano Beach High School and is studying Chemical Engineer- ing. He is a personnel officer in the Civil Air Patrol, and a Republican.
JEAN HOLDER is eighteen years old and also from Florida. She graduated from McArthur High School with the class of '65, and is majoring in Marine Geology and Gemology. Jean is interested in jewelry, politics, his- tory and horses, and considers herself a conservative Republican.
ELLEN KING is eighteen and comes from New York. She was part of Lauderdale High's class of '65 and is studying Education. In her spare time she enjoys water skiing and dancing.
LINDA KNIFFEN is eighteen years old and comes from Michigan. She graduated from McArthur in 1965 aind is majoring in Educa- tion. She lists herself a conservative Re- publican.
'•-t
TERRY LABELLE is a Floridian. He is seven- teen years old and a 1965 graduate of Cham- inade High School. Terry is studying Law and PoMtical Science. He lists himself as a Dem- ocrat and is interested in sports cars and politics.
DAWN MILLER is an eighteen-year-old native of Ohio. She graduated from Pompano Beach High in 1965 and is majoring in Education. She enjoys swimming, dancing, bowling, and tennis, and considers herself a Republican.
CHRISTINA MURPHY is eighteen and comes from Massachusetts. She is a 1965 graduate of Ft. Lauderdale High School and is study- ing Journalism and History. Chris is on the Crier staff and is a devoted fan of female vocalist Peggy Lee. She is a political inde- pendent.
BARBARA GLGES is an eighteen-year-old na- tive of Kentucky. She graduated from Pom- pano Beach High School in 1965 and is study- ing Mathematics and Science. Barbara's many interests include art, music (she can play the organ), sewing, and handcrafts.
CRAIG PALMER comes from Ohio. He is eigh- teen years old and graduated from Cardinal Gibbons High School in 1965. Craig is study- ing French and Education, collects tropical fish, and lists himself as a Republican.
JULIE POOLE is a native of New York and is eighteen years old. She is a 1965 gradu- ate of Ft. Lauderdale High and is majoring in lournalism. Julie pursues "happiness and all forms of motion." She lists no political preference, except to say that "the world should be kept free from tyranny."
DIANA RACE, an eighteen-year-old, 1965 grad- uate of Ft. Lauderdale Senior High, is attend- ing the Junior College of Broward County on an honors scholarship. A conscientious stu- dent, Diana is politically "conservative."
JAN SOUZA is an eighteen-year-old native of Massachusetts. She graduated from McArthur with the class of '65 and is studying Public Relations and Interior Design. She enjoys drawing, music and dancing, and is politically non-partisan.
57
the colleae student and tlie draft
BY RUSS SEPIELU
58
If you are a male student, and your grades aren't too good, you had better start hitting the books or you may open your mail box and find a letter from Uncle Sam.
As the war in Viet Nam soaks up manpower, the draft calls are rising, and local Selective Service boards are cracking down on bor- derline students. Also in danger
are the perpetual students, men who go to college one term, drop out the next, and return again, and graduate students not en- gaged in the study of science or some field directly related to the "maintenance of the national in- terest."
There have already been re- ported cases of students who were taken from college and drafted. Those involved were borderline students who had exhausted sev- eral years of deferments.
This sudden increase in draft induction began in August, when President Johnson ordered rein- forcements sent to Viet Nam. As a result the draft call jumped from 17,000 in August, to 35,000 in October, and to 45,000 in Decem- ber. This means that every young man, between the ages of 19 and 26, who is not deferred for rea- sons of health, education, or mat- rimony, has probably been called. In many parts of the country married men without children are already being called. Under exist- ing laws, college students can be called only after the pool of single or childless men has been de- pleted.
Mrs. Margaret Goodwin, Ad- ministrative Clerk of the Selective Service System in Broward Coun- ty, said that, "College students are in no immediate danger of being drafted. Any student carrying 12 hours and in good academic stand- ing," she said, "will still be de- ferred."
One must keep in mind the fact that the college student is de- ferred from the draft only under the present draft laws. The draft- evasion movement has already hastened a re-examination of the way our draft laws are admin- istered.
Many people feel that college should not be used as a refuge from military service, or that just because a boy's family is rich enough to send him to school, he need not serve the nation in any capacity.
On the other hand, this country is traditionally anti-militaristic and has always encouraged stu- dents to continue their studies and broaden their knowledge.
Some observers, like Robert G. Spivak, of the New York Journal-
American, feel that a medical stu- dent or a science student could be more valuable to the nation out- side the armed services than inside.
It would be unfortunate for such students if Congress were to change the draft laws without first carefully reviewing the situation.
Perhaps the greatest damage to the student's case for deferment is being done by the protesters. Their rowdy demonstrations are giving college students a bad repu- tation as being anti-government. In actuality, the anti-Viet Nam and anti-draft demonstrators rep- resent only a small minority of college students. The tactics of the protesters, however, are be- ginning to backfire. Many student groups are now forming that sup- port our government's policy in Viet Nam. Two of these, the Circl- ettes of the Junior College of Broward County and the Student Government of Miami-Dade Jun- ior College, are organizing a drive to send Christmas presents to servicemen in Viet Nam. Organi- zations such as these are appear- ing on campuses all across the na- tion. Their actions are proving that the demonstrators are a def- inite minority, and that the ma- jority of the students support our government's policies.
If college students continue to be deferred, and if the draft call remains high, colleges can prepare for a tremendous population ex- plosion next fall. Between now and next September some 3,000,- 000 men will reach draft age. These youths represent the fantas- tic crop of "war babies," those children born in 1946 and 1947. Of these men some 40% will enter college, which will put a great burden on many schools.
For the others, those not enter- ing college or those that are un- decided, there is advice from Lt. Gen. Lewis B. Hershey, head of the Selective Service System: "If you know what you want to be, then go on to college. If not, go in the service."
This entire situation that we are experiencing boils down to two alternatives for college stu- dents. STUDY HARD AND DII^ IGENTLY, OR GET FITTED FOR KHAKIS.
59
by Joel Martin
Director of the Astronomy Program
It is not every year that a col- lege astronomy program can fur- nish a real, live comet for the students. But 1965 was one of those years.
This year the observing pro- gram for Astronomy 101 included Comet Ikeya-Seki, alias 1965f, alias Sungrazer VIII. The depend- able Moon, Venus and Saturn were also on hand.
The 160 novice astronomers were given day-by-day directions for following the comet. Last minute position measurements were received regularly from the Central Bureau for Astronomical Telegrams, a service of the Inter- national Astronomical Union.
The only real difficulty was the ungodly hour at which the comet could be seen. After all, 5:30 a.m. is beyond the call of duty — even for a student in desperate need of an A or a B. The comet was best seen in Fort Lauderdale on Octo- ber 25 and 28 after it had passed perihelion — and after the news- papers had consigned it to their special kind of oblivion.
Kaoru Ikeya, the Japanese who discovered the comet, is exactly the same age as the students of JCBC. One big difference between him and the students is that he works full time for $35 a month, and spots comets in his spare time.
Ikeya is improving every year. This comet is his third and his best. What will his next one be?
Ikeya is persistent. He arises before dawn to pursue his avoca- tion. He discovered his first comet after 350 hours of searching in the pre-day light constellations. This was in 1963.
Locally, more than 220 inter- ested people attended JCBC's first comet party to see Ikeya's first. It was, however, dim, small and hard to see.
His third comet — one anyone would be proud of — represented more than 2,332 hours at his home- made telescope. Though he spends a lot of time, Ikeya spends little money — a total of $22.32 on the parts for his astronomical instru- ment.
The picture of Comet Ikeya-
Seki should help students remem- ■ ber this unusual event. The next big comet is due about 1986 when Halley's will return. It may be as impressive as 1965f, and it may not.
60
61
"Because the colleges are afraid to deal frankly with the normal sexual drives of young people, the consequences for students can be tragic," states Gerald Walker, recipient of the National Conference of Christians and Jews' Certificate of Excellence for Journalistic Achievement.
Every generation, of course, has had to deal with the problem of premarital relations among young people on the college level. As the Harvard "Crim- son" put it in a recent article, "In sheer wildness, today's college students do not compare with their fabled predecessors." It also lists two factors, how- ever, that make the cm-rent students different: (1) premarital sex in all its forms is much more wide- spread and openly discussed among students; and (2) in the midst of this apparent sophistication, at a time when highly reliable methods of birth control exist, the majority of students are nearly as ignorant of the facts as die poorest, illiterate Indian peasant.
"College pregnancies seldom appear in the pub- lished figm-es on illegitimacy (which has been rising throughout tlie nation)," states Milton I. Levine, M.D., "because die majority of diem end in abor- tions." Through an abortion grapevine, which exists around most colleges, these desperate giils tiy to find their way to some doctor, rather than a quack. If they are lucky enough to find an M.D., the coeds arrange to have the abortion performed over die weekend, so they can be back in class Monday morning. Usually, dieir parents know nothing about it. Of course, the gu^ls are taking enormous chances, for if the operation is badly done, they risk death.
Odier girls decide to have their babies. They drop out of school and out of sight, then usually surrender the child to an adoption agency. James Poling, pro- fessor of family life at Oregon State University, stated that research has foimd, however, that few young women who give up dieir babies ever recover completely from feelings of guilt and remorse.
The third possibility is for the couple to marry — even though they may be far from ready for it
emotionally. Moreover, they may be totally unsuited to each other. Such "quickie marriages" load the dice against them and dieir children.
Colleges should face these facts realistically. Their primary purpose is education, yet, they cannot escape responsibility for die emotional and physical life of young people on their campuses. Since schools are aware that a certain number of students will have premarital sexual relations, administrators should try to make certain that all students know how to avoid the serious consequences.
There is a world of difference between advocating free love and merely giving honest answers to ques- tions which houble students. Such questions as, "How do you describe the contraceptive diaphragm?" and "Is it possible to become pregnant without com- plete sexual intercourse?" are common inquiries among college students. One way to answer these questions in advance would be to provide each fresh- man with a recommended reading list of reliable, forthright books, such as Dr. Alan F. Guttmacher's "Babies by Choice or by Chance" (Avon, 1961, 50 cents) or his more detailed "Complete Book of Birth Control" (Ballantine, 50 cents). Both paperbacks are easily available at newsstands and drugstores, as well as at bookstores. The "Complete Book of Birth Con- trol" gives full descriptions of all accepted methods and includes what is probably the clearest explana- tion of the "rhythm" method, the only one that the Catholic church will consider.
Certainly the colleges could help students under- stand better the physiological, psychological, socio- logical, and moral implications of their sexual ma- turity. To do this effectively, however, colleges should take into consideration the sexual activity that exists on campuses today and try to develop their policies to deal with it as realistically as pos- sible. The "problem" exists, has been evaded, and will never be completely solved until the issue is faced squarely. Let us hope diat our colleges at least make an attempt.
62
"Landscape! Landscape!"
"As close as I can figure, Mister, your machine just vomited"
63
Commercials We'd
Like to See —
". . . Mah Man Packs
a .38 — Lifebuoy!"
tt>^
"I don't like your attitude, Mr. Smith!"
64
"There's something here holding a Yankee Go Home sign"
OUR FEATURE WRITERS
CHARLIE BURT, author of "The Silent College Dilemma", will gradu- ate from JCBC in December. Immediate plans after graduation include attending the University of Florida as an advertising major. Off campus, Charlie was a ski instructor for Mirador Ski School.
t-
^
w
BILL KELLEY, author of "Football and the Junior College", is pres- ently a freshman English major. An avid sports enthusiast. Bill was the sports editor of the newspaper at South Broward and is currently Sports editor for the Venetian Crier.
PAM SERRE, author of "The Rushing Testimonial", is a 1965 gradu- ate of Cardinal Gibbons, where she was a staff writer for "Insight", their school newspaper. An elementary education major, Pam is a member of the French club and an initiate of Circlettes.
(^
MATT FAISON, author of "The Question of Sub Rosas", is a sopho- more and plans to graduate in April. As a freshman, he was selected Freshman Man of the Year and is a member of Delta Psi Omega, dramatic honorary society. He is currently the editor of the Venetian Crier and is a member of the Student Activities Board.
f^Jth
RUSS SEPIELLI, author of "The College Student and the Draft", attended the University of Florida during 1963-64. He is currently working for WQAM and plans to attend the University of Miami next Fall, majoring in speech therapy.
L2 4
V/
513VJI
EDITOR'S NOTE
To break from tradition is a hard thing to accomplish, especially when the break results in such a noticeable change. Silver Sands is no exception, for the transformation that has taken place in the yearbook has caused an undercurrent of comment on the subject un- paralleled at the College, in the county, or in the state.
Silver Sands is not for the ultra-conserva-
tives or the adorers of those overly-common, hard-bound books that just about every school in the nation has been clinging to for the past century. Such statements as "I wish we had a yearbook like the one back in high school" are a little behind times. For you, high school is a thing of the past but the Junior College is a very present fact. It is thus fitting that Silver Sands be a different publication, for it tells of life at an institution that is itself different from all other "traditional" forms of educational
structure. As a visiting student put it, "The magazine is something fresh, a new look, an escape from staleness."
We, the members of the staff of Silver Sands, are proud with our break from tra- dition and earnestly believe other colleges will follow. If this. Silver Sands III, does nothing else for you, we hope that it will remind you that you are now in college.
John E. Leatherwood Editor-in-Chief
MARCH, 1966
STAFF AND ADVISORS
Editor-in-Cbiet John E. Leatherwood
Assistant Editor Pamela Edwards
Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley
Feature Editor _ Sheryl Martin
Art Editor Lewis Alquist
Sports Editor John Wolfe
General Staff Assistant Carol Shafer
Photographers David Porter and
Norman Summey Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes
Chairman of the Division of Language
and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter
COVER: Steve Hall leaps for rebound against Miami-Dade Falcons; photo by David Porter
SILVER
'^m
The Junior College of Bromard County
Fort Lauderdale, florida
MARCH, 1966
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BAHAMA WIPE OUT Lee Bacall 2 SPORTS: INTRAMURALS/INTERCOLLEGIATE
PUBLICATIONS Ann Bardsley and Jim Flavin 4 John Wolfe 37
THE SCENT OF LILAC (Short Story) WINTER FROLIC 40
. ' Norm Stebner 10 TEAHOUSE OF THE AUGUST MOON
-ANN'S REVIEW , ". Ann Bardsley 13 Phil Mansueto 42
ON NATURE AND MAN (Essay) „.,r.. Carol Shafer 14 THE CHRISTMAS DANCE 44
THE PROBLEM OF CAMPUS LANDSCAPING VENETIAN HOLIDAY Pam Edwards 46
Bruce Scharman 16
THE FACE OJl^VJET NAM Jack Cresse 18 THE SOCK HOPS 48
THEPSISC^GE DROPOUT Paul King 26 SALUTE BRAZIL Jeanne Cooney 50
TrOTE on a SHOESTRING Ann Bardsley 28 SING OUT 66 John Leatherwood 52
WHAT AM I? (Poem) Leonard Bauer 30 CLUBS AND ORGANIZATIONS Sheryl Martin 55
BE KIND AND TOLERANT, O YOUTH (Poem) j THOUGHT OF BEAUTY (Poem)
Cassandra Kenf.eld 31 ^^^^^ j^ ^^^ j^^^. ^^^^^^ 53
ON CAMPUS (Cartoons by Lew Alquist) 32 t »,;r „r^ .r^ . ^ j t, .. , , ^,
BE SUCCESSFUL -ATTEND COLLEGE! (Essay) ^ ^^ "^ ^^"^""^ Cassandra Kenfield 63
Betty F. Niesen 34 MULTIPARTITE (Poem) James Higgins Gray 64
By
LEE BACALL
Illustrated by Paul King
BAHAMA
WIPE
OUT
Wi
IND AND SEA both combine to give birth to an ocean wave. It is this ocean wave which the surfer reveres. It is foi; this wave that the surfer prays. It is from this wave that the surfer will get his thrills.
Wind is the father of the ocean wave. It is he who delivers the seed of direction to his mate. The sea is the mother of the ocean wave, for it is she who will bear a child, a child in the form of an ocean wave. And it is the ocean floor who in the form of a midwife will deHver the wave unto the surfer.
Blowing for many days in one direction, the wind gives stimulus to the sea. Heavy swells of water are formed. These swells are long, flowing, smooth waves. These swells, often 1,000 feet in length, are sometimes found by ocean liners to be running at speeds of 43 knots.
Allowed to run uninterrupted onto a beach, the swell will gradually build in height, and lessen in length. When a ground swell reaches a sand bar, it changes form due to friction from the bottom, and compression. A steep sided short wave is produced from the long shallow wave, which breaks usually where the water is shallowest.
Because south Florida is blessed with an offshore neighbor acting as a breakwater, i.e. the Bahamas island chain, there is a lack of surf. Grand Bahama, Eleuthera, and Great Abaco Islands prevent the long ground swells from reaching our shores.
It is reasons such as the Bahama chain that one finds armouncements such as this: SURFERS: Ride wanted to Daytona or Melbourne areas over Thanksgiving vacation. More than willing to share expenses in order to ride decent surf. Ask for Bob 98-9-2365.
But why if there is such a paucity of surf in south Florida do surfers surf?
Answers to this question which was posed to surfers along the coast, ranged from "I dunno" to "It's something to do."
When Russ Sepielh was confronted with the ques- tion, he gave this reply, "When I am going to school,
it is an escape from my problems. I get a feeling of personal satisfaction and accomplishment on a big day when I make the waves." It's personal he said, it makes me feel good.
Butch Herndon, from the Little Hawaii Surf Shop in Hollywood, said a mouthful about surfing when he said, "It is something you have to try before you can appreciate it."
Whatever their reason, and whatever their moti- vation, surfers are buying boards and equipment in numbers almost unbelievable five years ago.
For years people have looked with disdain upon the sport of surfing and its participants. Even today there is a certain dislike of surfers by the older generation.
People may laugh at the bronzed young adven- turers paddling their boards in tranquil waters. But sure as the water erodes the sand, the surfer will ride the waves.
There are people who do not laugh at surfers. These people are tlie enterpreneurs in the "Surfing Racket." Many people do not realize the multi- miUion dollar importance to the American economy. Consider tlie fact that the average surfboard costs from $125 to $175 with some custom boards costing even more. Taking as an average $150 as the price, and multiplying it times the estimated one million surfers there are, you come up with the staggering figure of 150 million dollars invested in surfboards alone. This does not take into account all the people the business employs, nor the materials used.
Surfing has been the stimulus for many products in the consumer market. Like every group, surfing has its own publication, Surfer magazine. There is a national organization getting underway, the USSA . . . the United States Surfers Association, dedicated to betterment of the sport. And too, like every grouj), organization, club, or field, surfing has its own spe- cialized words.
There are regulation clothes to be worn . . . baggies for tlie boys, and bikinis for die girls. When it is cold, everyone must wear a diver's tyjje wet suit. Many big name manufacturers of swimwear such as Jantzen, and Cole have gotten into the surf- ing trend.
Movie moguls have joined the bandwagon, along with recording artists and companies. On and on the list could go, including surfer cartoons, and skat- boards.
Not unlike the hula hoop, the surf craze is now upon us. But, imlike a fad, surfing is real, has been ■ real for many years.
It has only come of age.
A free student press has been, for many years, of vital importance to almost all of America's colleges and universities. It reflects, through the airway and the printed page, the intellectual, social, and political ideas of its institution, and keeps the individual student in touch with all the activities on an often sprawling campus. A good student press, however, is more than just a mirror of college life. It encourages action, controversy, and self expression. It takes a leading role on the campus it serves.
The Junior College of Broward County has four publications, a weekly newspaper, yearbook-maga- zine, literary magazine, and radio program. All four are entirely operated by students, and are financed from the student activity fees.
PUBLICATIONS
BY ANN BARDSLEY
AND
JIM FLAVIN
Most of the editorial staff of all four publications are paid by workship or scholarship, and most intend to make journalism or a related field their profes- sion. Many of the staff members, however, are un- paid volunteers who receive nothing but experience for their labors.
Putting out a publication is tiresome and un- glamorous work, with the frustration of inflexible deadlines and numerous unforeseen problems. Type- writers sometimes rattle in the cluttered publications office until late at night.
The weary staff members often wonder aloud, ". . . Why do I bother, anyway? . . ." The truth is, they like it. For them, there is a creative thrill and pride in producing a newspaper, a magazine, or a radio show, that nothing else can match.
Editor-in-Chief Matt Faison and Associate Editor John Teitschied.
$WM
Peggy Williams, Assistant Editor
Perhaps the most difficult job among all the publications be- longs to the staff of the VENE- TIAN CRIER, JCBC's weekly newspaper. Editor Matt Faison and his staff must, within a tight schedule, gather and write news stories, columns, and editorials, find photographs and an editorial cartoon, and then correct copy and proof sheets, lay out and paste up the pages, and fold and distribute the finished paper every Friday morning.
In addition to gathering news, the Crier staff has sponsored ac- tivities such as a forum on the war in Viet Nam and has taken editorial stands on school politics and policies, local and state issues affecting the college, and national problems such as civil rights, the student protestor, and the Ku Klux Klan. The Crier's sharp com- ments have occasionally sparked angry letters to the editor and one issue was actually burned by the partisans of a candidate the Crier criticized during a Student Gov- ernment election. Despite the storms that sometimes ruffle the breeze of the Crier offices, it con- tinues a pohcy of impartial news coverage and outspoken editorial comment.
Gerry McManus, Managing Editor
Marci Coyle, News Editor Pidgeon Darbro, Feature Editor Ed Dempsey, Sports Editor
SILVER SANDS
John Leathenvood, Editor-in-Chief, and Paul Bundy, Jr., Tropical Press representative discuss the quality and design of the Silver Sands II color flat.
Lew Alquist Art Editor
Q Edvfards, Assistant Editor
Ann Bardsley, Literary Editor
Sheryl Martin, Feature Editor
SILVER SANDS, the quarterly feature magazine of JCBC, is, to both its staff and its readers, an exciting experiment in college journalism. This year Silver Sands replaced the traditional yearbook beloved of high school students. The editor, John Leatherwood, and his staff are trying to tell die real story of one year at JCBC without being, as they put it, "trapped \\'ithin the rigid year- book format." The magazine re- tains many yearbook features, such as photographs of the faculty and
the graduating students, but in- stead of the usual page for every club and acti\'ity the magazine publishes articles of \arying length about major organizations and so- cial events, often lumping related events together in one feature. In addition to the usual yearbook subjects, Siher Sands prints book reviews, poems, cartoons, short stories, and nonfiction articles that reflect the ideas and issues which characterize each year of college life.
John Wolfe Sports Editor
Carol Shafer General Staff Assistant
P'AN KU
Helen Anne Easterly, P'an Ku faculty advisor, studies layout design and content of a rival publication.
For the creative writer, a small staff produces JCBC's literary magazine, P'AN KU. The best ser- ious literature, both prose and poetry by Broward students and faculty, is published in the mag- azine's two yearly issues. Any stu- dent can submit original poetry, essays, and short stories, and the P'an Ku editorial board chooses the best manuscripts for publica- tion. The magazine is illustrated with appropriate drawings, engrav- ings, and woodcuts chosen by editor John Charlton and Karen Winkopp, the art editor. In this, its second year of publication, P'an Ku is published in December and April, and has expanded from 32 to 64 pages of art and litera- ture.
Editor-in-Chief John Charlton
The staff of Community College Calling (Tri-C): Jim Flavin, Nancy White, Alan Kent, and Tri-C Director Rick Barnard.
nity
Commu College Calling
The newest and largest circulat- ing of all the JCBC publications is COMMUNITY COLLEGE CALL- ING, a weekly radio program which reaches an estimated five thousand listeners in Dade, Brow- ard, and Palm Beach counties. The program broadcasts from the W\VIL studios at 4:30 every Sun- day afternoon. Rick Bamard, Jim Flavin, Nancy Wliite, and Al Kent
produce half an hour of campus ne\\'s, music, interviews with fac- ulty members and special guests, and a short "spotlight" interview with a student personality. The student staff does all of its own taping and editing and designs the program to publicize special campus activities and to inform a largely adult audience about the junior college.
T//ie Scent
By NORM STEBNER
EMMETT was washing the breakfast dishes when he heard the dog bark at a car turning into the farmyard. He paused, and then dropped the chipped, white enamel cup into the soapy water.
He Hved alone, except for his younger brother, Johnny. The house was utilitarian. Emmett had thought of having an inside pump, but the old well outside was still good, its water cold and sweet; besides, he had outside chores whatever the weather. So he had given up the idea. The seats of the two wooden chairs at the oilcloth-covered table where he stood had long since worn through successive layers of paint. The wood grain glowed with a dull luster. The woodbox by the stove showed the batter- ing of years. Next to the canebottom rocker was his mother's lamp table, a source of pride to him, with its clawed feet clutching the large green-glass orbs with perpetual ferocity. On the wall, a Currier and Ives print receded into mistiness behind a fly- specked glass, itself bounded by an ornate, once- gilded frame. In one corner of the room, the brass bedstead held a heavy quilted cover which still retained the residue of variegated splendor.
He wiped his hands on the floursack remnant with thoughtful deliberateness as the car -door slammed. The dog's half-hearted growls accom- panied the footsteps across the porch. A man's shadow abruptly blocked most of the light coming through the unscreened opening.
"Mr. Elders?"
"Yes," said Emmett hesitantly, as he moved on age-stiffened legs toward the door. The rapidity with which the stranger had reached the door had caught Emmett somewhat by surprise.
"I'm from the State Welfare Board," said the stranger.
Emmett retreated a step. "Come in," he said, acceding to the stranger's official tone.
"Are you alone?" asked the agent, confidentially, without moving.
"Yes, I'm alone," said Emmett slowly, adding, "Johnny's out."
The agent moved into the semi-dusk of Emmett's house. He turned to glance out of the doorway where the dog, eying the intruder, had stopped at the sill marking the interior of the house.
"G'wan," said Emmett, motioning. The dog retreated.
The agent, seemingly relieved, said, "Good watch- dog, I suppose?"
"Too old," said Emmett gruffly, looking past the stranger.
Outside, brushing the porch, a new-leaved lilac bush was vibrant with the imminent explosion of violet. The windmill rasped once uncertainly. The rusty red of the farmyard stopped at the edge of the new green winter wheat. Already, the heat waves blurred the line where green and blue met. Emmett peered intently for a moment, eyes narrowed in a face lined with more than age. The agent, face pale in the dusky light, stood flat-footed, straw hat in hand.
"Might as well sit down," said Emmett, indicating the rocker.
The agent moved gingerly toward the rocker, almost declining the invitation in deference to his light straw-colored suit. He seated himself carefully, and after holding his straw hat for a moment, laid it on the lamp table, resisting the impulse to blow the dust off first. He bent over as if to open his briefcase, but instead, propped it against a clawed table leg, unopened.
Emmett apologized with a glance at the dishpans on the table. "Have to do the chores first around here." He pulled a chair around to face the agent.
As the agent leaned forward, Emmett inter- jected, "The other fellow didn't come." It was neither a statement nor a question.
"Mr. Polp?" asked the agent.
Emmett nodded, although he didn't know the former agent's name.
10
The agent continued, "He's been assigned other work in the department."
Emmett rather wondered at the other work, but didn't ask. He was more concerned about the change. The last agent had stopped in several times; questions about him, about Johnny. All written down on forms. Emmett remembered the carbon paper, how worn it was. It would hardly write and yet the agent had put the carbon in the forms very carefully. Even when it hardly wrote. He wondered if this new agent had some new carbon paper.
"When I was driving in, I couldn't help noticing your horses. Sure are big."
Emmett recognized that the agent was really commenting on the fact that he still used horses, but he said proudly, "Belgians. Go almost two thous- and pound. First ones in these parts to use 'em. They can pull all day.''
The agent settled back in the rocker. Emmett continued, "My dad paid a thousand dollars for one."
The agent focused on Emmett's dirt-stained knees. Emmett felt obliged to look at them too. He had set out a couple of dozen tomato plants that morning, carefully placing shingles to protect them from the sun. He saw no reason to explain, so he said, "1927. Kansas City. Big stallion, called him Barney."
The agent's "Uh-huh" was faint, mostly to him- self.
"We used to have a dozen or so around. Raised 'em. Three years ago I sold a matched pair for fifteen hundred." Emmett said it as if to convince the agent that the horses were a good investment. When the agent didn't react, Emmett said, "Got four left. Need 'em.''
Emmett interpreted the agent's silence as recep- tiveness. "How 'bout a cup of coffee?" He stood as he said it.
The agent extended his arm so his wristwatch was exposed and said in a quick tone, "Yes."
Emmett opened the stove lid, decided that chips
Illustrated By SHARON FROST
would do. He rummaged in the woodbox. The agent used the opportunity to open his briefcase, extracting a number of papers which he read and shuffled. Emmett shook the grate, added a dipper of water to the blue-enamelware coffee pot. Going to the shelves that served as a cupboard, where rows of jars, some empty, some full, stood in the near- darkness that obscured their contents, Emmett raised a little curtain at one end and carefully removed two flower-decorated cups. Glancing now and then at the agent engrossed in his papers, Emmett washed and polished the cups until they shone. When the coffee pot made hissing noises, he raised the lid and peered into the murky liquid. The odor reassured him, and he filled both cups with a steady hand.
The agent was so preoccupied with his reading as Emmett approached, that he had to place the cup on the lamp table. Returning to his own chair, he sipped his coffee. His lips smacked, and a satis- fied "ah" was distinctly audible. The agent continued his reading. Emmett took another sip of coffee, test- ing the flavor in his mouth. Although the taste was reassuring, he set his coffee on the table beside him. The dog's toenails ticked softly across the porch. He lay down just outside, floppy ears half-raised, evalu- ating the silence.
"Besides,'' said Emmett abruptly, "Johnny likes to ride 'em. Got one out there 's a pretty good rider."
The agent continued reading. Emmett added, with a trace of humor, "Big enough, that's sure."
The agent glanced up. "Oh," he said, like a question.
"And I don't have to worry "bout him on that horse. Got too much sense. Won't even go far from the place. Comes home when he's had enough."
The agent finished his reading. He let the papers rest on his lap, knees together, and reached for the coffee with both hands, a necessity since the lamp table was just a little below his eye-level. Emmett watched the maneuver carefully, half-expecting to
11
see coffee stains appear on the straw-colored suit. The agent managed a small sip, however, and re- turned the cup to the table. Emmett felt relieved and almost irritated at the same time.
"Course, he can't do much 'round the place." It wasn't an admission, but a statement of fact.
The agent very deliberately tapped the papers into neat order on the arm of the rocker. He placed them on top of his straw hat with an air of dismissal.
"Don't really matter, though, 'cause I can still do what needs to be done around here.''
At this, the agent's face brightened and Emmett felt as though he had been complimented.
"Lot's to be done," agreed the agent.
Emmett reflected a moment. A tumbling pro- fusion passed through his mind.
"Don't know why the Howards should be com- plaining 'bout Johnny, though," he said. His voice held a bitter edge.
"They would just rather not have Johnny around their place," said the agent, his voice indicating that this was not an unreasonable request.
"I know. But he don't bother nothing. Their li'l' girl likes to play with him!" After a moment Emmett added, "He plays real nice with her too. Used to give her horsie-back rides. Just sits by the fence and looks at her books. Doesn't even go in their yard anymore!"
"Uh-huh," said the agent, as though to indicate the Howards hadn't made any complaints recently.
A big blue bottlefly buzzed aimlessly through the doorway. The agent flinched to himself and watched the fly, darting and pausing, bumping around the rjDom. Emmett's eyes followed the fly too. The opaque light of the window by the stove, begrimed inside and out, finally attracted the fly. Both watched as the fly smashed repeatedly against the window, finally buzzing helplessly as it pressed itself against the glass.
Emmett spoke again, his urgency pleading against the irrelevancy of his argument. "He's big, but he wouldn't hurt the little girl."
The fly continued to buzz, more faintly now. Occasionally it rested. Emmett looked out of the open door, where the colors under the ascending sun were more vivid, yet blurred. He became aware of the heat and wiped his face with the dish towel. Only when he had finished did he notice, and em- barrassed, he crumpled the towel and tossed it on the table as though it didn't matter. Somewhere out in the yard, a rooster started to crow, but stopped, his throat to dry to finish.
His thoughts were clearer now. Mornings, feeding Johnny oatmeal, some dribbling down out of the
corner of his mouth into his beard. Winters, wiring his coat on. Or shaving him, trying to get him to sit still — the time he grabbed the razor and cut his hand because he didn't want to be shaved. Or bathing him. If he got him into the tub, he splashed water all over the room. Johnny and the eggs. He liked them best warm from the hen, to take them and crush them in his big hands, arms upraised, so the warm yellow ran down his wrists and arms.
Emmett shook his head, one hand rubbing the back of his neck. The dog, nose on the doorsill, looked with brown eyes at Emmett, his tail thump- ing faintly now and then. The agent stirred in his rocker, his fingers tracing the creases in his trousers down to where they disappeared at his knees.
Softly, Emmett said, "He's my brother."
The fly was silent now, a spot of dark against the hazy gray.
The agent reached into his briefcase and pulled out a pad of printed forms. Emmett turned at the rustling and watched as the agent raised the pages one by one and methodically inserted the worn carbon paper squarely, firmly.
"It would be best to take care of it today," said the agent, approaching Emmett with the forms.
Emmett pushed aside the coffee cup.
"You'll need to sign all four copies." The agent's finger pointed. Emmett picked up the pen, and the agent said, "I'll take him with me this morning."
Emmett paused, reaching for the towel. "He's probably down at the Howard's." The towel muffled the words.
When Emmett had finished signing, the agent put the forms into his briefcase, snapping the lock, and fastening the straps.
"I'll pick him up on the way."
Emmett shook his head from side to side, slowly, his white hair strangely full. He brushed at his dirt- stained knees with quick swats of his hand. Rising, he walked with steady, measured steps, past the dog, out on the porch, stopping on the edge in the bright sunlight. Clearing his throat first, he called, "John-ny," but his voice cracked. Reaching out to the lilac bush, he broke a small branch. He smelled its fragance, noting that it would bloom tomorrow. Taking a deep breath, he tried again. "John-ny." His voice was stronger, but not strong enough to carry. The dog padded up beside him. One hand went to scratch the dog behind the ears; the tail moved rapidly. Then straightening up, Emmett threw the lilac branch aside, and called once more, "John-n-ny!" His cry pierced the shimmering stillness. Down the road, a faint call came echoing back.
I
12
/f«^4 REVIEW
BRENDAN BEHAN, as some may recall, was an Irish author, playwright, and humorist who died a few years ago. He drank himself to death at a very early age. While he lived, Behan was a colorful fig- ure who was known for his coarse- ness, profanity, and love of liquor as much as for his writings.
Brendan Behan was born in a Dublin slum and grew up in the turmoil of the Irish revolution. He joined the Irish Republican Army and was sent, at the age of 16, to England, to blow up a battleship. In that year, 1939, battleships were sorely needed by the British. The young terrorist was caught, im- prisoned, and later sent to a re- form school for teenage offenders. It is about this period in his life that Behan wrote in his autobio- graphical BORSTAL BOY, first published in 1958 and now reis- sued in paperback.
BORSTAL BOY (a borstal is a British reform school) captures all of the boredom, squalor, and deg- radation of prison life, yet it is a surprisingly funny and entertain- ing book. Behan has a fine Irish wit and a great skill with words. He laughs at himself and thumbs his nose at the British Empire. He waves the Irish flag, yet displays a real insight and tenderness towards his English prisonmates.
Behan being Behan, however, BORSTAL BOY is not for the prudish. He writes in the idiom of English prison and Irish slum and he did so so authentically that the book was banned in his native Ireland. The four letter words, al- though distracting, do not detract from the book, but add to realistic tableau of life in prison.
As prison literature, BORSTAL BOY is excellent, but its worth goes beyond mere shock value. The reader learns a great deal about Ireland, the Irish, and Bren-
/5^ Ann /],cuid4.le{f,
dan Behan, in particular. Perhaps it was his years in tlie borstal that caused him to reject, in his later life, any real discipline as a writer or as a person. Reading his de- lightful, if rather lengthy and de- tailed autobiography convinces the reader that Behan was one of the great might-have-beens of Irish literature.
Irving Stone, author of LOVE IS ETERNAL (about Abraham and Mary Lincoln) and THE PRESIDENT'S LADY (Andrew and Rachel Jackson), has written another fine biographical novel about a famous presidential couple. This one is the moving love story of John and Abigail Adams, set against the panorama of the Amer- ican Revolution.
Abigail Smith was a pretty, saucy girl from Braintree, Mass., who, to the surprised disapproval of her family, fell in love with, and married, prickly, impoverished young Lawyer Adams. Their long life together had more than its share of grief, war, and long sep^ aration, but theirs was an exciting marriage in an exciting age. Abi- gail saw the Boston Massacre trials, the Batde of Bunker Hill, and the inaugurations of George Washington and her own husband as first and second Presidents of the new United States. She fol- lowed John from Braintree to New York, to the American embassies in France and London, until she finally hung out her wash in the White House. She knew Jefferson, Franklin, Washington, and all the giants of that era.
Mrs. Adams left a large collec- tion of letters to posterity and author Stone has made liberal use of them in piecing together the lives of the Adamses, relying on his imagination to fill in the de- tails of their marriage that history
has failed to supply.
THOSE WHO LO\'E looks like another best-seller for Irving Stone.
One of the less recognized re- sults of war is its use in encourag- ing literature. Countless thousands of books, some good, many bad, have come out of every war, and the conflict in Viet Nam is just now beginning to produce its share. The latest of these is OUT- POST OF FREEDOM, by Roger Donlon and Warren Rogers. OUT- POST is Capt. Donlon's story of the guerilla war in Viet Nam, and particularly of the terrible night the Viet Cong tried to wipe out the little jungle outpost he com- manded. For his heroism in that battle, Capt. Donlon won the fust Congressional Medal of Honor awarded since Korea.
Donlon is writing of his own experiences, but his story is essen- tially that of any professional sol- dier combating the Viet Cong. In the war he fights, there are no real battles, only raids in the dark, am- bushes, and booby-traps. The Viet- namese soldiers are quite as likely to fight each other as they are the enemy. (On the night of the battle, Capt. Donlon thinks at first that all the noise is being made by rival tribes within his own forces shooting at each other again.) Even die sweet-faced children who beg for bubblegum in his camp may be spies for the enemy.
It is a strange, frightening war, from which it is hard to separate good and bad, friend and foe. Capt. Donlon and his men are professional warriors, not politi- cians. They had a job to do, to hold their position, and they did it. Their courage seemed, to me, mindless and futile, but it was courage and patriotism none the less. Capt. Donlon and his team are among the first authentic, old- style heroes to come out of the war-that-is-not-a-war in Viet Nam.
13
On Nature and JSl^
an
^ ^a\o/ ^f^Aa^el
. . . Nature's peace will i into you as sunsl flows into trees. The wi J will blow their freshi \ into you and the storms t. \ energy, while cares will a off like autumn leaves
JOHN MI '
Joseph W. Krutch is the author of a small book of essays, The Twelve Seasons, in which he discusses man's relation to the natural world. It is an excellent book and is very beneficial in considering Nature's meaning. Mr. Krutch has lived close to Nature's world, learning to appreciate fully its significance. He realizes that the natural world offers many rewarding experiences to those who will look closely at what is happening there. The natural world is not still, but is full of life and of change.
In the natural world, "there is so much that is not man." Gods creation includes a great deal more than man himself. The Creator has provided a vast world of plants and animals for our discovery. If we would open wide our eyes, ears, and all our other senses in disco\'ery of Nature, we would be amazed at our findings. We would learn, but in addition, fello\\'ship with Nature would lift our spirits to new heights. E\'en a few moments spent each day with the living, nonhuman world would be a worthwhile experience.
Try to develop this sensitivity. Find a flower, any flower, and examine it closely. Feel the softness of its petals. See how perfectly it is designed. Notice its beauty in color. Where do you see such loveliness in man's great enterprises? Do you see it in the towering, steel skyscrapers of the architect? Is such beauty found in our hard, concrete buildings? Definitely not! These cannot compare in beauty and design with the simple flower.
On the other hand, consider the oak tree. Its strength is in extreme contrast with the delicateness of the flower. The oak stands strongly against all
14
weather because its fiber is tough. Year after year, destructive forces try its strength but the oak's life force endures. Our own bodies become ill so easily that we must depend on pills to bolster our health. The tough oak is able to live successfully in most of the world's climates.
Even when we see in the trees the "stark symmetry" of winter, we know that soon the life force will emerge in new green leaves.
Through studying the author's work, one becomes aware of man's efforts to "confine" Nature. Notice how neatly trimmed we keep our yards; we are careful to landscape with just the right amount of foliage. The grass surrounding our trees is cut neatly away; our hedges are trimmed periodically in order to keep them at a certain, specific height. Why can't the natural world be allowed to show its beauty in its own way?
It is always disturbing to see heavy bulldozers clearing the land free of every living thing. Why should machines be allowed to strip the land of all vegetation? Why does civilized man think that he can improve upon Nature? He seems determined to redo the world's landscape. Those persons who have really considered Nature's significance realize that the natural force is a powerful one, as great as human life. It cannot be tamed by man, despite all of his efforts. The life force has a will of its own. We cannot understand this force fully, but we must accept it. When we do, we will experience a joy in knowing that we also belong to God's great plan for life.
|
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H^^^^^^^B^^^AZX^W^^tt^u?!^^ |
X y
■^x
■'•■:::irt;'^:-^ ,.'
\\.^:-y.. '•
THE WIND blows across the fields of the campus picking up sand as it speeds on its course. The flying sand attacks the finish of autos in the parking lot. It stings and burns the eyes of students as they hurry from class to class.
The rain comes, and stays for days. It fills the low spots of our campus grounds and parking lot with the e.xcess of water. The Classroom building, or more correctly the adjoining parking lots, are prob- ably the most in need of adequate drainage. To cross the water, students are forced to wade through or build simple bridges out of boards and unused con- struction materials.
Sometimes, in the warm months, the sun heats tlie grounds near the classrooms, and makes the white sand radiate heat like a stove. Reflections of heat waves shimmer just off the ground and bathe the campus in a smothering blanket.
This characteristic of the JCBC we students all know well. But it won't always be this way. The Dean of Administration, Dr. Harvey B. Oates, is the man seeing to it that the campus will eventually be properly landscaped. He is handling the financial end of the project and coordinating the construction of the new buildings and the landscaping of these buildings.
However, Dr. Oates points out, it probably will take several years before this extensive job is com- plete. The change from barren fields to buildings and trees will not be a radical one. Rather, it will be a very gradual change. Every year there will be a new building or two and a little more greenery around the campus.
Mr. Albert Will will be personally in charge of the selection and placement of shrubs, trees, and sod on campus. As the head of the Horticulture Depart-
16
i;f''^'^>mf'f^^V?':^^^fms>T^\ -,,
^^■.w ^
ment, he is well acquainted with the problems and expense involved in a venture of this size.
The Horticulture Department is growing the plants which are going to be used to landscape the campus grounds. Already, Horticulture students are doing the work and growing plants for this project.
Mr. Will says that although construction will be completed by 1970, the landscaping will be con- tinuously expanding and changing.
The amount of land which can be landscaped on campus right now is severely limited because of the low spots on the grounds. These low spots must be filled and brought up to the level of the present buildings before they can bfi landscaped. Also, buildings are going to be constructed on many of the low spots.
City water is being used to irrigate the present landscaped area, with the exception of the area
around the Administration building. This is very expensive and will be eliminated when pipes are installed and well water is pumped on campus for irrigation purposes. Ho\\c\cr, water pipes cannot be installed until these low spots arc filled. There is no way to water the new landscaping \%ith the campus U'ell water, at this time.
Mr. Will said that for those students who wonder what is planned to eliminate the periodic flooding, a system of drainage pipes will be laid underground and will carr\' \\'ater from the center of the campus to the perimeters, where ditches will be dug to hold the excess water from the heaviest rainfalls. These drainage ditches will be dug alongside of the roads which surround the campus.
How can students help in landscaping the cam- pus? Will had these suggestions: Civic groups are being encouraged to install landscaping, therefore any student or group of students could help by just donating a few hours of their time. Labor is what is needed right now. The plants are all ready and waiting to be planted. Any interested group could work in four shifts on a Saturday and install sod and plants in locations which are ready for landscaping.
The east side of the Science building is suitable for landscaping right now. The new Classroom build- ing will be ready for beautification in late winter or early spring. Will said, "Students can play a big part ... in landscaping their campus."
The model of the completed campus in the A building is fairly accurate, but some changes have been made in that original plan. Notable in these changes is the fact that many of the lakes and much of the area that was intended for beautification will be transformed into badly needed parking lots.
Benches and shaded spots will be scattered around the campus as in the manner of the benches outside the A building. The A building is a fairly good example of what the buildings around the campus will look like when the construction and landscaping are complete.
On the financial end of the landscaping project, Dr. Gates says that taxpayers are willing to pay for educational expenses, but they are reluctant to pay for landscaping costs. At this time tlie funds for landscaping are coming from the vending machines located in the student center and from profits of the book store. Over the next ten years. Dr. Oates estimates the total bill for campus landscaping will run to $500,000.
That's a lot for greenstuff in anyone's book.
17
The Army compound at Thu Bai brandishes a maze of barbed wire; thorned protection against the Viet Cong.
liv^i^r.
MSB
«M
What is Viet Nam?
... it is a struggle between right and wrong with Httle discernible between the two.
... it is a nation that can open the door to world peace or pull the trigger blast- ing the world into oblivion.
... it is man killing man so that man may live.
... it is understood and misunder- stood.
... it is the beginning of life for some and the end for others.
... it is the Red vs. the Red, White and Blue.
... it is the new vs. the old and the ancient vs. the young.
... it is more than a revolution and less than a war.
... it is a mother praying and a grown man crying.
... it is home for some and far away from home for others.
For eleven months and 15 days it was home for two Junior College of Broward County students. They saw what Viet Nam is. The struggle, the killing, the WAR! ! They saw
i?:';'»«»^5
IS
mm
ymi^
^m
Jii mm
t:-^ri*i'VX
rm^
M
THEFJ
18
'€
"f*-
'^1
1 %n?=vi
.:".•?' "'J :
E OF VIET NAM
BY JACK CRESSE
yt:i/A
i%
u
I1>».vt
19
VIET NAM HAS BECOME A PART OF OUR LIVES THAT CAXXOT BE IGNORED. IT HAS RETURNED AMERICANS TO THE REALIZING ANGUISH OF MILITARY COM- BAT. A MONSTROUS HELL THAT HAS PLAGUED OUR NATION TIME AND TIME AGAIN. BECALSE THIS CONFLICT IS SO ENCOMPASSING IN SCOPE TO THOSE IN THE FIELD AND THOSE AT HOME. WE. THE STAFF OF SILVER SANDS. PRESENT THIS ARTICLE IN THE INTEREST OF THE COLLEGE. THE STUDENTS. AND ALL WHO READ IT.
WHAT APPEARS ON THE FOLLOWING PAGES IS THE VERY REAL. VERY FRIGHTENING. AND VERY UNFORGETTA- BLE STORY OF TWO MEN WHO LIVED THIS WAR. THE PHOTOGRAPHS YOU WILL SEE WKHE ALL TAKEN IN VIET NAM AND ARP: REPRODUCED HERE THROUGH THE COURTESY OF WILLIAM BECKETT AND GREGG TURNBULL.
WHATEVER YOU MAY CALL IT. THIS IS WAR. LET i:S HOPE THAT IT WILL SOON SUBSIDE INTO LASTING PEACE.
JEL
A PROTEST marcher burns his draft card, a draft-dodger fights his way through Botany, a president rests in Texas with the burden of world peace on his shoulders, a parent prays, and a Special Forces officer peers through the dark, waiting.
All have been affected by Communism. In some ways their actions result from the war in Viet Nam. It is easy to see why.
The protest marcher would have us ignore the Communist threat and forget the war. A draft-dodger is afraid of the war. President Johnson fully realizes the Communist threat and leads the major persistent opposition to it. A parent prays that the war will not take his son's life. The prayers are for a man stationed in a small hamlet located somewhere in a country that has suffered under Communism for the last 20 years.
In their own way each of these individuals is scared. Each represents a small segment of the free world's protector — the United States.
There is a story of a small boy who refused to wear shoes because the "clodhoppers" cramped his feet. A look at a severe case of trench foot cured the boy's phobia and he was never seen again without heavy boots. In a way it tells the whole story of the American outlook toward the conflict in southeast Asia.
The exact nature of the war is misunderstood by the vast majority of the "Great Society." Because of
this widespread ignorance there is a slight but loud opposition to U.S. policy. The basis for these protests also has a less subtle but more encompassing effect — apathy. More than a protest nation, the United States has become an apathetic one. If the nature of the United States' policy was known to all, many say protest marches would be confined to civil rights and apathy would be replaced by understanding. Like the story of the small boy, the knowledge of the war in Viet Nam can place the shoes of under- standing on the barefeet of misconception.
The best insight into the war can be found in someone who has been there.
William Beckett and Gregg Turnbull are now students at the college. Both were soldiers in Viet Nam. They volunteered and served the standard term of 11 months and 15 days. Bill was stationed in Hue, a small village 60 miles from the 17th parallel, the dividing line between north and south. Gregg worked in personnel at Saigon, tlie capital of South Viet Nam.
Both had comments on a number of subjects re- lating directly to the war effort and the reaction of the people there. They talked about the war, its effects directly and indirectly on the U.S., and any other questions that popped up in the discussion. But, more important than the mere answers is the fact that what they have to say is based on fact. They were there.
The conflict's beginning was typical as was the ensuing Communist infiltration of the country. The Indochinese war (1945-54) between France and Viet Nam (then Indochina) over colonial claims, left the nation divided along the 17th parallel; Communists in the north and non-Communists in the south. Viet Nam became the ripe apple for the worm of Com- munism. It burrowed deep into every village and hamlet, spreading propaganda and supporting rebel- lious segments of the population.
Ngo Dinh Diem became ruler of South Viet Nam and declared it an independent republic, centered around a strong central government. The north which had been Communist since the early days of the Indochinese War, became the focal point for a Communist-inspired movement to control the entire country. The effects of this movement were notice- able but as yet had not met any dynamic propor- tions. However, the withdrawal of the final French troops in 1956 opened the door still further to the Communists.
An unsuccessful attempt at Diem's life was fol- lowed two years later by a just as ill-fated try at a military coup. Diem soon realized that the Cold War was getting hotter and called to the U.S. for help.
20
Uncle Sam obliged, taking the heat off with a cool 15 million dollar loan, which Diem used to supplant his meager troops with well-trained and better- equipped personnel.
Ironically, President Eisenhower, now a politician, forgot his military background and was reluctant to pour persormel into Viet Nam. Although Ike did send some "advisors," the real move to supply manpower came with a non-military president, John F. Kennedy, in 1961, after several more attempts had been made on Diem's life.
Attempts on the lives of the average Viet Nam citizen were becoming more successful by the day. As the deaths began to increase, so did U.S. aid, now in the form of both men and money. Diem still wasn't resting easier, and time would tell a very good reason for his sleepless nights.
On November 1, 1963 Diem's regime was over- thrown by a military coup led by General Duong Van Minh. Diem was killed, during Madam Nhu's hair-raising tour through the U.S. A touchy situation developed since it was not known if the new govern- ment would be pro or anti U.S.
BiU relates the story in Hue which is representa- tive of the general feeling everywhere. He said, "Neither the South Vietnamese nor the U.S. knew what was going to happen. At any moment the U.S. and the Minh troops' ties could have been broken, and we would have been at each other's throats.
"We were on 'Red' alert (Prepare for immediate action) in Hue. They (Nimh's army) had their heavy cannons lowered right at us from their position across a barbed wire fence. We played the waiting game and wondered what would happen next."
Eventually, a pro U.S. military junta was estab- lished, probably because Nimh saw the value of U.S. aid. Chances are he would have received it any way.
The Viet Cong had taken a staggering toll of lives and property in the Mekong Delta. However the real U.S. resistance was ignited by the Tonkin Incident in 1964. Tlie U.S. soldiers stopped being advisors because of the harassment of Navy shipping in the Gulf of Tonkin. Americans retaliated by bomb- ing North Viet Nam strongholds. It must be men- tioned that the fuse was touched off by many other incidents as well.
The heat was on even in Saigon where Viet Cong terrorists are still a menace to the poulace and soldiers alike.
Today, terrorists are everywhere and they are continually bombing stores, bars and homes. The main targets are the always busy bus stops. They leave bombs in the form of a harmless package that will explode on contact. A bicycle may be a time
bomb; even cars are used effectively. A lone shoe- shine box may be armed to the teeth with TNT. Soldiers and towns people are warned to touch nothing— especially if it looks harmless. They are told to trust no one, because bombing isn't the only thing employed by the all too tricky Viet Cong infiltrators.
The city is full of street vendors who would like nothing more than to take American money in trade for poisoned fruit or a bomb cleverly disguised as a balloon or a trinket.
Most of the traveling in Viet Nam is done in "Circlos," three-wheeled bicycle-line carts but some interesting times are had with many taxi drivers in Saigon.
"First you must tell the driver where you want to go and then barter for the fare. They have no meters. If that isn't enough, you must then give the driver constant directions," Gregg explains. "It's easy to get lost and when you do, watch out!"
Why? Gregg tells of an incident.
"A buddy and I were out late one night and got into one of these taxis. We just wanted to get back to base but pretty soon we realized that the driver had taken a wrong turn and we didn't know wliere we were. Paul, who was in the front seat, told the driver to stop, but the car kept right on going. Paul had to stop the driver by showing him the working end of a switch blade — neck high."
"I was scared of those monkeys ever since," Gregg remembers, "I didnt know if the guy was setting us up for an ambush or just didn't under- stand us."
But you don't take chances in a war like this.
Young girls are favorite spies used by the Viet Cong. Several of these women have been arrested for extracting information from GI's. Bill tells of one such lady who was thought to be tlie nicest thing that ever came along. The Vietnamese arrested her and her brother and both were shot for treason.
Now all Vietnamese must carry an ID card, and if an American soldier is caught with someone with- out a card, he has "hell to pay."
The Vietnamese police, affectionately called "white mice" by the Americans, because of their uni- forms, do some to control the terrorists but citizens feel they could do more.
Most of the time you get a "Yinloi" which trans- lated means "Sorry about that." "You hear it from the day you get there to the day you leave," Gregg said.
It's that kind of war.
By the end of 1965 the U.S. had extended its total output in Viet Nam to 200,000 men and is still
21
Sunset over Vhu Bai bathes sky and mountains with a reddened glow.
pouring them in. By the end of this month, the total may reach 250,000.
With the rising tide of U.S. intervention, the Vietnamese war has become the center of contro- versy, so intense that it completely dominates the everyday conservation of Americans. The conflict is subject to the hottest anti-U.S. policy demonstra- tions in the country's 190-year history. Even though these demonstrations are the work of minority groups, their actions ring loudly in other countries and es- pecially in the ears of the American soldier in Viet Nam.
"More than anything else, these demonstrations affect the morale of our fighting men," Bill explains. "It isn't easy to come back after weeks of the most miserable fighting you can imagine, and pick up a newspaper full of headlines about some draft card burning. If they understood what was going on, these kids would think twice before doing anything like that," he continued. "It's like a small child first learn- ing to express himself; it's the only way he knows how."
Bill believes in the right to demonstrate as a fundamental gift of our constitution, and further quotes Hubert Humphrey as saying, "The right to demonstrate does not necessarily mean the right to be taken seriously."
Many feel that the fighting in Viet Nam actually
defends the right to demonstrate. But, "You don't think about things like that when your getting shot at," Bill says.
Gregg is less subtle in his remarks concerning the demonstrators. He says they should be given two choices. One would be revoking their citizenship, giving them free passage to any Communist nation of their choice, or they should be inducted into mil- itary service.
Even though the first idea is infeasible, it is the general conscensus among military personnel that the second might not be a bad idea.
Both point out other harmful effects of these demonstrations.
It makes great propaganda. Something to the effect that, "See how much the American's care about the war . . .," or "If the American people are so much against war, why do the imperialists leaders insist on killing innocent people."
The propaganda is very effective on the unedu- cated villagers, who are under continuous pressure from the VC. A favorite trick is to parade a war prisoner through a village. The conversation might go like this. Remember the \'illagers have already been indoctrinated with anti U.S. propaganda. The trained VC says, "See this man, the one who just last week pillaged your village, poisoned your rice paddies, killed your children, raped your women, and
22
JffK
■ '**»^^t#y»»a»«»t<-*'"^"'"J »v^'*Vg».»*^^tggEt<
Buddhist sell cremations have become a sickening part of the Viet Nam war. The monk pictured above meditated for 48 hours, wrote his will, and then . . .
destroyed your homes. He is a Pig." Another VC moves swiftly and with one stab of his machete, kills the "dirty dog." Effective? You bet.
If it is not difficult to understand why the VC propaganda is so effective, consider the examples that Bill gave.
Ever since the French left in 1954, the Viet- namese have hated any Caucasians. The French left Viet Nam a ravaged collection of broken down villages and so embittered the natives that they carry their hatred over to the Americans.
If you were approached by an Asian who offered you a better life under Communism you would think he was a nut. So is it too with the Asians, when an American approaches him and offers a better life under democracy. It works in the opposite way also. An Asian will believe an Asian, and an American will believe an American.
It's that kind of war.
It is easy to see what a difficult task the Ameri- cans face in winning friends. Practically everything is going against him, the terrain, the weather, time, the enemy and the nature of his supposed allies.
Time is on the enemy's side. The VC have every- thing to gain and his nature tells him they have all the time in the world. The Asians believe basically, "Just let things ride and everything will take care of themselves." They can afford to wait until the
U.S. -Vietnamese make a move, then make their move. Their chief weapon is surprise, first hitting the enemy here and then there. It is difficult to fight an enemy as unpredictable as the Viet Cong.
The weather in South Viet Nam is among the most sporadic in the world. The North has two sea- sons, the hot-dry and the cold-wet. In the south; three seasons, the hot, the dry-hot, and the cold, are found.
When the monsoons start, it is unbearable and the combination of low temperature and constant rain makes life unbearable for anyone.
"Once I didn't see the sun for seven weeks, " Rill relates.
It's almost as bad in the hot-dry season; all you see is the sun and the days are hot as hell — literally.
What is the enemy like?
Malcom W. Browne, who won a Pulitzer Prize for his reporting in Viet Nam, offers the best insight into the enemy. The most outstanding mark of the North Viet Cong is his use of propaganda, which has already been mentioned, but the fighting soldier sees an entirely different enemy.
Although the picture has changed in recent months, the Viet Cong still display the outstanding quahties that, up until late last year, accounted foi their being "ahead in the war. " They are tough, and as Bill says, "They're no amateurs."
23
. . . alter being soaked with gasoline, he cremated himself. His charred heart, now enshrined, is worshipped by Buddhist followers.
They are tremendous jungle fighters, being accus- tomed to the terrain, and they can subsist for weeks on a diet of rice and "nuec mam," a sauce made from decayed fish. "They let the fish dry in the sun for days until it turns a sickly black color. It is eaten with rice and really isn't too bad if you can stand the smell," Gregg explains.
A favorite tactic of the Viet Cong is to recruit young, indoctrinated men from the villages. This is how it works:
After visiting a previously unharmed village, the VC, who have been trained by Agitprop (the com- munist propaganda organization), play on the ignor- ance of the villagers, and soon win them over. The young men are trained in guerrilla tactics, and after the VC see fit, they are allowed to actually partici- pate in a raid on a "barbarian" camp. They strike usually after dark or before dawn, catching the soldiers by surprise. There was a time when these raids were very damaging, but they are now few and far between, and less effective.
Not only is the enemy well-trained, he is excel- lently equipped and now has anti-air missiles, sup- posedly supplied from a communist neighbor. The jungle is the battlefield and the VC will stoop to anything to win, including ambushes, booby traps, and bizarre maneuvers. They seem to be everywhere, which accounts for the war being spread over such a
wide area, with no specific battle lines — only scat- tered perimeters. Early last summer, the VC con- trolled most of the country and, spread throughout their holdings, were small areas under southern rule. Holdings are continually changing. One day a hamlet may be northern controlled and the next day under southern occupation.
It's that kind of war and the accounts of activities are unlimited.
Gregg tells of the death of a friend. His name shall be Carl. "Carl was a medic in the fourth corps, stationed in Can Tho, just southwest of Saigon. An emergency call came in for troops to repulse an attack on a hamlet not too far away. Carl volunteered to go since the injured would run high. About half way there, the group was ambushed, and as he dived for cover, Carl received a machine gun blast across his chest. He didn't know what hit him, and he wasn't the only one to die that day."
The silent tactics used by the VC in the field are brutal and account for many lives. Most of them by ingenious traps.
The paths running through the jungle are barely wide enough for a single file line, and are the scene of the most barbaric of these traps. A huge ball of any material, holding numerous blades protruding at all angles, is fastened by a rope to a tall tree bordering a path. It is lifted to another tree several
24
yards from where it is tied. A second rope holds the ball in the tree — waiting for a line of men to come along. The rope is cut and the ball swoops downward in a pendulum-like arch. By the time it reaches the startled men, it is just inches above the ground and is traveling fast enough to knock over a box car. What it does to the six or seven men is best left unsaid.
Land mines that jump above the ground several feet before exploding are used. Holes are dug and poisoned nails, bamboo spikes, or glass are imbedded in the traps, which are covered with branches and grass. Steel bear traps are planted where a GI is most likely to step. Poisoned darts are used, and just recently some of nature's own creations are being turned into instruments of death. Banana snakes are tied with strings to the inside roof of some vacated hut — head or shoulder high. The poison from these snakes can kill within two minutes.
The terrorism and the killing will continue, ex- perts tell us, for a long time.
Many ask why we are there? And why did we go in the first place? The questions are legitimate and so are the answers.
If the U.S. pulled out, Viet Nam would be under communist rule within a month. The communist takeover would be tolerated by the average \'ietna- mese citizen, but the far reaching effects of com- munist rule cannot be overlooked.
For one, a pro-communist takeover would com- plete the communist circle around Thailand, one of the wealthiest countries in southeast Asia.
The communists must be prevented from secur- ing its anchor in the Straits of Malacca. The straits are the life blood of trade with the Southwest Pacific. Ships, now passing through the straits at a rate of over 200 a day, bound to and from ports in Japan, India, Indonesia, Australia, and the Philippines, carry about 98% of the Oriental trade. The riches of Burma, Laos, and Cambodia, already nearing com- munist control, would be threatened. Viet Nam is the hinge with which the open door of trade with these nations rests on.
Japan, now one of the most industrial nations of the world, would collapse within a month if the Straits were closed. To survive would mean an al- liance with Red China. For the safety of the- Free World and because of prior attachments with these nations, the United States is honor-bound to protect the world from the communist threat.
The protection principle is a fine reason for Americans being there, but some still ask why a nation as powerful as ours, has failed to end the war already.
If we followed the same procedure used in the Philippines following the Spanish-American War, we would first suppress the rebellious segments by establishing a military government. Gradually con- trol would be given back to the natives, but as more and more of this control is relinquished, more and more communist segments would pop up and the war would start all over again.
The danger of such an all-out offensive is in possible Red Chinese intervention. If the Reds entered the conflict, the result would be all-out war between the U.S. and Red China.
The allied armies total 2.7 million men, 500 ships and 4,000 jet aircraft. These figures would seemingly outnumber the Red Chinese forces of 2.5 million men, 50 ships and 2,000 jets, but when one considers the population figures, which supply men as they are needed, it makes you wonder. The allied popu- lation numbers 325 million. In China alone there are 700 million people. Still some feel that the Ameri- cans could win. The Russian worry is shrugged off with the belief that the Soviets would actually be on our side.
Nonetheless a victory in a war with Red China would make peace in the Pacific a reality, not an unstable promise.
Another challenge comes from the United States itself. The war now is not a popular one. The U.S. can supply the needed men and weapons, but as yet it lacks the ultimate support of the American people. The end will depend upon the willingness of the Americans to cooperate with the Asians.
If we wait, there is the chance that Red China might develop an ICBM and declare open war on the U.S. which could lead to annihilation of both sides. If they were stopped before this could happen, all the better for the U.S. and world peace. But you don't just go around declaring war on countries just be- cause there is the chance they might eventually start something. The U.S. has learned this. It's too bad other nations have not.
We can play a preventive war and hold our ground, but chances are this would lead to another Korea or Berlin. The only alternative left is to force the North Vietnamese to the bargaining table.
They offered to sit down and talk things over once before, but the U.S. refused because it was felt we had not militarily established ourselves enough to make any firm demands.
The question of how and when the Viet Cong will see the futility of war is unanswerable. Much de- pends on mankind, not his ingenious ability to make war, but his inherent desire to make peace.
25
SIX out of ten students who enter college today drop out before graduation, and this includes your classmates at JCBC. George McCall, coordi- nator of placement, says the drop- out rate here has been as high as 66%.
A Life magazine survey pre- dicted accurately that of 1.1 mil- lion students who entered college in 1963, over 600,000 would drop out before they finished.
Students drop out of college at about the same rate and for the same reasons as they did 40 years ago. But in 1925 society was in- clined to accept dropping out as a frequent necessity. Today the act is regarded as a social catastrophe. This stigma has resulted from the increasing pressure by parents and business and social groups who place such a heavy emphasis on the possession of a college degree.
Students drop out of college for a variety of reasons. In a joint interview with Dr. Jack Taylor, Dean of Students, and Dr. Walter Jarecke, Director of Guidance, and Director of Institutional Research, it was pointed out that the most predominant reason that students drop out is because they are not achieving the level that they ex- pected to. Sometimes this is due to a lack of preparation. Dr. Ja- recke said they're not sure of what they want, and in some cases this means there is a lack of moti- vation.
Mr. McCall stated that students mainly drop out due to a lack of interest. He feels that interest is needed for motivation, and the motivated person is interested. Students with a goal in mind are not plagued by the doubts that infect the student who doesn't know where he is going.
Lack of motivation itself can be so disturbing that a student will withdraw from college in an at- tempt to find what he wants. The student becomes entangled in a
net of rationalization and doubt when attempting to satisfy himself that leaving is the right thing to do. Often a student will alienate himself from his school, its instruc- tors and policies by reasoning with half truths. For example, he might say, "Exams and courses seem arbitrary, and obviously are compromises. Teachers themselves apologize for the fact diat they must omit material because of time limitations. Often they never agree among themselves on what should be included. One teacher's reading list for one English course differs widely from another's list for the same course."
This complex web of reasoning, the doubts, and the anguish a stu- dent suffers are common exper- iences to thousands of college students each year.
Sometimes a student has a le- gitimate reason to criticize a col- lege. In a "School & Society" mag- azine editorial, William W. Brick- man explains that situations exist in some colleges which permit dropouts. Instead of dropouts, they might be termed "Run-outs." Be- cause of poor teaching, students are swamped and lost. This can kill their interest and motivation. Mr. Brickman suggests, "It is an obligation upon higher education to organize its house in such a way as to make each student want to succeed in his studies."
Emotional problems can cause a student to drop out. An unsuccess- ful romance can disturb a student to the point that he loses his motivation and his interest. Then, because he doesn't study, his grades drop below the passing level and he has to leave the col- lege. His record says that he was an academic failure. In reality he was simply a heartbroken student.
Other reasons for the high num- ber of dropouts include illness, jobs or the armed forces. Some- times the financial responsibility that is forced upon certain stu-
dents is too great and they must withdraw. A student should not leave until he has exhausted all possibilities that might allow him to stay in college. For example, a student with too much financial responsibility should apply for scholarships or college loans. Many students who leave for these rea- sons definitely plan to return later; one JCBC student felt it neces- sary to drop out and get a job in order to help his widowed mother. However, he plans to return to school as soon as possible.
Some students are not psycho- logically ready for college. For these few students psychiatric help is needed. However, when a psychiatrist is needed, he might not be used because a student feels that it would place a blot on his record. Dr. Jarecke mirrored modern thinking when he said that he doesn't think it hurts their rec- ord any more than when they go to the doctor for a cold.
A coUege dropout is not neces- sarily a failure. Bobby Darin, Sandy Koufax, and Woody Allen are all college dropouts. They are successful, but they had an im- portant aid when they dropped out — talent.
Dr. Taylor explained that roughly 35 to 40 per cent of our population will be absorbed in professional jobs which demand a college education. The rest of the jobs in our society must be filled by workers who couldn't get a higher education. Mary Sheahan, the personnel manager for Sun- beam Electronics in Fort Lauder- dale, says that many positions in accounting, management, etc. are open for young men. She said that a college degree is not required, but that it would help a young man entering the business.
Someone must be the grocery store manager or the sales clerk in a department store. However, if a student has the ability to get a college education and doesn't, he
26
is cheating himself. He is hmiting his abiHties and the things he can do.
Mr. McCall said that statistics show the largest number of drop- outs will always come at the end
THE COLLEGE
of the second semester. April is rapidly approaching . . . This type of educational fall-out is nearly as tragic as the radio-active type, be- cause the student who does drop out will have to live with the con- sequences the rest of his life.
DROPOUT
by Paul King
27
^EUI
BY ANN BARDSLEY
-■#5'-"... :■;;}[ it! tw
YOUV'E got the travel bug. Admit it. You duck into travel agencies and browse through their shiny folders from faraway places. You hoard picture post cards, foreign stamps, and old copies of NATIONAL GEO- GRAPHIC. You drool through your World Geography course, and shiver when you see a jet liner take off, or a steamer going out to sea.
Stop drooling, and throw those NATIONAL GEOGRAPHICS away. That trip to Europe that you've always wanted is not as impossible as you think. Thousands of American students cross the At- lantic every summer. Some are financed by rich parents or are Ivy League socialites spending their junior year abroad, but many are ordinary young college men and women to whom the trip repre- sents many months of saving and careful planning. They have done it, and you can do it too.
If you have at least a thousand dollars to invest in your trip to Europe, your best bet is one of the many agencies which organize and lead groups of students abroad during the summer months. These tours handle all your transporta- tion and hotel arrangements, your
meals, and your schedule. They range from the very luxurious, where you travel first class, and visit the best hotels and restau- rants in Europe, to less expensive tours by bus, station wagon, or bicycle.
Slightly lower down the price scale (not very far) is the Experi- ment in International Living. This program, which costs about $900, will arrange for you to live with a family in another country. You will go to your host country with a group of nine other students and an instructor. Besides living with the family, you and your group will travel in the host country and in nearby countries. In special circumstances you may be able to join the E.xperiment tour for a lower price. Mr. Harry Schaleman is the Experiment agent on this campus.
If you're looking for something in a more realistic price line, don't give up. The opportunities are numerous.
One of the best tour programs is offered by the United States National Student Association. The USNSA organizes student tours, study programs, and special in- terest trips in many parts of the world. The study programs focus
on politics and economics, lan- guages, and art, and the special interest groups include bicycling and hosteling, work camps, and music and art festivals. The pro- grams usually last about two months and are open to American college and university students, and to students entering college in the fall. The cost for the USNSA programs, including transportation, begins at $750, but may go as high as $1,600.
For Catholic students, the Na- tional Federation of Catholic Col- lege Students, and the National Newman Club Foundation offer five "Meet Europe" summer tours. The trips last from 22 to 49 days, and cost from $340 to $759. The considerable cost of transatlantic transportation, however, it not in- cluded in the tour price.
If you are the venturesome type ^vho wants to plan your own trip, know what you are doing. It will be much cheaper and an exciting experience, but requires careful planning and budgeting.
The largest single expense of the trip is your round-trip trans- portation. It will probably cost more than all the other tour ex- penses put together.
28
PE ON A SI
Ordinarily, plane and ship pas- sage to Europe costs about $400 round trip. There are, however, several less expensive methods of transatlantic transportation for the independent traveler.
If you can join a bona-fide group of t\venty-five or more like- minded travelers (or form your own group and give it a name) your New York to London fare will be only $325 per person. If traveling alone, you may be able, as many students do, to take ad- vantage of the low transatlantic prices offered by Icelandic Air- ways. Some Icelandic fares are as low as $270 to $350 round trip. However, their prop-flights take ISVz hours, and Icelandic is not a member of the International Air Transport Association.
If you are planning to travel by ship, tlie Council on Student Travel, a federation of more than 140 educational institutions, re- ligious agencies, and national or- ganizations provides special stu- dent transportation to Europe each summer. The Council arranges special chartered all-student sail- ings for the 9 day voyage. Social and intellectual life are plentiful aboard the one class ships. An orientation program helps the trav- elers to prepare for their visit to a foreign country, and there are forums and discussions on inter- national issues, lectures on art and architecture, language practice, films, a ship's newspaper, religious services, dances, and impromptu hootenannies and concerts put on by the students.
Prices are $160 to $180 one way, from New York.
The cheapest way to cross the Atlantic is by charter flight. All
universities are eligible to sponsor a charter, but the group should be large enough to fill an airplane. Fares from New York to London are bet\veen $225 and $300 round trip. To form a charter group, check with an airline representa- tive for complete details and fares.'
When you arrive in Europe, you will find living expenses compara- tively cheap. In fact, it is possible for a thrift minded, light traveling student to live on almost nothing — if he plans carefully.
Inexpensive travel inside Eu- rope may be done by bus, train, motorcycle, or bicycle. Many trains and bus companies offer special "thrift coupons" and "guest tickets." These low cost tickets allow the bearer special privileges such as 1.000 miles or seven days of un- limited travel. Motorcycles are fast and use little gas, but they must be rented or purchased in Europe, and gasoline is very expensive there. Bicycles, though slow and rather tiring, are a cheap way to really get to know the country you are visiting. For long distances cyclists can take the train, and bring their bicycles with them for a very small extra charge (about 75 cents in Britain for a 60 mile trip). Ferries and airplanes connect Ireland with Britain and Britain with France. Though slow and sometimes crowded, the channel ferries are an inexpensive con- nection betsveen the British Isles and the continent.
The cheapest housing for the student traveler are the youth hos- tels which dot Europe. At a hostel the student hiker or cyclist can find pleasant if not luxurious dormitory accommodations. Many of the hostels serve simple, inex-
pensive meals and most provide cooking facilities for those who wish to do their own cooking. In the British Isles a night's lodging in a hostel costs 2s 6d (about 50 cents). On the continent prices may be slightly lower. Guests at the hostels, which have facilities for both men and women, are ex- pected to help with the chores. More expensive accommodations include college dormitories, which are open to traveling students in the summer, YM and YWCA's, and private homes. These last cost from S1.50 to 82.50 a night.
Food in ta\'ems, pubs, small res- taurants, and cafeterias is filling and fairly cheap, and you can eat your fill for about SI. In many countries beer and wine are drunk instead of \\'ater. (Be sure to visit these!)
If you have the necessary shots, passports, and \'isas, sufficient funds, and a realistic, carefully planned budget, plus a little pio- neering spirit, a shoestring \'isit to Europe can be a wonderful ad- xentirre. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
Council on Student Tra\'el
777 United Nations Plaza
New York 17, N.Y.
Icelandic Air Lines
610 B 5th Avenue, N.Y., N.Y.
The British Travel Association
680 5th Avenue, N.Y., N.Y.
American Youth Hostels, Inc.
14 W. Sth St., N.Y., N.Y.
U.S. National Student Assn.
265 Madison Ave., N.Y., N.Y.
National Federation of Catholic
College Students
1312 Massachusetts Ave.
Washington, D.C. All fares in this article are approxi- mate and subject to revision.
29
WHAT AM I?
By Leonard Bauer
' Illustrated by Joanita Taormina
Who are you, sitting here Hstening to me? I am unliken to no one, yet who can I be? Who are the learned and who are the good? I am a person Hke you, sometimes hard to be
understood. Who are the wicked and who are the wise? I am a mere man who one day lives and one day
dies. What is life, involving us in time? I am being in his likeness in body, soul, mind. But will I ever really know what I am? And will I ever really truly understand Myself?
f ~''^
%
.ft
x-^
•-.Nv
~V .
K "A
"V
:rsa^?»-
.'.^
i
i'^~
Be Kind and Tolerant, O Youth
By Cassandra Kenfield Illustrated by Sharon Frost
Be kind and tolerant of us, O Youth Know in your hearts tomorrow What we were knowing yesterday.
t' JTn your all-iinknowing superiority pYou ran rough-shod over the -■%Ove we ottered. iii¥,ou disowned us when we were '* troublesome
Th^n reclaimed us for our riches.
How often did we advise and strengthen you |s^,^ ^nd a hundred times did you
With cool disdam
Refuse us even comfort
Vfhen v?e needed it.
you uth,
very bemg is golden light too
with your dying eyes back the tears
at heart and in need of love •rself
d and lonely pderness of Age.
^S^'- iSi^f^'^W^"
*«SiJS5ip5S5i?r;NV
31
Says,
EVJL
'BtARTJ
BAN
THE
STyOENT
fJE60m7E
Mil
IP
32
SiV^^ Saa/ds
JtctMOffenc/eJ B/ ^^ ^
itributing yearbooks is a boring J, one that requires a good deal time and patience. But for the istically talented, the job be- rries less of a problem when you able to put your efforts to odiing instead of watching the )ck.
ver Sands Art Editor Lew Alquist just that during those long, lely hours of Silver Sands II dis- bution. The very best of his 30rs appears here for your en- ('ment.
Cartoons by Lew Alquist
33
There has been an increasing trend of thought during recent years that without a college edu- cation, a person might as well give up any idea of attaining success, fame, or fortune. The hue and cry of college education for all has re- sounded throughout our modern world and has been repeated so loudly and positively that to issue challenge against such a decree is considered unbelievable, sacrilig- eous, and immoral. Everyone
should have a college education; a burden of guilt and an aura of shame exudes from the individual who reluctantly admits to his lack of membership in the alumni club of the "I Graduated from College " organization.
We realize, of course, there are many dedicated people occupied with medical, law, and teaching professions. Well planned and exe- cuted college educations have en- abled these doctors, lawyers.
niu-ses and others to realize their ambitions for themselves and their fellow men. I would not want to risk dropping off into an anesthe- tized coma, fully aware that a high school dropout was waiting with scalpel in hand to relieve me of my overly ripe appendi.\.
There are many people crowd- ing our colleges at this time who would gain from four solid years of acquiring seniority in a labor union or serving an extended ap-
34
^
mi COLLEGE !
By Betty F. Niesen
Illustrated By
Nancy BoUen
prenticeship in a shoe store or a women's lingerie department. These are the individuals who, for reasons, are being pushed into col- leges in the futile hopes of being molded into counterparts of wealthy, successful, well poised men and women of the world. After four years of following a prescribed course of sliding through the easiest subjects with a low "C" average, these sheepskin shielded cogs venture into the out-
side world. A young man so equip- ped can look any prospecti\e em- ployer perpendicularly in his pro- verbial eye in the most candid manner and say, "Yes, sir, I am a well educated personage of Promi- nent College. I know I can be an asset to your firm, sir, because I Belong. I Know People Who Count! They flunked the same courses I did, but we did have a jolly four years together getting ready for our futures and all that."
And he will get the job for one of two reasons: (1) tlie employer is in awe of anyone flourishing a col- lege diploma, or (2) his employer is also an alumnus of Prominent College.
Sometimes parents are too blame for needlessly pushing their chil- dren into colleges. Many parents feel they have realized their own ambitions and goals when their children enroll in college. Through- out this marvelous country of free-
35
dom and opportunity, there are numerous young people entering colleges and universities every year without a clear understand- ing of why they are taking biology or calculus except that mama and papa have always told them that someday they would go to college. No matter if Joe ne\'er learned to read while he was in school fop twelve years. The reality that he graduated from high school com- municates the fact to his parents that Joe is ready for college. Going along on the false assumption that Joe has graduated from high school because he has been taught and that he has responded to this educational process by learning, his parents are proud to see him begin to carry out the plans they have arranged for him. They are prepared all the way for his glor- ious entrance into college, for his straight "A" report cards, and for his triumphal graduation at the end of foiu- years of diligent study. After this process of cultivation, Joe will emerge from college mi- raculously equipped to conquer the business and professional world with his brilliance and in- telligence.
Parents not only are ramming their youngsters into colleges be- cause they think their children want an education, but also they want them to find good marital prospects. A doting mother who has had to rummage around the house for money to pay the insur- ance man or who has had to tell the paper boy to come back some other time when he comes to col- lect his weekly pittance is de- termined that her daughter is not going to suffer these same hard- ships. This mother has never had the honest forthrightness of char- acter to be able to say to her daughter, "Go to college and get yourself a rich husband." No, she confuses the issue with irrelevant and garbled statements about so- cial status and a j)lace in life and
inane remarks about future gen- erations of unborn children having social status and places in life. Never does she degrade her in- tentions by referring to the ob- scene expression — money. She does not face reality by considering that she is using her daughter's self respect, individuality, and vir- ginity as a ransom to an unknown, stranger who conceivably might be loaded with loot. Little does the doting mother realize that her little Sue could just as easily meet and marry Joe Poor as well as Ronnie Rich.
While some students are wan- dering around in a fearful fog of ignorance and reviving only long enough to \\onder \\'hy they are in college, others are burro\\'ing in for a four years' hibernation period from the demands of a hard and practical world. This four year period of required surface study, scheduled time, and unrestricted recreation passes pleasantly and effortlessly. Intense thinking is kept to such a minimal amount as to be practically nonexistent; it is not necessary to expend an excess amount of energy in concentration of subject matter. Instead, college is a four year period of grace of- fered in which the avoidance of making major decisions is relig- iously practiced. Some of the minor decisions which demand very little thought is whether to \\rite home for more money or to call collect. Another conclusion of logical thought process might require de- cisi\'e action when the hibernating student is faced with the problem of signing up for Stargazing Course I or Elementary Bowling. 15ut a minimal amount of serious thinking is expended regarding fu-> tiue employment, serious stud\', or wondering if his own life is meant for anything besides sleeping and eating and potential conquests of the opposite sex. When this type of person has finished his educa- tional hibernation from the world.
he is groggy from the self indul- gent catering to his own whims J and is suffering from mange and * malnutrition caused from being academically undernourished.
While there are many undeserv- ing students cluttering our colleges and universities, soaking up the time and energies of capable teachers, there are some deserving students who are being neglected and short changed as far as supe- rior academic schooling is con- cerned. These are individuals who are honestly concerned about their future lives and for the well being of the world in \\'hich they are active members. These students take an eager interest in life and have a dawning awareness that there is more meaning to life than mere existence. A class is an in- strument which opens a door a little wider so he is better able to \isualize what he himself is cap- able of accomplishing. A college degree is to be accepted as an honorary prize, not for the dubious prestige symbol, but in realization that a little has been learned. This student is grateful for die priv- ilege of being taught a little more than he knew before enrolling in college. His world will never be quite as narrow and restricted as it had been. For these students, schooling has been an appetizer to the main course of additional learning, the prelude to the con- cert of a more full life. For these people, who are students in the most definitive sense of the word, true learning never comes to an abrupt end with the issuance of a diploma. Our college teachers will keep working to inspire the small percentage of students who really want to learn in spite of all the others who are enrolled in college for any other reason than to learn. The determined students will acquire knowledge in spite of obstacles even if they have to take a longer route to their educational destination.
36
SPORTS
Intramurals Intercollegiate
by John Wolfe
M
-]\ rp
i\' ^.
J
I
Don't be surprised if the next mural bowling competition and college. Maybe it'll even replace
couple years bring a bowling alley the scramble for the HPR bowl- tricycle racing.
to the JCBC campus. For if the ing classes is any indication, then Intramural competition saw no
enthusiasm generated over intra- bowling is the coming thing at the less than fourteen teams battling
37
it out for the championship tro- phy. The "Out of Sights" won the first-place trophy, thanks to the consistent play of team members Howard Finegold, Frank Catania, Jim Shafer, and David Graham. The "Out of Sights" rolled to a 16 and 4 record, edging out the "Ban- dits," who came in second with a 15 and 5 slate.
In men's competition, the trophy for the highest individual game went to Mic Syurgot, who bowled an excellent 242. Trophies for the high individual three game set and for the best individual average went to David Skipp. David rolled a three game total of 592 and maintained a 187 season average.
Irene Meyerinch matched Skipp's performance in girls' com- petition, walking off with the girls' version of the highest individual three game set and highest aver- age trophies. Irene bowled a three game total of 491 and had a sea- son average of 149. The highest individual game trophy went to Carol Norton for her 190 game. I-M BOWLING STANDINGS
Won Lost
Out of Sights 16 4
Bandits 15 5
S. O. N. S 13 7
Half Fast 13 7
Zits 13 3
Raiders 12 8
Spartans 12 8
Losers 10 10
Broward Barons 10 10
Duds 8 12
Absentees 6 14
Pisco Sours 4 16
Wooly 3 13
Gutter Getters 1 19
* * ^
Next on the intramural scene was tennis. December saw the competition for the men and wo- men's singles championship. A mixed doubles tournament will be held later in the year.
In a close match. Bill Lipske defeated Bruce Kinder 6-3, 3-6, 6-2. Renee Bayuk won the wo- men's championship by virtue of a 6-4, 6-0 win over Martha Allen.
♦ :?: ^
In men's handball competition, Bart Loftis edged out Robert Wil- son for the championship trophy.
'i
A new sport on the intramural calendar, fencing, enjoyed an im- pressive inaugural season.
Since not very many JCBC stu- dents are experienced swordsmen, competition was limited this year to members of the HPR fencing classes. The championship bouts were held in December and were limited to foil competition. In boys' competition, five points con- stituted a bout. Four points con- stituted a bout in girls' compe- tition.
The first men's fencing cham- pion of JCBC was James Stover. He defeated Steve Hall 5 to 4 in the final bout. The girls' champion was Pam Alderman. Pam tri- umphed with a 4 to 2 victory over Michell Saul.
jj; H: ♦
WOMEN'S TENNIS With prospects of being the number one team in the state, the JCBC women's tennis team em- barks on their spring season. Al- though only two girls return from last year's squad, which recorded a five and one slate, the squad will be bolstered by a bevy of talented freshmen.
Jane Hancock, number one player last year, returns along with Cristy Johnson. From Stran- ahan, where she was undefeated in match play, Jane was ranked No. 7 in Girls' 18 and under and won
the Gold Coast tournament as a senior. Chris, from McArthur, lost only one match last year as Brow- ard's No. 2 player.
The freshmen are headed by Stephanie DeFina. Stephanie, from South Broward, is ranked No. 1 in the Women's division for Florida and No. 15 in the nation. She is also ranked No. 5 in the nation in doubles. While at South Broward, she twice won the State high school tennis tournament.
Other freshmen are: Chris Kou- tras, Marilou Cmaylo, and Beth Fuller. Chris hails from Miami Norland and is ranked No. 2 in Girls' 18 and under in the state. Marilou attended Stranahan where she won the Broward county tour- nament. Beth is from McArthur where she was undefeated in match play. She is ranked No. 13 in Girls' 18 and under.
Their main competition will come from Rollins, last year's state champs, Tampa U., and the University of Miami. Easily the best junior college squad in the state, the JCBC women's tennis team has an excellent chance of winning the team championship as well as several individual hon- ors at the State tournament.
SCHEDULE* March 1 — Palm Beach JC (away) March 4, 5, 6 — F.S.U. Invitational
(away) March 10 — U. of Miami (away) March 17 — Miami-Dade JC (home) March 24 — Palm Beach JC (home)
38
April 1 — U. of Miami (home) April 5 — Miami-Dade JC (away) April 15 — State Tournament (away) ^Matches with Indian River and Edi- son to be arranged.
^ ^ ^
MEN'S TENNIS
This spring, men's intercollegiate tennis will come to the JCBC campus. In the past, we have had the women's team, but 1966 will be the first year for the men.
The team will be handled by Coach McGehee. He is a graduate of Tennessee Tech, where he was a member of the tennis team.
The team suffered a severe blow when several of its leading players were declared ineligible. However, there is still a supply of talent on hand. Harry Richardson, a Fort Lauderdale High grad, leads the cast. Other team mem- bers include Dave Claxton (Ft. Lauderdale), Fred Easman (South Broward), George Herrera (St. Thomas), Bob Klein (Ft. Lauder- dale), Larry Spiller (Dillard). and Jim Tucker (Ft. Lauderdale).
This being the first year. Coach
McGehee isn't sure what kind of
competition the Seahorses will be
facing. He described the team as
one with "average" ability, but
added that he thought the team
would win their share.
TENTATIVE SCHEDULE March 4 — Palm Beach JC (home) March 18 — Indian River JC (away) March 22 — Miami-Dade JC (home) March 25 — Edison JC (away) April 8 — Miami-Dade JC (away) April 9 — Edison JC (home) April 22 — Indian River JC (home) ^ ^ ^
GOLF
Another new intercollegiate sport on the JCBC campus is men's golf. The team will be coached by Mr. William Porter- field. Before coming to JCBC, Coach Porterfield was tennis coach at Northeast High.
Although this is the first year, prospects look extremely good. Hal Hutchinson, from Pompano, leads the hopefuls. Hal was All- County and All-Conference in 1965, and finished second in the
Coral Gables Orange Bowl tourna- ment. Mike Hines, a McArthur graduate, is another fine prospect. Mike finished second in the 1963 Broward Junior tournament. Other players are: Bob Stacy (South Broward), Ray Isbell (a transfer from Texas), Jim Lyford (Strana- han), John Schaeffer (St. Thomas), Bob Golden (South Broward), and Jerry Rasmussen (Stranahan).
Miami-Dade, state champs for the past four years, should prove to be the Seahorses' toughest com- petition. Other than Miami-Dade, Coach Porterfield isn't sure of what the competition will be like, but expects a winning team.
Only matches definitely sched- uled at this time are two with Miami-Dade, on Feb. 18th and 25th. Coach Porterfield hopes to add another eight or nine matches. The JCBC golfers will also com- pete in the State tournament, June 2-4, and the National Junior College tournament in Miami, June 6-10. * * * BASEBALL "I think we will, barring in- juries, be a definite contender for conference and state honors." So are Coach Leroy Wheat's words on the prospects for his first sea- son as head baseball coach at JCBC.
Coach Wheat has impressive credentials. He has seen action with the Cleveland Indians and the Philadelphia and Kansas City Athletics, as well as playing sev- eral years in Triple A ball. He was basketball coach at Fort Lau- derdale High for five years and baseball coach for one. That one year he was head baseball coach, the Flying L's enjoyed one of their most successful seasons in a long time.
He is particularly impressed with the Seahorses' depth and de- fensive ability. He added that the hitting is also excellent and that the whole team has displayed lots of desire and hustle.
The Seahorses are loaded with individual talent. At catcher, they have Jim Gurzynski (Cardinal Gibbons), and Gary Bryce. Bill Adelmann, a sophomore from Pompano, holds down first base. Second base is manned by Rich Orr. Rich, from Stranahan, was All-County and All-Conference last year. Fighting it out for short- stop will be Bruce Kinder, an All- County and All-Conference selec- tion from Fort Lauderdale last year, and Paul Buzzella, a sopho- more from McArthur. John Dow, a St. Thomas Aquinas graduate, will handle third base.
The "Horses have their hitting power in the outfield. Allan Mo- rell, county batting champ last year from St. Thomas, joins Bill Fauerbach, the leading Seahorse hitter last year, and Bob Martin, an All-County and All-Conference pick last year from Stranahan. Backing them up will be John Jolinski (Pompano), Jim Cottone (Stranahan), and Duke Dufresne (West Palm Beach).
The pitching staff is led by Stan Cowherd, a sophomore from Pompano, Craig Skok, an All- County and All-Conference selec- tion from Fort Lauderdale, and Ron Huff, a Chaminade graduate. Completing the pitching staff are Don Newhouser (Monsignor Pace), Danny Overstreet (from Jacksonville), Bill Lawson (Sea- crest), and Eddie Garner (Pom- pano).
Coach Wheat rates Manatee and Miami-Dade as their top com- petition, and rightly so. Both teams are among the leading jun- ior college teams in the nation.
The finish of an old year and the be- ginning of a new leaves one with time to think of past happenings and fu- ture hopes. The following thirteen pages give remembrances of those happenings that were once fun-filled moments in our lives — from the first play of the season to a spirited per- formance of Sing Out 66 — moments that can only be recalled in thought. So while you are thinking, flip these pages and the memories will come back all the more vivid — memories of Winter Frolic, 1965-1966.
FROLIC
December 1 - 5
THE HOUSE lights dim- med, a hush came over the audience, forty sec- onds later a skinny, ragged Oki- nawan came out on stage and said, "Lovely ladies, kind gentle- men. Please to introduce myself. Sakini by name. Interpreter by profession."
The scene was set for John Patrick's "Teahouse of the August Moon," the first production pre- sented in the new college little theatre. It was directed by Miss Mildred Mullikin and Mr. George Cavanaugh.
The scene of the comedy was
iMiliMiiiii
set in the South Pacific during World War II. The play is nar- rated by Sakini, portrayed by Steve Thomas, a roguish native in- terpreter. Sakini is an employed civilian of the United States Army and his "boss" is the pompous Colonel Purdy, Terry Whitmire. Sakini likes the colonel but un- fortunately the friendship isn't a mutual one. Purdy gives Sakini to Captain Fisby, Rick Jarvis, a for- mer college professor of the Hu- manities, and a bumbling failure in the army. Purdy then sends Fisby to the small village of To- biki to make it self-supporting
ol tke
CjQ-UCfU^t
fTioon
by Phil Mansueto
and to introduce democracy to the natives.
Fisby is given a plan to guide him in his recovery of Tobiki. The top officials in Washington have thought of everything possible and compiled the recovery in the form of Plan "B." Plan "B" is to be his "Bible," and he should not have any questions whatsoever, because Washington has anticipated every- thing.
With his new "Bible," Sakini, an old woman, her daughter and four children, an old man, and a goat, Fisby starts out for Tobiki in a very crowded jeep. Sakini ex-
42
Cik«.d^^A
plains, "Distance from Headquar- ters to Tobiki, by map, two inches. By horse, three days. By foot, four days. By jeep, ten days."
On arriving at the village, Fishy finds it much easier to accept the native customs than to try to fol- low the colonel's idea of "making the natives learn democracy even if he has to shoot every last one of them."
Fisby's lectures on democracy do not come off too well and in- stead of building a pentagon- shaped school house as prescribed in Plan "B," Fisby builds a Tea- house. Fisby has received a Geisha
Girl as a present and everyone knows that a Geisha Girl must have a Teahouse in which to work. It so happens that Fisby allows the Geisha Girl, Lotus Blossom, played by Sylvia Lopez, to teach the ladies of the village her art.
Several hilarious things happen to make the play wonderful enter- tainment. In the end the village does manage to become self-sup- porting through the sale of native potato brandy, 10 Star Batata.
The satirical side of the play is slanted toward the Army and the
American idea of success, de- mocracy and morality.
The production ran for four consecutive nights and played a Sunday matinee. Anyone who did not see "Teahouse of the August Moon" missed one of the college's finest productions.
"Little story now concluded. History of world unfinished. Love- ly ladies, kind gentlemen. Go home to ponder. What was true at be- ginning remains true. Pain makes man think, Thought makes man wise. Wisdom makes life endur- able, our play has ended, May August Moon bring gentle sleep."
43
44
December 17th
ihe Qhnstfiias
ance
On the night of December 17th, Fort Lau- derdale's Statler Hilton Hotel played host to the Junior College s Christmas Dance "Snow- balls and Seashells," the first formal affair of the year. Some 700 people attended and danced to the musical debut of the Stage Band. It was a glittering end to a ver>- active first semester.
Master of ceremonies Matt Faison, Snowball Queen Sue Hoppins and her escort, Dave FitzGerald, at the moment of coronation.
45
white knee-length jeans by Wrangler; about $5. White wool "Poor Boy" sweater; about $5. Royal blue parka; about $5. Model: Bonnie McFetridge.
'liti'i
lllHi JJJl
^
Venetian Holiday
December ITth, 1965 - January Sih, 1966
X
^i
We wish to thank Mr. and Mrs. Edward D. Canzano oi Mediord, Massachusetts, owners oi the yacht "Miss Acme," and Captain and Mrs. Winthrop Ellis for their kind co- operation in making this feature possible.
f&
Light blue bell-bottoms by Pantino; about $12. Navy blue orlon-acryllc "Poor Boy" sweater; about $5. Sandals by Capezio; about $9. Model: Vicki Schmidt.
hip-hugger swim suit led with red piping and i lace. By Jantzen; about Model: Sharon Roesch.
THE SOC
lOPS
JANUARY 15 - FEBRUARY 11
In order to create spirit during the basketball season, the Student Government Association sponsored informal sock hops after the home games. The bands featured at the dances included the Avantis, the Overtones, and the Cavemen. The turnout was considered good and the whole affair was a large success.
Salute Brazil
BY JEANNE COONEY
MR. HARRY J. SCHALE- MAN, an instructor of geography at the Jun- ior College, has worked with The Experiment in International Liv- ing and is presently Community Chairman for a group of eleven Brazilians. This organization has fifty member nations and hopes that by placing people in private homes in other countries, they will further understanding between in- dividuals in the United States. The Experiment does not advertise and therefore its existence is made known by word of mouth. Those interested must contact the head- quarters in Vermont. Then the or- ganization tries to choose people who are the most well-rounded in personality and interests. Pertain- ing to selection on the basis of socio-economic background, the Experiment has no specifications. To avoid discrimination because of financial factors half-scholarships are offered to those in need of them.
The seven men and four women who make up the group include one married couple. The occupa- tions of the group vary from stu- dent, teacher, physician, newspa- perman, bank official, librarian, to economist. Their ages range from sixteen to thirty-eight. Their visit
JANUARY 9TH FEBRUARY BTH
50
in Broward County lasted for one month. Then they left as a group for a three day visit to Washing- ton, D.C., where they were the guests of the State Department. To complete their group tours they spent three days on a sight- seeing excursion in New York City. The rest of their time was allotted for independent travel. Differing from American women who often work after marriage and mother- hood, the mothers of all of the group members are housewives. The fathers' occupations include a newspaperman, two bankers, a tradesman, a businessman, a pilot, a ferryman, and a public notary. The Brazilians who visited Fort Lauderdale have many interests that are both different and similar to those of South Floridians. They listed classical and popular music, volleyball, swimming, the theatre, movies, visiting museums, and opera. Only one mentioned tele- vision as a favorite pastime.
To find out more about Brazil- ians in general and teenagers in particular two of the students were interviewed. They were Paulo Henrique de Castro, who recently graduated from high school, and Frank Fleming, who will graduate from high school
this summer. They both intend to continue their educations at a University and eventually become engineers. Paulo attended private school and Frank attended public school, but the curriculum was much the same. The subjects, how- ever, differ somewhat from those offered in the United States. They include English, Portuguese, French, Spanish, mathematics, his- tory, physics, chemistry, geogra- phy, and sports, mainly soccer, volleyball, and basketball. Once a week they have a government class in which they are taught capital- ism vs. communism, their own governmental structure, and re- lated subjects. Tlie main differen- tiation, of course, is that of lan- guage. In Brazil the word "col- lege" refers to the eighth and ninth grades. However, these stu- dents were most deeply impressed by how differently Americans spend their time. To illustrate this, some of their activities can be summed up as follows: On weekdays, they attend classes from 7:30 A.M. to 12:00 noon. This is followed by afternoon walks, homework, and perhaps television. Saturdays and Sundays are spent at parties, the beach, movies and nightclubs. The most striking dif-
ference was that in Brazil teen- agers spend a good deal of time in nightclubs. Teenage girls seldom work and the boys usually wait until they are nineteen or older. Both sexes get most of their spend- ing money from their parents. However, they seldom have their own cars.
Though differences prevail, the similarity in people throughout the world is typified by one response regarding musical tastes. When asked whether he preferred classi- cal to popular, one young Brazil- ian replied, "Oh no, not the young people!" Apparently, young people the world over still prefer the Beatles to Beethoven.
r
MACKEY
%^ r^- s:^^^-' ^.^ -*^#^- N I
The finale — "Which Way America"
ON THE MORNING of Wednesday, Febru- ary 9th, the campus of Broward Junior College resounded with the musical spirit of a free America, as some sixty vocalists of the Sing Out 66 troupe gave folk tunes, ballads, and songs of revolution in a magnificently fine performance.
In order to make the event an unforgettable suc- cess, all classes were closed during the show and hundreds flocked to listen as a strong wind carried the strains of "Which Way America" and "The Ride Of Paul Revere" across the campus. Student response was tremendous and many were moved to discover the purposes and force behind this spirited group. After performing to a capacity crowd at Fort
The Colwell Brothers — Paul, Ralph, and Steve
52
Lauderdale's War Memorial Auditorium, leaders of Sing Out returned to the College on Friday morning for a question and answer forum with several interested students. During this session, the collegians realized that Sing Out 66 was the promoting youth force of a very great enterprise — Moral Re-Arma- ment, a movement dedicated to return the world and its people to God. United solely by the faith of its members, Sing Out performances are free to all and supported by private funds, not government financing.
In outlining the purpose of the talented singers, John Ruffin, one of the group's leaders, stated, "We wish to make freedom such a contagious thing that
by John Leatherwood
53
Communism doesn't stand a chance." Another Sing Out leader, Vee Entwistle, shared Ruffin's enthus- iasm. "Sing Out isn't just a show, it's an expression of what we want to hve for. And right now, our main interest is to create a Sing Out here in Fort Lauderdale." Response was almost immediate as many students made the decision to join, create, and follow.
What force motivates a youth to join such a movement? Why do they wish to do so? How does it all come about? Sing Out vocalist Kathie Emrich, a twenty-one year old University of Colorado junior, was most eager to tell her story.
"The show came to the University in November (1965), and some of the Sing Out girls stayed in our sorority house. I became very interested in their purpose and decided to find out all I could about Sing Out and Moral Re-Armament. By the end of the first term, I had become very friendly with some of the girls and invited them to spend the holidays with my mother and me at our home in California. As Sing Out headquarters are in Los Angeles, it was very convenient for mom and me to find out all we could about it. She knew I was quite serious about this and allowed me to make up my own mind on what course to follow.
Linda Blackmore sings "The Ballad of Joan of Arc"
"After returning to Colorado Springs, I attended a two-day Moral Re-Armament conference which greatly heightened my enthusiasm for the movement. I entered the University for the second term but was uncertain on whether to stay in school or follow Sing Out. To make this decision, I consulted God in prayer and felt it to be His will that I join Sing Out 66, By this time, the group was here in Florida, per- forming in Orlando. I took a plane down to meet them there and became a member of Sing Out just a week ago.
"I have no uncertainties about the choice I made for I really believe I am doing God's work in just the way He wants me to. I am a firm believer in Moral Re-Armament and wish to pattern my life after its four moral standards: honesty, purity, unselfishness, and love. But it's much more than just an individual thing, it's going out and getting others to follow. And this is the aim of Sing Out — to get the idea across to all who hear us; the idea of a world based on absolute moral standards, directed by God and bringing out the best in man.
"Though most of us in Sing Out are high school and college students trying to capture youth so that, through them, the battle can be continued, we must also capture the adults for monetary backing and e.xperienced guidance. With these two forces united, we are certain that the world spoken of in the Lord's Prayer verse 'Thy will be done on earth as it is in heaven' will be achieved."
This is only a small part of the story of this re- markable movement; the rest shall be written upon the pages of history.
Boh Quesnel, tm accompanist
■'A
and ORGANIZATION
55
There are two choral groups on cam- pus, both under the direction of Miss Betty McMillion. The COLLEGE SINGERS, larger of the two, is open to all college students. The president is Mike Day; vice-president, Andrea Col- aninno; and secretary-treasurer Kathy Rollins. Student conductor is James Stewart. The Singers schedule one pro- gram per semester, this semester's to be held early in April. The COLLEGE CHORISTERS is a smaller, more se- lect group of students, eligible only through try-outs. They are active in civic programs, performing for area Ki- wanis Clubs, hospitals, and women's or- ganizations. This semester, the Choris- ters will present a Spring concert for the College.
COLLEGE SINGERS
U
u
#
The French Club was formed to pro- mote interest in the French language and the cultures of the French peoples. This year, the club is sponsored by Mr. John Weldon. Its officers are Randy
Steinberg, president; Dawn Lincoln culture, or countries speaking the French
vice-president; and Lorraine Becker, language. At the present time, the club
secretary-treasurer. During each semes- is in the process of reorganization, and
ter, the club has speakers and films the group will be in operation again
concerning various aspects of the French next term.
56
ORCHESTRA
There are four orchestral groups formed or in organization on the JCBC campus. All of these four are under the direction of Mr. Jirnmy Woodle. The BROWARD CONCERT COLLEGE ORCHESTRA is open to members of the community as well as students. There are forty musicians in the orches- tra at the present time, and are sched- uled for their first concert in February. There will be another concert, the date of which is to be announced. The Con- cert Orchestra will also assist in the production "Sound of Music.''
The CONCERT BAND is open to college students only, and presents twc concerts per semester. The STAGE BAND, which is made up of members of the Concert Band, performed at the Christmas dance last semester.
Now in the process of organization is the "PEP BAND."' Open to college stu- dents, it will play at the home games in the new gym.
PHI BETA LAMBDA
Phi Beta Lambda is a nationally af- filiated fraternity designed to equip students to participate effectively in business professions and community life. The club was organized in 1963 and became affiliated with the national fra- ternity in 1965. This year/s officers are President Bob Joynes, Vice-president Skip Day, Treasurer Bob Shevenell, and Secretary Linda Dahl. Sponsor is Mr. Peter Shenosky. The fraternity has planned to award a scholarship for the outstanding business student, and also plans to send a delegation to the state and national conventions. Car-washes will make up the major part of the fund-raising to finance these trips. Phi Beta Lambda, in conjunction with S.G.A., put on the Christmas dance, which was held December 17, at the Statler Hilton.
Phi Theta Kappa is the campus honor society and Mu Mu chapter of the national organization. The society is sponsored by Mr. John Bunch, and its officers are Sven Soneson, president; Bob Klein, vice-president; Connie Sue Corbath, secretary-treasurer. The pur- pose of Phi Theta Kappa is to promote and award outstanding scholastic achievement. The group also provides
PHI THETA KAPPA
the college with a tutoring service to aid students with a weekly, one-hour session in languages, science, or what- ever subject requested. Tentative plans are being made for an awards banquet at the end of the year to honor those students on the President's List. Re- quirements for Phi Theta Kappa are a 3.0 average and at least a fourteen hour course-load.
The Reading Club is dedicated to the service of the community and the College. Its officers are Irene Meyling- her, president; Jean Holder, vice-presi- dent; and Debbie Evans, secretary. Sponsor is Mrs. Margaret Porter. The club is not related to the reading classes
offered by the college. It is a^. interest club, and all materials used are gotten especially for it. The planned project of the Reading Club is a system of junior high tutors to work with under- privileged students in Broward county. This would be especially helpful to
students who are majoring in education or sociology. If the college tutors could reach the children and help them to im- prove their reading, it would be of great help, psychologically as well as scho- lastically, to the children in their later school years.
58
SALES AND MARKETING
The Sales and Marketing club was formed as an interest organization for those students who are aiming for a two-year degree in sales, advertising, or other types of business administration. The purpose of the club is to allow the student to see more quickly the oppor- tunities in today's business. The officers are Jeff Buntz, president; Tom Penny vice-president; Eileen Ard. secretary; and Roger Stubing, treasurer. The spon- sor is Mr. Marion West. Besides lec- turers, who are among the prominent businessmen in the area, the members review case study problems on com- mercial disputes and work on market- ing surveys. Delegates from this chapter will be sent to the State Sales and Marketing Leadership Conference at Tampa, in March.
The Spanish Club is one of the old- est campus organizations, having been in operation since the opening of the College. This year's officers are Ana Martinez, president; Roland Balsera vice-president; and Kip Flanders, treas- urer-secretary. The club is sponsored by
Mr. John Pawlowski. The object of the organization is to promote the Spanish language and the culture of the Span- ish-speaking peoples. At the end of this term, the club hopes to present an award to the outstanding Spanish stu- dent of the year. They are also planning
a dinner at one of the Spanish restau- rents in this area to be held in early spring. This past semester, in conjunc- tion with the French and German clubs. Spanish Club sponsored a Christmas program which was presented Decem- ber 10.
SPANISH CLUB
-A
Lija Ruden, former Miami Opera Guild member, performs at a Spanish Club Meeting.
59
SNEA is a pre-professional organiza- tion designed to acquaint students in- terested in education with the many phases of teaching. The officers are President Sharon Roesch, Vice-president Barbara Bird, Secretary Anita Plouffe Treasurer Kevin Bunin and Reporter
Nancy Craig. The club is sponsored by Mr. Wayne E. Barton. SNEA promotes student teaching in the local high schools. They will be holding a rummage sale in the middle of February to fi- nance the trip to the state convention.
Also planned is the sale of JCBC sta- tionery to assist in the fund-raising. Membership is open to students inter- ested in teaching, maintaining a "C" average, who can pay their dues before the deadline.
STUDENT NURSES ASSOCIATION
SNA is a pre-professional organiza- tion for nursing students, sponsored to encourage students to become active members of a professional nursing or- ganization after graduation. The club is co-sponsored by the American Nurses Association and the National League for Nursing. JCBC's chapter officers are Kitty McCarroll, president; Lois Ma- comber, 1st vice-president; Pat Connors, 2nd vice-president; Gail Bruderhausen, recording secretary; Geraldine Karjanis, corresponding secretary; and Marian Sharrett, treasurer. The campus spon- sors are Mrs. Adele Miller and Miss Carolyn Dunne. Only students enrolled in the nursing program are eligible for membership. SNA has a program planned for the Department of Nursing to be presented in February. This year they were hostess chapter for the state convention, which was held in Holly- wood.
Young Americans for Freedom is a nationally-affiliated organization of the conservative youth of America. The officers of the campus branch are Chair- man Don Shaw, Vice-Chairman Tony Marra, Secretary Tracey Wilkenson, and Treasurer Win Rand. Y.A.F., sponsored by Mr. Lucius DeVampert, was formed last semester and became active during this past January. The national organ- ization was launched in 1960 from the estate of W. S. Buckley, and contains more than 35,000 members. The aims of Y.A.F. are stated in the Sharon Statement, documented in 1960. It out- lines the opposition of Communism, the preservation of the Constitution, and the defense of national sovereignty.
YAF
Young Republicans
The Young Republicans Club was formed to promote interest in political affairs and to support the growth of the Republican party. Y.R. received its charter from the state federation in No- vember of 1965. This year's officers are Chairman Bill Behrens, Vice-chairman Jeanne Cooney, Treasurer Brent Balch Publicity Secretary Tom Tumlin and Recording Secretary Carol Ely. The
club is sponsored by Mr. Harry Crews. Last term. Young Republicans became the first club to back a slate of candi- dates in the freshman elections. The club was also active in the last SGA presidential election, and plans to back candidates in the upcoming general election. Y.R. will send a delegation to the State Convention in May, 1966.
61
D ^nouakt of JlJEautu
By Terry R. Van Der Heyden Illustrated by Joanita Taormina
I thought of your beauty and this carnation, 'Twas plucked from an enchanted garden, Fragrance divine, silv'ry dew laden; In raptures am I, my infatuation.
O'er the blissfulness indulged that shan't perish; When ecstasy throbs my mortal clay. My heart does pound away, pound away, Chanting: "My love, you above all I cherish."
I Am the Rich
The Famous and the Poor
I Am Socrates crying from
His grave for hearers.
I Am Virgil
And Dante and Homer
I Am Charlemagne and Shakespeare.
But I Am more —
1 Am Poverty Enriched
I Am sickness Cured and Death made Life
I Am a Candle in the Darkness
I Am Love and Joy and Pain
And I Am the End of the search.
For I Am He Who makes the earth
Spin round upon its axis
And threw the stars into the sky
Before there were eyes to see.
Or a man to try to count them.
And I Am He to Whom the eternal worship
Of all creatures belongs
Who put all this into the earth
And Who will take it all away
— Infinite Truth
Infinite Love
Infinite Wisdom —
Infinite God!
am l&e
By Cassandra Kenfield
Illustrated by Cherry Hanson
63
MULTIPARTITE
By James Higgins Gray Collage by Lew Alquist
In a time before our own
In a iar off land
People were building a tower
Before they were through
They suddenly discovered
They could not understand each other
Some turned white with fright
Some red with shame
While others black with anger
Still, others yellow with discouragement
They all fled with contempt
That day they started a race A race of people The race for supremacy White said "I'm the smartest" Red yelled "I'm the strongest" Black laughed "I'm the happiest" And yellow sang "I'm the most"
Now!
Yellow threaten white
White hate black
Black fight white
While the red sit
And watch their land grow smaller
Where is the finish line
For the race of races
Let one live with another
Two live with three
And the world with me.
64
.f»W
rr^-
*■' %:^
'^»^
•vx..
IWr^
- 1
I
7
J
o7
r
\ f^mS
'f
V
|
f |
, |
/ |
|
|
« |
|||
|
■N |
^ |
||
|
[ . |
S |
^ \ |
|
|
\..^___ _ |
s- |
\ |
MAY, 1966
STAFF AND ADVISORS
Editor-in-Chiel Pamela Edwards
Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley
Feature Editor Sheryl Martin
Art Editor Lewis Alquist
Sports Editor John Wolfe
General Staff Assistant Elle Kurpiewski
Photographers David Porter, Norman
Summey, and Judy Mathis Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes
Chairman of the Division of Language
and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter
SILVER
SANDS
Tic itiiir Cdege of BmihiI My
Rit McfiHi, Ariiti
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COLLEGE '66 2
THIS 'MICKEY MOUSE' COLLEGE — A FAIR
ACCUSATION? Sheryl Martin 6
VILLAGE CAMP Sara David 8
CAMPUS CASUALS 12
SHALL WE OVERCOME? Robert Jackson
and Rick Barnard 14
LYCEUM PRESENTATIONS EUe Kurpiewski
DAVE BRUBECK 16
THE NORMAN LUBOFF CHOIR 18
NATIONAL PLAYERS 19
SOUND OF MUSIC Phil Mansueto 20 FOLK MUSIC — THE MUSIC OF FOLKS
Marci Coyle 21
THE MEDICAL ASSISTING PROGRAM 24
TERMINATION (Short Story) Jim Tucker 26
SEAHORSE MIGRATION 31
ON CAMPUS (Selected Cartoons) 32
CANDIDATES FOR GRADUATION, MAY, 1966 34
GRADUATES OF DECEMBER, 1965 36
PRAYER OF FUTILITY (Poem) John Leatherwood 46 INTERCOLLEGIATE SPORTS John Wolfe
CONGRATULATIONS SEAHORSES 48
SPIRIT '66 S3
TENNIS 54
GOLF
BASEBALL
JUDO
THE CAMPUS -
- A LOOK AT THE FUTURE
Ann Bardsley THE SGA PICNIC
WHAT MEASURE — THE MAN? (Poem)
T. Stephen Rosen
ANN'S REVIEW Ann Bardsley
55 56 58
59 62
63 64
COLLEGE
9
% it A Ttew
BERKELEY riots again, sex orgies persist in Amer- ica's unapproachable Ivy League colleges, LSD has become "high camp" and America's col- legians are winning no popularity contests with older generations.
Is this typical or atypical of the students who have flooded our college campuses? Are they merely a mass of aimless transgressors who rebel for the sake of rebelling or does the majority consist of serious-minded young adults who realize they are "the hope of the future" and yearn to meet and to accept this responsibility?
Currently, the subject of the hour among writers and journalists has been "the revolution" among America's youth. SILVER SANDS wanted to know what the college student thinks of himself and his colleagues. To find out, we went directly to the subject in question — the representatives from the
nation's colleges and universities who have recently filled Fort Lauderdale beaches. Replies were consistent yet strikingly different; expected yet shocking; profound yet uncertain. Primarily, they helped to give a clearer concept of the breed of Americans the col- leges are producing.
It is a generation in a hurry. It is impatient to do something about persisting dilemmas on both the national and international level. It looks at the world and is dissatis- fied with what it sees. It chal- lenges government, religion, and morality. It goes further — it ques- tions the why's and the where- fore's. It critically analyzes so- ciety's basic institutions and won- ders where they have fallen short of their mark. "There are more of us, we are more educated, and we have more leisure time. This re- sults in more time to think, to ob- serve, and to question," stated Fred Balzer, a senior and a psy- chology major at the University of Alaska. George Holder, a 20 year old sociology major at Northwest- ern University, pointed out that "We have not experienced a de- pression or a major war. Perhaps because of this we are more idealistic than previous genera- tions and want to bring about changes quickly."
Students today are definitely moving away from the church. Are they deserting the concept of a God or solely the conc;ept of insti- tutionalized religion? Of the stu-
dents questioned, only one is a profound atheist; many more are agnostics. The majority believe in God, but not in organized religion. "Religion should be personal. Church doctrines have left a void that I have filled with my belief in a personal God," stated a 23 year old graduate student at In- diana University. A history major at UCLA cited that "Certainly this generation is deserting the church, but it is not a sudden movement. It has been a gradual change down through history. With the advancement of time comes re- ligious reform. Let's face it, most of our organized religions are archaic and outmoded." A psychol- ogy major from Ohio State Uni- versity added, "I definitely believe in organized religion for myself, but not for everyone else. To say that all others should believe as I do would be imposing on their personal freedoms."
On one major issue, replies were astoundingly identical. This was the subject of morality. This gen- eration is labeled as radical in its moral adjustments. Is it really? Has it completely denounced es- tablished moral standards? No two students differed in their senti- ments and this popular reaction was summed up by Jim Coldwell, a sophomore and a sociology ma- jor at the Royal Canadian Uni- versity: "What is moral? There should never be a specific set of moral standards set up by society for all to follow. Morality is a per-
sonal matter. Every individual should be responsible for setting their own standards and then fol- lowing them."
Students are surprisingly willing and eager to express their opin- ions. They have set down their ideals and convictions and are not
ashamed of them. From the rep- resentative number interviewed by SILVER SANDS, here are some of their replies:
ON MILITARY SERVICE IN VIET NAM
\
Jim Coldwell, 19, sophomore soci- ology major at the Royal Ca- nadian University.
"I'm still a Canadian citizen, yet I have resided in the United States for nine years. If called to service I'd gladly give my life for this country. I believe in what the United States is doing in Viet Nam and they should stay there until the cause is satisfied."
Laurie Mandebeaum, 20, a French major at Skidmore College.
"I'm not a pacifist, but I defin- itely believe that we should not be in Viet Nam."
(Note: Of the students inter- viewed. Miss Mandebeaum is the only one who does not back our stand in Viet Nam.)
Ronald Furst, 18, business major at the University of Miami.
"Prejudice definitely decreases by generation, but I feel that students are hypocritical about integration. They will try to give an outward impression of being all for racial equality, yet this is difficult for them to accept within themselves. It will have to be a gradual transition. It is impossible to jam anything down people's throats and then expect them to swallow it will- ingly."
N DRAFT-CARD BURNER^
John Rosamilia, 20, a student at Rutgers University.
"What is the point in taking such drastic measures when they're actually not accomplishing any- thing? If they're trying to play the role of the martyr they have failed. The only visible outcome is that their character or else their sanity appears questionable in the eyes of others. Thus, their purpose is deterred rather than escalated."
p>N RACIAL PROBLEMS
>N THE BERKELEY RIOTS
Elena Borstein, 20, an art major at Skidmore College.
"Berkeley may be right, but the method is wrong. If they really believe in their objectives there's nothing wrong with that. More people should have such sincere motives. But they're going about it all wrong. They're accomplish- ing nothing but a great deal of undesirable publicity."
1
Susie Kogut, 21, senior education major at Michigan State Uni- versity.
"I don't feel a personal responsi- bility for my country's racial problems, but I do feel a per- sonal responsibility in helping to' solve them."
JPN GOVERNMENT
Larry Tolstam, 23, graduate student in economics at Michigan State University.
"I don't believe in 'my country, right or wrong' per se. Citizens should maintain the right to criticize their government's ac- tions, but once it makes a move they should back it up whether they agree or not. Governments are the products of human minds. No human is perfect, so how can a government be?"
I
Merle Carlson, 23, a graduate stu- dent in chemistry at North- >vestern University.
"Organized religion is good for those who cannot think for themselves. It provides a logical behavior pattern for individuals who are unable to set down a satisfactory pattern on their own. The more educated a person be- comes, his need for this type of religion lessens."
LY RELATIONS
Fred Balzer, 22, senior psychology major at the University of Alaska.
"I've worked with kids from broken homes, alcoholic parents, and other undesirable back- grounds. To be honest, I feel complete disgust for what I see. I consider myself a good poten- tial parent and to me this is ex- tremely important. The loss of family ties is a loss our children cannot afford."
ON RELIGIOr
Marjorie Freeman, 19, freshman physical education major at the University of Florida.
"Yes, I definitely believe in God. In organized religion, no. Ways of expression vary with each individual. In churches and syna- gogues, people have a tendency to follow the crowd. No true belief really comes through."
^
»
p
Jeff Zettel, 19, sophomore history major at UCLA.
"I don't believe in God, yet I am not saying that there is not a God. I don't believe in a heaven or a hell. I believe in people and people are good. All my life my parents have practically crammed religion down my throat. As a result, instead of being devout, I have turned away from it."
?^-
George Holder, 20, a sociology ma- jor at Northwestern University.
"I definitely fear for the future. Small scale wars will continue and will slowly drain our coun- try's economy. I'm not saying that big wars are out, but I think that the occurrence of one is un- likely. The greater destruction potential man obtains, the less likely he is to use it. Economi- cally speaking, we will suffer the greatest at the hands of the small scale wars."
. the registration run-around . . ."
". . . with the lake the parking lot . .
WHAT'S the difference how we dress or how we feel? When you're in the thirteenth grade, you've got to be treated like you're in the thir- teenth grade!"
This comment was taken from a conversation overheard in the stu- dent lounge. The boy was discuss- ing the dress code. In another cor- ner of the room, there was a heated argument going on about the restriction of fraternities on the JCBC campus. The students were all arguing in favor of the estab- lishment of legal fraternities on campus. Their reasoning was logi- cal and their arguments were sound. At least they appeared to be sound, since there was no one arguing against them.
The average student spends a great deal of time in discussion and/or criticism of the campus, the administration and the school sys- tem in general. This criticism either takes the form of a subtle prod ( ". . . the super-rotten 'food' at the Union"), the not-so-subtle prod ('. . . with the lake in the parking lot and the sand dunes 'round the buildings, we should set up cabanas and beach mats. We'd make a fortune!"), and finally a downright stab ("If this mickey- mouse kindergarten were really a college, we could have our fraterni- ties, and sororities too, if we wanted them.") .
The most common complaint
seems to be that the whole concept of a junior college is an insult to the ideals of the American uni- versity. The usual phrase employed to describe it is "mickey-mouse." For those not familiar with the term, it means "simply too unbe- lievably stupid to be mentioned in an intelligent conversation."
The reference to the junior col- lege as an extension of high school is also frequently heard. Restric- tions and methods of procedure such as bells at the end of class sessions, enforced attendance, and the dress requirements are thought by the students to be impositions or reflections upon the students' judgment. "The rules are set up by the administration, enforced by the faculty, and the kids who are sup- posed to be learning discipline and acceptance of responsibility aren't gaining anything."
Dr. E. P. Lauderdale, Dean of Instruction, attributed the neces- sity of restrictions upon the stu- dent body to the lack of an or- ganized, strong student govern- ment, such as those that exist in the four-year institutions. He said "Leaders aren't just born, they practice. In a two-year institution, there just isn't enough time for the student to learn enough about self-government to be able to di- rect themselves. At the universi- ties, the juniors and seniors are the ones who run things. That gives the freshmen and sophomores
CTSCt/ i 'J
a chance to learn with no problem of 'two-year turnover'."
Lauderdale also said that ". . . the administration cannot abdicate responsibility for the operation of the educational institution. It can delegate authority to the student, but it can't relieve itself of legal authority of the school."
One reason the junior colleges were established was to take the load off the four-year universities. Certainly community colleges have done this. Here in South Florida,
This 'MICKEY MOUSE' Junior College . . .
A Fair Accusation?
Dade County Junior College, with an enrollment of almost 17,000, and JCBC with more than 4,000 have lifted over 21,000 incoming students off the enrollment lists of the state and private universities in Florida. This is not even con- sidering the other junior colleges in the state. Without the junior
Students are not always able to cope with college life, studies and responsibilities at the same time. Jarecke said, "When a high school student is sent directly to a fairly demanding university of the better class, he is at a disadvantage be- cause there is much background he lacks and is not able to survive without. In a junior college, the student is able to catch what back- ground he didn't have before, and acclimate himself to college life."
The problems that the "open door" policy of enrollment present to the teachers are quite different from those found in a university. Where, at a university, the profes- sor may often have to cope with overcrowded classes and an exas- perating schedule; in a junior col- lege the problems are more in the nature of having to deal with an incoming group of students which
by SHERYL MARTIN
may appear to be intellectually inferior.
Dr. Homer Ledbetter. Head of the Humanities Division, said, "There are more problems here, but at least we are able to cope with the problems on a more indi- vidual level . . . Every piece of human stuff has worth in its own right. Educators should try to de- velop this worth."
Aside from the regulatory prob- lems of a junior college, there are the physical discomforts of estab- lishing a school. These discom- forts ( the lake in the parking lot in front of "C" building, the daily sand storms, the registration run- around, the "food" on campus ) are things that both the faculty and the students must share. They are caused either by lack of facilities or conflicting future plans for cam- pus arrangement. They are to be endured as part of the birth pains of a college.
. . we should set up
cabanas and beach
mats . . ."
colleges, the universities in the state would have had to turn away almost half of the applying stu- dents.
The advantages a two-year insti- tution offers the student are many and varied. The most obvious is the financial advantage. The junior college offers a university parallel program to students who otherwise couldn't afford a college education. Dr. Walter Jarecke, director of counseling and advisement, said that "Statistics show that grad- uates of the university parallel courses here do better than do those students who follow the same course in certain four-year insti- tutions."
;^1.. "X&r),^^
%.,
W'
A'-'Z^^-" '^:
-«^-
X*": ^-i!
^~'~» <
"♦•.
v^-
■c^
■c-U.,.
_^^
\^'
'^mm
V
y
^45«<
Illustrations by Lew Alquist
VILLAGE CAMP
by Sara David
FAMILIARITY, hopefully, breeds Camp. Camp? It's an old word that's been dragged out in the open and given a new meaning. It obsoletes Hip; Mad, mad, mad; Pop; Swinging; Crazy; Groovy; Funsville. You're not "In" anymore, or "Out." You're either Camp or you aren't. The world, suddenly, is divided into two and only two parts: those that are and those that aren't. A trivial matter? Unworthy of consideration in a college maga- zine? Absolutely not. Camp keeps the very best of company.
Susan Sontag, who breathed new life into the relic, is a professor of philosophy at Co- lumbia University. In an intricate and involved essay in the Partisan Review, Fall, 1964, she decided that the word satisfied a missing defi- nition for a "third sensibility." To Miss Sontag, Camp is the love of artifice and exaggeration; the theatricality of certain things that are "good" because they're so "awful." She restricts Camp to the aiiluent society, or one capable of reacting to the psychopathology (her word) of affluence. Sontag Camp: Tiffany lamps; 1900 A.D. post cards; King Kong; the androgynous boy-girl, girl-boy pre-Raphaelite painting; Oscar Wilde. And sex movies, ii seen without exper- iencing an involvement.
Time magazine took her up on it, and started what has become a free-for-all in defining sub- jective taste. The New York Times magazine couldn't resist the bait, and insists it's a noun and an adjective:
Camp, n: a 3rd strem of taste.
Camp, adj: too much; not to be believed. This impeccable source carefully subdefines it,
with examples:
High Camp: . . .
Middle Camp: . . .
Low Camp: . . .
Intentional Camp: . . .
Unintentional Camp: . . . and, less bold, than Miss Sontag, adds, "in the beholder's own eye, of course."
Gloria Steinern, in Life, calls Camp "return-trip Pop . . . but it has got to be Fun." Holiday's George Frazier takes the side of a critic who says Camp is something that is good in spite of being bad. He goes so far as to conclude that Camp really is an Indonesian por- trait of Tony Curtis done in chicken feathers. The Venetian Crier abstracts it to NOT owning a Mustang, or getting married be- cause you WANT to.
Webster's Third New Interna- tional lists 23 variations of Camp, none of which remotely resemble anything concerning a "sensibility," or a chickenf eathered Tony Curtis. And, horrors, according to Mee- han, the word has been around in the non-rural sense since 1909, evolving from connotations of "the pleasantly ostentatious," through homosexuality in the 1920's, to its present status, whatever that is.
Camp has become part of the mainstream, the bloodstream of the U.S. And most unlikely of all, it is being treated as a serious subject, debated by intellectuals (?) via magazine articles and newspaper columns. So much so, in fact, it has permeated the med- ical/mental profession. To one New York psychiatrist, Camp is potentially dangerous: a sick and decadent form of regression; an adolescent, sentimental running- away from life and responsibilities. A Fort Lauderdale psychologist considers it a rebellion against conformity, an "objection to exist- ing mores and culture."
Camp means all things to all persons. It can be defined as
simply or as elaborately as your vocabulary permits. Underneath the verbal extravagance, Camp is essentially a response: the unique, spontaneous reaction of the sub- jective i; momentary immersion of the senses in pure, undiluted delight. It is an instantaneous in- volvement that fulfills a need for a feeling of aliveness and charac- ter in the monotony of mass cul- ture, affluent or, in spite of Miss Sontag, unatiluent.
Which brings us to JCBC Camp. Other than the fact that a draftable student occasionally plays Russian roulette and signs up for 1 1 college-hours, and some students deliberately don't alter a perfectly good car, is there such a thing as complex Camp on the unafUuent campus: Is JCBC too horribly dull to support anything but the most primitive form of Camp — playboy covers on the Family textbook, Cornhuskers lo- tion, thin men with thin beards? Of course there is.
JCBC Camp is as real as in- tangible as the fourth dimension. You can't prove it. You just feel it's there. JCBC Camp may be dif- ferent, but it exists. AND it has nothing to do with Italian Mo- nopoly sets, or Japanese movies with deliberately un-related sub- titles. OR Steve Reeves movies, Bea Lillie, Victor Mature's chest, or Andy Warhol's eight-hour movie of a man sleeping. These things have to be searched out and ex- hibited. They shriek Camp. JCBC Camp is perhaps more sophisti- cated because it is so ultimately subtle. It deals with the emotional rather than the visual senses.
To all appearances, the same things happen every day at JCBC: same classes, same teachers, same buildings, and same look-alike students. JCBC Camp is tenuous and wafty: and extremely exclu- sive. It is available only to those
that have lived here. It is the thing that gives character and a sense of difference to the incred- ibly familiar unaitluent junior col- lege life. It is a sense of the un- predictable in the routine: the non-giving-in to sameness and plainness. Anybody that has been here and denies that JCBC Camp exists is obtuse. Asleep. Unaware. To use a more familiar word, "Out."
For instance, how about all the prestige JCBC is acquiring? Two on the president's list, 29 on the dean's list at FSU, trimester I, 1965. It creates a feeling of sur- prise and delight. It shouldn't, really. After surviving the math- science courses here one can climb any educational mountain. But since, for some reason, it creates an air of the unusual, important enough to take up eye-catching space in the paper, it is definitely Camp for JCBC alumni to be on the FSU president's list.
The new planetarium: an Aztec temple in the midst of a waste- land relieved only by great boxes that shelter the inhabitants? And Mr. Martin: might he possibly go into the mysterious darkness and never appear again except to an- nounce great happenings from omens of the stars: perhaps the collision of two worlds, or life on Mars? The planetarium most cer- tainly is an involvement of the unfamiliar with the familiar. In a word. Camp.
Camp clings to Building A, ex- building C. In the terribly hot September, 1965, students and teachers voluntarily packed them- selves, alive and barely breathing, into this concentration camp: sans water, sans bathroom, sans air- conditioning. (Camp People) Now, finished (almost?), WITH water and air, the name changed to Classroom Building A, theoreti- cally it shouldn't be Camp. But it
is. In spite of the seeming dignity and formal name, how about the curtain walls that cut sight but not noise, patios with no place to sit or put books? No public tele- phones. In spite of the efforts of the authorities, it remains a mar- ketplace. It demands an emotional experience to stay the day there. Building A perversely retains its Camp atmosphere.
Definitely Camp is the unlikely circumstance that, of all places, the math-science department should be the one to acquire ex- quisitely landscaped parks in tiny corners. AND benches WITH cushions. Unexpected and differ- ent? Yes. Camp? Very much so.
The new registration procedure is Camp this year. Ante the new registration, 4-day lines weren't Camp (too emotional), they were killing. Now, if you have to wait, it's unique. The familiar exhibits an unfamiliar quality: Camp. Re- turn-trip Pop, if you prefer Life's definition. Going to the office and successfully completing a mission is Camp. And so is the two-foot deep reflecting pool WITH foun- tains. JCBC Camp involves a light-hearted adjustment to famil- iar problems. Non-complaining. A feeling that education is worth anything.
JCBC Camp breaks out in tiny happenings on the campus. The DeLara and Woodle concert, for instance: the pursuit and attain- ment of excellence. And the open- ing of the Fine Arts building with a formal art exhibit rivaling any- thing to be found downtown. The foreign language movies this tri- mester: "Fedra." A Greek myth in Spanish! Lawrence Olivier play- ing Othello (this is foreign?) di- rectly to the students and faculty. These things happen every day at Columbia university, and every week or month or so at Miami, FSU and Florida State. At JCBC,
10
however, they're Camp: an oc- casional elegance that lives, un- noticed for the most part, within the familiar goings-on of the prac- tical campus affairs.
Pan Ku is Camp — it you read it and discover that gold glis- tens beneath the expected, and the conventional. The superb Pan Ku illustrations. The Venetian Crier is Camp this year: the atmosphere periodically boils with reactions from students, faculty, administra- tion and probably the school board. Who cares? It's Camp on the campus: a surprised delight in discovering that caught up in the unaf fluent atmosphere there thrives individualism and bold- ness and creativity. The deceptive- ly familiar and practical carries beneath it a strain of difference.
JCBC people are Camp. These JCBC instructors and professors aren't ninnies, they've got guts: consider the faculty pictures in Silver Sands. These are brave souls who exposed themselves, and for the most part got the worst part of the bargain. These pages in Silver Sands bring about a tender feeling (Susan Sontag's
expression) that goes along with anything Camp. It's "good because it's so awful."
Students that enroll because they WANT to are Camp; stu- dents that grudgingly enroll and become advocates of THIS junior college are Camp. So are the stu- dents burdened with a double life of work and study, and find time to play. And so are the adult stu- dents that manage to survive ob- solete, sometimes medieval, edu- cational backgrounds. Even MORE Camp: the fact that you can count the older women, but not the men. Men don't age, some- how they merge within the group. Universal Camp?
Camp even seeps into the li- brary. No IRS man ever tracked down a tax fugitive more dili- gently than the librarians search for total information. No matter how trivial the grail, if it's im- portant to the student, it's holy to them: an attitude that transcends the impersonal objectivity usually associated with the formality of a library.
JCBC Camp rebels against the unemotional atmosphere of the
practical higher education. It is the Self within the crowd. It is a reprieve from the robot-like, auto- mated, organized existence in mass education.
What about non-camp? There is no such thing. For Camp, by definition, is pure, undiluted re- sponse. It necessitates non-judg- ment, non-consideration, non-com- parison, and non-premeditation. You either are or you aren't — you feel it or you don't.
This article is subjective. Opin- ionated, if you prefer. You per- haps object, or disagree. Fine, go to it. It's a symptom of non-con- trived response. It's Camp.
One last, sad remark. It prob- ably isn't even Camp to be Camp anymore. Like Dorian Gray, Camp is perhaps already dead of old age in just a few months. However, people will worry it, use it, and keep it artificially breath- ing for a while until someone comes up with a newer word for the same old thing: the response of delight within the known. The familiar that ISN'T contempt. A sophistication that can exist within the unatiluent society.
11
^^■^
V ^- %-*yw
CAMPUS CASUALS
ill.! •••'"•••»••»
%0.
'/
\
• • ••
; • -•
Sun, sand and wind inspire the fashions on the junior college campus.
The sunny days of South Florida call for dresses or skirt and blouse outfits of a light material. The coeds carry sweaters for the cooler days and raincoats for those cloudy days when sudden showers seem inevital^le.
Hairdos are usually loose, simple styles that
are ruffled by the wind and easiU' combed back into place.
The good sturdy and ever popular loafers are worn by most coeds. These shoes are com- fortable for the long walks l^etween buildings over the hard concrete and through soft sand.
Sun glasses protect artfulK made up e\es from the wind whipped sand and the bright Florida sun.
13
by ROBERT L. JACKSON
TO SAY that the problems of race relations in the United States are complex hardly helps to clarify our situation. But unless the complexity of this matter is seen and taken into account, no single step is likely to be very effecti\'e. The problems of Ameri- can education are no less complex. In a nation as diversified as ours, universal education can never be simple, and it is universal education that we must strive for now.
Since the issues of race relation per- meate into almost e\'ery aspect of life, it is not unusual that we have it inter- laced with other problems in education.
Let us come a little closer to home. How are we licking the problem at Broward Junior College? Most people say "v\'hat jiroblem?" That was mv re- action, too. But I wasn't quite convinced prior to enrolling at B.J.C.
I wasn't sure that B.J.C. was the place for me. The outer me just didn't want to conform, but deep down inside I knew that this was my best bet. My debate went something like this:
Outer Me: Look, kid, it's too much trouble.
Inner Me: Yeah, but it's economical and very convenient.
Outer Me: They will all be against you . . . even tlie instructors are "segs" (segregationists).
Inner Me: First of all, you're not looking at this thing with an open mind. Second, diis is Fort Lauderdale, not Birmingham or Selma, Alabama. And third, this problem exists on both sides ... us and them.
Outer Me: 'Why do you and I have to be pioneers? Why don't we leave things like tliis for other people?
Inner Me: Have you considered where we might be today is everybody thought like you?
Outer Me: Well, I guess you're right.
After the better half of me decided to enroll at B.J.C, I was curious to know how other Negro students felt about at- tending the junior college. What prob- lems were they confronted with, if any.
I was coming out of the student cen- ter when I spotted a short, stocky Negro fellow with thick black-rimmed glasses sitting at a patio table reading. I spoke politely and then proceeded to ask him, "Do you feel uncomfortable when you're sitting in a class with all white stu- dents?"
"Well," he said, "this is the first time I have attended such a school. At first when I sat at my desk in the front of the room, I could feel eyes staring at the back of my head. But now I feel at ease."
Another Negro student added that he feels very uncomfortable whenever is- sues on civil rights arc brought up in the classroom h\ students or instructors.
Upon asking Negro students whether or not they believed that they could get along better at an all-Negro college, more than fifty percent said no.
One girl added, "I adapted myself to
"You see," he started, "we represent about .3% of the school population and whenever we see another one of us walking across the campus or sitting at a table, we join them because they're like 'kin'."
I could see the point he was trying to make. Most of the Negro students share those sentiments and I am no
Shall We Ovc
the situation, made new friends, and I like it very much."
I walked around to the southeast end of the patio and noticed that the Negroes were all sitting together, segre- gated from the rest.
I asked a fellow (Negro), "Why do you congregate in this section? Why don't you integrate with the rest of the students?"
exception now that I've been here a while.
I think Broward Junior College earns an "A plus" because of the lack of fric- tion or major incidents between the races.
As I stated before, we have a long way to go, but maybe before long, we can look at everybody and think of them as "kin."
14
by RICK BARNARD
SUMMER is coming. The last day of school, Fourth of July and week-ends at the beach are just around the corner. Summer means fun, time to rela.v and leave your troubles behind for a couple of weeks.
Summer is not all fun and smiles. Summer 1966 will undoubtedly witness a nasty little rite that has plagued the country for decades. Along with cold
3me?
beer and steaks sizzling on the outdoor grill, the "lazy, hazy days of summer" will usher in the annual dance of racial hate. Negroes from every metropolis in the United States will surge onto the streets and boulevards in huge militant bands to complain about economic in- fringements, racial discrimination, and passionately demand "Freedom now!" These colored processions will be met
by huge militant bands of whites who will complain about the Supreme Court, curse President Johnson, and passion- ately demand the maintenance of the status quo.
Rather than review the history of race relations in this country and thereby repeat what has already been said, I prefer to look at the problem from a personal viewpoint.
I'm a white, middle-class, Anglo- Saxon Protestant. I was born and lived for ten years in Biniiingham, Alabama. Contrary to what many people might like to believe, my mommy never took nie on her knee to teach me how to hate. I was told to show respect for older people (even polka-dotted ones), not to ask girls to go skinny-dippin' and not to buy popsicles from the colored ice cream man. I was once given a good shaking for being rude to our Negro maid. The word "nigger" always brought a quick reprimand or slap on the backside from my red-haired Scotch- Irish Mom. Our crowd did not spend twenty-four hours a day re-fighting the Civil War. Only once can I remember waiting in a darkened cemetery to scare the daylights out of an old Negro man.
I have a cousin who runs a huge farm (we never call it a plantation) in Mississippi. He frequently carries a short cropped whip but uses it only on the horses. My boyhood was not dras- tically different from any of my friends. I went to school, teased the girls and raised hell in general.
Since I was fifteen, I've spent a healthy amount of time wondering what it would be like to be a Negro. I've decided I wouldn't like it. I would be somewhat irritated if I spent four or five years of my time and a lot of money going to school and was then refused a job because my skin didn't have the right tint. I would be even more irritated if refused service at a restaurant because the owners believe I'd pollute the place. Being asked to get the heck out would bug me no end. My money spends good all over town. The life of a Negro must certainly be more difficult than mine from the very be- ginning.
The Junior College of Broward County is the first integrated school I've ever attended. Going to school with Negro students doesn't bother me at all. There is no reason that it should. Per- haps if the situation was reversed and the enrollment consisted of about 200 whites and 4,300 Negroes I would feel differently. I might tend to be a little quieter and to sit at the same table on the patio every day. I might not be the "joiner" that I am. I like to think I wouldn't act that way but I probably would.
The fact is that Southern people do not, by nature, hate Negroes. They never did. It strikes me as ironic that the disturbances in Harlem and Watts were defined as socio-economic up- heavals while the brawls in Birming- ham and St. Augustine were termed race-riots. Those who view the South- erner as three parts hate and one part grits are just as prejudiced as the people who think of the Negro as an unwashed dum-dum.
Fort Lauderdale is hard to categorize. It's not in tlic South. The South stops at Orlando. The gold coast, with its Saturday stew of refugees from the cold, defies definition in terms of ethnic as- sociation. I am not proud of Birming- ham's reputation as a center of hate. I do realize that "Southern justice" is not a myth. It's there. It's real. Feed it a little fuel and it will raise its ugly head to take a last desperate swat at the new Negro maturity. But this does not mean that every citizen of the South should walk around with a skull and cross- bones painted on his back. Southern hospitality and sense of honor are not myths either. They are an important part of the moral fibre that sustains the people of the so-called Bible Belt.
Southern justice and the redneck phi- losophy are fading and a new South is rising to take its place. The increased industrialization along with the Supreme Court demand for reapportionment mark the end of rural rule. The new South is made of steel and history, white col- lars and more commerce.
The racial war is a malignancy which infects the soul and slows the heartbeat of the entire country. John F. Kennedy saw the problem in a double light. In addition to being a sickness, he thought it offered us a chance to mature. In the clo.se of the 1960 presidential campaign he spoke of this responsibilit>'. "I re- mind you of a letter Lincoln wrote to a friend at the beginning of the Ci\il War. T know there is a God, and I know He hates injustice. I see the .storm coming and I know His hand is in it. But if He has a place and a part for me, I believe that I am ready.' Now, a hundred years later, when the issue is still freedom or slavery, we know there is a God, and we know He hates injus- tice. We see the storm coming and we know His hand is in it. But if He has a place and a part for us, I believe that we are ready."
The generation before ours had a chance to straighten out the racial mess and they really bungled the job. Now it's our turn. Relations between the races will not impro\e in the courts or halls of Congress. Understanding must develop on the streetcorner, at the job and especially on the campus. President Kennedy was right; we are ready.
15
I
FROM the moment the Dave Brubeck Quartet began playing, it was obvious that jazz craftsmanship was ap- parent. It was also obvious that the Quartet was the most popular Lyceum of the three presented.
Brubeck did almost everything. He played, talked, made jokes about jazz improvisations and laughed off a faulty microphone.
The show opened with "Saint Louis Blues" followed by a soft and pretty rendition of "Brandenberg Gate." The sax of Paul Desmond was very smooth and Brubeck played the piano in almost classical form.
The first part closed with standards like "Tangerine" and "Take the A Train."
The second part featured some new and old tunes. Brubeck played "Forty Days," which, he explained, was a new jazz spiritual. It proved to be interesting and beautiful.
As always, the audience found a favorite, in Joe Morello. Though it must have been hard with the talents of Brubeck, Desmond and bass. Gene Wright, on the stage. However, Morello was the audience winner as he received a standing ovation following a fantastic drum solo.
The Quartet then played, what most had been waiting for, the popular "Take Five." It seemed to close the show as another standing ovation occurred.
With that piano, sax, bass and drums, the evening of jazz craftsmanship and showmanship, ended.
March 10, 1966
DAVE BRUBECK
I
ihe llorinan Liihoff Glioir
THE Norman Luboff Choir represented the word versa- tility when they presented the second Lyceum program. The Choir accomplished this by opening with spirituals and closing with popular songs they have made famous.
"Hodie natus Christus est" by Sweelinck, opened the show and the spirituals were the rule of the first half.
There was one interesting comic relief, however, and this was when the Choir performed "Valise." The song is about the conversation bits that one can pick up while dancing around the ballroom. The lyrics and effect were excellent.
Seriousness soon returned when the first part closed with an extended piece called the "Magnificat," which was just that — very magnificent.
By the second half, the audience had found a favorite singer in the low voice of Paul Burgen. He received a stand- ing ovation during "Deep River."
Dreamland was achieved through such songs as "Laura," a standard of the Norman Luboff Choir. "Dry Bones" was another favorite as percussionist Paul Callaghan gave it an exciting Latin beat, the only accompaniment in the song.
"Skip To My Lou" also received fantastic applause as the program ended.
Throughout, adults seemed to have "music does still exist" written on their faces. Students also appeared to enjoy the variety of spirituals, folk, and popular songs presented by the versatile Norman Luboff Choir.
Two student journalists, Elle Kurpiewski and AI Kent, inter- view Maestro Luboff during a relaxing moment backstage.
18
National Players prpsrnt
3^omeo anb Juliet
BEAUTY, versatility and craftsmanship were the key words in this year's three final Lyceum programs.
The National Players displayed beauty in tlieir presentation of Shakespeare's immortal Romeo and Juliet. The story, as most know, is the tragedy of two lovers and the sequence of events that lead up to their sorrowful deaths.
Chris Sarandon in the role of Romeo was excellent after a slow start. The handsome young actor portrayed Romeo in the perfect tradition, yet added depth to the role with his own modernization and youthfulness.
Juliet was also played to perfection by the capable and lovely Halo Wines. Costuming and lighting were especially effective during her scenes.
Both had their brightest moment during the balcony scene, making it the highlight of the evening.
However, the play was not always melancholy. One actress and two actors gave the audience the much needed comic relief in the course of the play. Juliet's nurse, played by Pat Hecht, was marvelous with her ever suffering manner. Mercutio, friend of Romeo and Peter, servant to Juliet, played respectively by Philip LeStrange and Charles Faranda, were also wonderful in their comic roles.
The play itself, of course, is a classic. Yet, all the actors involved gave it their own special touches, making the roles believable and alive.
Shakespearean lovers had to agree that the presentation was a memorable experience.
19
- Tke Sound of
THE Stranahan High School Auditorium was filled with the sounds of music Friday and Saturday, April 1 and 2, as the Fine Arts Department pre- sented its spring musical produc- tion, "The Sound of Music."
The play was double cast and starred Banu Gibson and Mary
as she waltzes to mass and even sings in the Abbey.
"Maria, it seems to be the will of God that you leave us," says the Mother Abbess, played by Mrs. Rosemary Schoch. Maria pleads with the Mother Abbess not to send her away because she does want to become a nun very
USIC [_J
portrayed by Dr. Willard DeLara, chairman of the Fine Arts Depart- ment, is a very strict man and runs his house like a battle- ship. Maria, however, manages to change all this.
Maria's first innovation into the von Trapp home is music, in the form of singing. Maria teaches the
Ann Uhlar as Maria, a young girl who wanted to become a nun. The setting for the play was in Austria in early 1938.
Maria makes a real effort to be solemn and obedient but she seems always to be getting into some sort of mischief. It's not that Maria doesn't try to be good; on the contrary, she is a kind and loving human being. But Maria has music in her heart and is oftentimes seen by the other nuns
much. The Mother Abbess assures Maria that she will only be away for a short while and that when she returns to the Abbey she will then know better what is expected of her.
"If it is God's will," says Maria.
Maria is sent to the home of Captain von Trapp, an ex-navy hero, widower, and father to seven children. Maria assumes the po- sition of governess to the seven von Trapp children. The Captain,
children, who previously were "little marching machines," how to sing, something they had never done before. This also marks the first time music has been brought into the von Trapp family since the death of the Captain's wife.
Maria then teaches the Captain how to know and love his children better. By doing so the battleship atmosphere is removed and is re- placed by the close-knit family re- lationship with Maria becoming the children's "new" mother.
20
FOLK IpSIC . . . The Msic of Folks
' \Hiir-
21
by Marci Coyle
AND I can't help but wonder where I'm bound." These words from a song by Tom Paxton, a contemporary singer and writer of songs, probably reflect the feelings of this college generation. Just as the words of over one thousand songs written by Woody Guthrie, song writer and singer, reflect the feelings of his generation. Bob Dylan, another contemporary singer and writer of songs, says when he hears people call these "folk songs" he thinks of fat old men. He adds that he prefers to call them "traditional songs." Dylan com- ments, "It (traditional music) comes about from legends, Bibles, plagues and it revolves around vegetables and death. It is too unreal to die."
The renaissance of the traditional song began about eight years ago when the Kingston Trio recorded "Tom Dooley" and sold over a million copies. This form of music was adopted by a new generation of song writers to express the feelings of their restless young audiences.
Although the revival of the traditional songs began only eight years ago they are a part of something that has survived for over seven centuries.
Willa Muir, noted authority on traditional ballads, says, "These songs have a charm ... a slow imper- sonal rhythm of traditional feelings that carry with them ancient and long forgotten or half-forgotten rituals and ceremonies."
When we say folk or traditional music, Jerry Silverman, musician, says we mean only that music "north of the Rio Grande and south of the Distance Early Warning Line." This, in a way is true. Yet, within the boundaries of the United States, the Melting Pot of Music from all nationalities, songs contain elements of the English ballad. East Indies' calypso beat, the African chant, the Irish reel and the distinctive characteristics of the Spanish guitar.
Our traditional music began in England centuries ago with the minstrels who made up and sang bal- lads and laments that told real stories about love, hate, birth, death and work.
The ballad is a story put to music. The singer is simply an impersonal storyteller. There is no coaxing to get the audience to listen. Miss Muir says, "The ballad draws its listeners into itself on a current of assured sympathy."
The ballad has many gaps which the listener must fill in with his own imagination. Take "Barbara Allen" for example. No attempt is made to tell the listener why Miss Allen has rejected the love of "Sweet William" nor does the ballad tell why she repents for her hard-heartedness after William is
dead. Still the ballad is a complete story and each listener fills in the why's and wherefore's in his own way. Miss Muir adds, "The audience is expected to have a natural ability to enter directly into any situation presented."
Stories put to music often involved wit and rid- dles. It seems that all folks, rich and poor, liked riddles. The minstrels, always willing to oblige, put plenty of this kind of wit into their stories. It can be found today in many of the old ballads. For example, "I Gave My Love a Cherry." In this song the speaker asks his love: 'when does a cherry have no stone, a chicken no bone, a story no end and a baby no crying? When the minstrel first sang the song, asking the questions, his listeners were challenged to think of answers. The witty answers that have come down to us are as follows: a cherry has no stone when it is blooming; a chicken, no bone when it is pipping; a story of love has no end; and when a baby is sleeping, it is not crying.
The ballads often concerned themselves with en- counters between a man and a woman and involved rape and murder, courtship and marriage or un- faithfulness. "The House Carpenter," for example, tells the story of an unfaithful wife, married to a carpenter, who ran away with a wealthy ship owner. This ballad is a little unusual in that it has a moral. The unfaithful wife and her lover are drowned when their ship sinks.
Many of these ballads were written in an era in history that is billed as having been extremely staid and proper. Talk of sex was strictly taboo. It is strange that a majority of these ballads tell of un- faithful spouses and their lovers. They spare few details. Probably the best example of this kind of ballad is "Matty Groves."
Surprisingly enough, the greatest reservoir of these ballads today is in the Appalachian and Cum- berland mountains of Kentucky, Tennessee, northern Georgia, the Carolinas and Virginia. In the very early days of this country a restless group of men, still more English than American, pushed west into these mountains and settled. They brought with them the old ballads of England. Here they re- mained, unnoticed and untouched by the rapidly changing world outside the mountains. Generation after generation passed on the same old songs almost unchanged.
Howard Brockway, musicologist, says, "The barter system and old world folk song literature imported from the mother country were kept alive. Songs that died out in the old country a century ago are still
22
sung every day in the Appalachian region." Though many of the old songs kept the flavor of the old world like the ballads, "Willie Moore" and "Fenna- rio," others took on idiosyncrasies that were dis- tinctly American. The latter were the forerunners of the American ballads like the ones about Jesse James and John Fisk, both famous outlaws.
According to many authorities on American music, the greatest group of contributors to music on the American scene were the Negroes. Dvorak, a Bohemian composer, wrote, "In the Negro melodies of America I discover all that is needed for a great and noble school of music. They are pathetic, tender, passionate, melancholy, solemn, religious, bold, merry, and gay."
Harold Courlander, musicologist, says, "I think that Negro folk music today is the largest body of genuine folk music still alive in the United States."
When the African Negro arrived in this country, two things began to exert influence on him. One was European music and the other, and greater, was the Christian religion.
Foremost among the religious traditional songs in this country is the Negro spiritual. Of these W. E. B. DuBois wrote, "They (the songs) tell of death, suffering and invoiced longing toward a truer world of misty wanderings and hidden ways. . . . Through all the sorrow of the Sorrow Songs there breathes a hope — a faith in the ultimate justice in things . . . that sometime, somewhere men will judge men by their souls and not by their skins."
The Negro, influenced by the European music and religion and backed by his own natural musical talent in turn, influenced American music.
The amount of influence by the Negro on Amer- ican music is almost astounding. He introduced various drums, the four and later the five string banjo and syncopated beats. According to Silverman syncopation, "Literally ... is putting the ac-cen^ on the wrong syl-/ab/e. To the guitarist it means playing a beat where none would ordinarily occur — or, not playing a beat where one is expected." The Negro
also introduced a new variety of rhythm and the call and answer format of voodoo chants.
With the tunes from old English ballads, Minstrel shows, Irish reels, Negro songs and Spanish ballads the American people have developed their own bal- lads with characteristics that are definitely American.
Today, once again, people have turned to tra- ditional music to express themselves.
Pete Seeger says, "Folk music is a living, vibrant thing again." People like Seeger. Oscar Brand, Jean Richie, Mississippi John Hurt, Aunt Molly Jackson, Cisco Houston, Burl Ives, Woody Guthrie, and, more recently, Tom Paxton, Joan Baez, Judy Collins and Peter, Paul and Mary, are using the folk idiom to speak for the people. They sing the old traditional songs and add many new songs to their lists. The new songs are being written in the old traditional manner.
But many singers and writers are using the folk idiom for protest music. It all started in the spring of 1965, according to Life magazine, when Bob Dylan set one of his laments to rock and roll music. The combination of folk idiom and rock and roll bands has brought about something called folk-rock. For example there are: "Like a Rolling Stone" by Dylan; "Sounds of Silence" by Paul Simon; and "Eve of Destruction" by P. F. Sloan.
It is plain to see that the history of American traditional music from the first British ballads in the New World to their present day off-spring, folk-rock, is the history and heritage of the country itself. No American history text could better tell the story of the settling of the West than "Sweet Betsy from Pike." No literature book could tell the story of the cowboys' lonely, dangerous life better than "Old Chisholm Trail" or "Home on the Range." No lecture on sociology could better tell the Negroes' story than "Swing Low Sweet Chariot."
No geography text could be more complete or more concise than "This Land Is Your Land." And no one could better express the feelings of present times than Tom Paxton when he says, "I can't help but wonder where I'm bound."
23
Joyce MacNeir makes a microscopic urinanalysis.
Mary Ellen Fagadore taking an electrocardio- gram. Her "patient" is Joan Lee.
i
\frs. Fay Plum, a member of the M
appo:
^•/^
«f
-'■4^
Joyce Calta taking a blood sample.
Program Director, Miss Norma B. Chemok, explains x-ray principles as Vickie Baker looks on.
THE MEDICAL ASSISTING PROGRAM
BROWARD Junior College boasts u unique and highly specialized program which, unfortunately, is unknown to the majority of students. This program, the first of its kind in Florida, is Medical Assisting. Its unique- ness lies in that it is designed for stu- dents to be trained to handle both aspects of medical office procedures, the administrative and the clinical. In ad- dition to being the first of its kind in the state it is also the only program to be approved by the Florida Medical Assistants Association. BJC's program is the product of combined effort, specif- ically an advisory committee consisting of physicians, die Medical Assistants As- sociation, and college personnel.
Miss Norma B. Chernok, Director of the Medical Assistants at the college, marveled that "After the Broward County Medical Society Bulletin an- nounced the existence of our program the phone started ringing and it hasn't
tants Advisory Committee, demonstrates niques.
stopped. Two girls are alread>' working part-time in doctors' offices."
The demand for Medical Assistants, both Incalh' and nationalK', is tremen- dous. At present, thirt>-thrce Broward students are enrolled and tliis number doesn't begin to satisfy the demand in Broward Coimty alone. The Broward Count)' Medical Assistants Association and the South Broward County Medical .Assistants .Association offer scholarships to a number of promising students.
E\actl\- what makes a promising Medical .Assivtant? In the words of Miss Cliernuk, "Tl'.e girls must learn to take a lot. Therefore, they must like people, be amiable, ind have a great deal of patience. In order for a girl to get tlirough tlie program she must apply lierself. since constant practical applica- tion is .ui essential rec|uirement."
.\nd tlien there's enthusiasm plus. This is definitely not lacking among Broward's Medical Assisting students, and theirs is equalled onh- b\' that of .Miss Chernok.
25
ff
TERMIMTIOI
99
By JIM TUCKER
Based on Hemingway'' s "The Killers^
Illustrated bv Sharon Frost
26
As NICK stepped into the hall and closed the door behind him, Ole Andreson sat up on the bed. "So they found me again," he mur- mured. It was the same old story. No matter where he went, he could be assured they weren't far behind.
Ole Andreson had been a prizefighter, and a good one, but he had had reason to make good. It was the only way to avoid a dreary lifetime at the lumber mill in his hometown of Anoka Falls, Minnesota. The town populace was predominantly Swedish and lum- ber had been their mainstay for generations. Ole's father was a foreman at Larson's Mill and he had been proud of the local renown of his son. Ole's strength was legendary in their small town and for all his great size and strength he was "quick as a cat."
Ole opened the drawer of the nightstand and re- moved the timeworn pouch containing his pipe and tobacco. He methodically stuffed the bowl as the memories flooded his mind.
He could see in his father a reflection of himself in the years to come. The hard years at the mill had made their mark on Gunnar Andreson and it would not be long before he could no longer meet the physical demands required of him. Ole wanted more of life, but his education was scant and lumber was all he knew. The mill loomed as a barrier which he could not hurdle.
When the fair came to town few of the residents of Anoka Falls failed to make an appearance, Ole being no exception. Competition was keen among the hardy townsfolk and any test of strength was certain to draw a crowd. The fair had as one of its members a former professional boxer with the appropriate title of Big Mike, who earned his way fighting the local toughs in the backwater towns. As he began his spiel, the spectators crowded round the makeshift ring. Fifty dollars would go to any man who could stay in the ring for three rounds with Big Mike. The fighter was no small man and with his knowledge of that particular art he had yet to be bested.
Big Mike waved a fifty dollar bill as he pleaded for a combatant. Ole found himself cajoled and shoved to the edge of the ring and Big Mike, noting his indecision, hastily pulled his intended victim through the ropes. As Mike laced on the big sixteen ounce gloves, Ole had made up his mind to stay away from him. The big fighter was a rugged veteran and Ole had no intention of exchanging blows.
When the bell sounded Mike rushed toward Ole with all the stealth of an enraged buffalo; his hveli- hood depended on his ability to beat a man senseless in the brief span of three rounds. He let fly a round- house right only to find Ole far out of reach. He grunted and turned sharply to face Ole's new posi-
tion. Mike crowded close and made two perfunctory jabs with his left, his right cocked for an opening. But again Ole faded, and his bobbing, weaving form offered but a small target. The first round passed in this manner, Ole feinting and retreating, never dropping his hands to allow the aggressive Mike a breach in his defense. Big Mike perspired heavily as his elusive quarry retired to the opposite corner.
Mike had been clumsy in his eagerness to finish Ole; he now studied his opponent with a grudging respect. The big Swede had the grace of a cat and his sedate manner belied his powerful frame. He had thus far been so confident of his agility that he had not as yet preferred a single blow. Mike seized upon this as the key to his defeat. He must anger Ole, forcing him into the role of aggressor to destroy his poise.
With the dull clatter of the bell signaling the start of round two, Mike began to exhibit the attributes of his trade. He circled about Ole and cautiously com- menced a series of short, telling jabs. Mike well knew the effectiveness of the jab; while not a lethal blow it is irritating and painful. As he began to follow the pattern of Ole's movements, a cut appeared over his eye. Ole brushed fruitlessly at the steady flow ob- scuring his vision and Mike immediately caught him witli a hard, glancing right to the jaw. Ole staggered, and off balance, toppled to the canvas.
Ole was stung and his pride was hurt. In his anger he jumped to his feet and threw a wild right at his stodgy foe, heedless of the nine-second count to clear his head. The blow sailed harmlessly over Mike's head and he countered with a stiff left to the mid section. Ole doubled over gasping for air, and only the bell saved him from a barrage of killer punches.
Ole remembered little of the third round. He knew his agility would not stave off the eager pro and his only chance was his own strength. He was calm and determined as he moved into the center of the ring, avoiding the more vicious of Mike's punches as he lapsed into his opponent's habits of the previous round.
Mike had again become eager and his caution abated as he resorted to the big punch in hopes of ending the fight. Ole was continually slowing down and Mike harassed the gaping wound over his eye.
Few spectators saw the blow that ended the fight. Mike had worked Ole into a comer and landed three rapid jabs, anticipating the follow-up. As he drew back his already poised right, Ole seized that moment to begin the short arc of a vicious hook. It caught Mike squarely under the chin and sent him heavily to the canvas.
Ole stirred in his reveries and relighted his pipe.
27
The sweet memory of his first victory was still vivid in his mind. He made no attempt to stem the tide of his recollections.
Mike, far from unhappy at his demise, had been unaccountably elated. It puzzled Ole only briefly as Mike was quick to make his reasons clear. He had been in the fight game for the better portion of his life and he had never seen a man with more inherent potential as a fighter. He wanted to take Ole to Chicago and train him for the ring. Mike had been a good fighter in his own right and he knew the ropes; more important, he knew the right people.
Ole had nothing to lose. He readily accepted Mike's proposition and within the week they were settled in Chicago. At the very worst he would again face the mills he had left behind. At best he would have within his grasp things for which he had never dared hope.
The ensuing months passed quickly and with a determination born of the will to succeed Ole relent- lessly pursued the arduous training schedule. Mike, too, was unsparing of himself in his capacity as trainer and manager. True to his word, he found the backers and capital necessary for the months of training. His prowess in the ring proved inxaluable as he also served as Ole's sparring partner. He left Ole with many a jarring memory, emphatically driv- ing his lessons home in a manner unlikely to be forgotten
After the first few bouts Mike had difficulty find- ing suitable opponents for his skillful protege. While he was leery of pushing Ole too fast, he was also aware of the danger of his becoming overconfident. His first bouts had been no contest as he simply overpowered his opponents. Mike wanted better fighters who would give Ole the experience he could only acquire with a stranger. Much can be learned from a good sparring partner; but fighters develop various habits and movements that, given time and familiarity, can be read. The word had gotten round that Mike's man was no trifling pug and few man- agers of the better fighters were willing to risk a loss to a nobody.
Mike's dilemma was solved by the sensationalism of the press. A few sportswriters had "somehow" gotten wind of the new giant and had come to the gym to watch him work out. Ole's size and obvious skill were impressive and after hearing of Mike's dif- ficulty arranging a match, the writers scrambled back to their typewriters to beat out a story of the backwood "Paul Bunyan" that no one dared fight. Mike now faced quite another problem as the publicity-starved fighters wanted a crack at the presses' new hero. He arranged bouts cautiously,
attempting to schedule them in a gradually ascending order comparable to Ole's development. He needn't have worried; Ole was more than a match for the best of them.
The big one was on tap. Lonnie Wilson, the fourth ranked heavyweight contender, wanted to beef up his position with a win over the new sensation. It was fast, too fast and Mike didn't like it. Wilson was no newcomer but Mike was sure Ole could beat him. It was a big break but Mike knew there was more behind it than Wilson was willing to disclose. It took money and influence to get into the big time and Mike had thus far made no commitments. But they couldn't pass up this chance. The bout was scheduled and Mike decided to play it by ear.
One week remained before the fight. Mike had tried several times to tell Ole, but the words wouldn't come. He felt old, and sick as he watched Ole's lithe, glistening form make an art of the mo- notonous ritual at the heavy bag. The odds were three to one on Wilson, but the smart money was on Ole. Wilson was going to dive.
The fight was over. Wilson was out in the third, right on schedule. But he came around later than planned. Mike had not told Ole of the fi.x and he fought to win. It had taken all of Wilson's skill and experience to stay alive until the third round and he did not intentionally walk into the crushing blow that clouded his brain. Mike had made no deals, but now he was in. He had gotten the break and the purse; it was only a matter of time before he would be called to do his part.
He didn't wait long. Tony Scarpetti, manager for number three on the heavyweight ladder, paid Mike a visit. Ole was to drop the next one to Lowell, Scarpetti's man. The volatile Mike made it clear there was to be no fix and threw Scarpetti bodily into the street.
Seven long months had passed since the Wilson fight and Mike had not been able to arrange a match of any significance. The doors were locked to outsiders and the key had been tossed roughshod into the street.
Ole paced the length of his tiny room. Mike had told him the details to this point and he found the politics of the fight game to be far more intricate than his maneuvers in the ring. But Mike had not told him the full story and Ole began fitting the remaining pieces of the puzzle into place. One point still eluded him. Ten months of idleness had ended when Mike scheduled a bout with Lowell. Ole did not know the circumstances surrounding the reconcil- iation, but of this he was certain — Mike was ada- mant in his denial of any fix. Why, then, had Mike's
28
dejection increased as the fight date pressed closer?
Mike had worked with him as never before and Ole was honed to razor sharpness. A few moments prior to ring time, Mike said a curious tiling. "Just remember, Ole, win or lose, nobody beats the system."
Lowell was tough. Nine rounds had passed with neither man taking a fall. Ole was possibly the better boxer and Mike figured tlie point spread, though slight, stood in Ole's favor. His strategy for the tenth and final round was basically defensive. Lowell had taken the opposite tack; he needed at least a knock- down. But he had not reckoned on Ole's stamina. He continually danced and weaved, the e\cr-darting jab keeping Lowell at bay while awaiting a careless lunge. In desperation he made this final error and the deafening roar from the crowd paid tribute to the skill and power of the triumphant combatant. Ole had indeed proven himself a veritable Paul Bunyan.
Mike steered him through the surging throng toward the locker room, answering the myriad of questions launched by the press while Ole showered and dressed. When Ole appeared, Mike allowed a scant few minutes for the pictures and interviews required of a new hero. Once outside they jostled their way through the thinning crowd and Mike pressed something into Ole's hand. It was an airline ticket. He had already packed Ole's bags and sent them ahead. As he pushed Ole into the waiting cab, he hurriedly explained that he would handle the press while Ole spent a few quiet days at home. It was the last Ole was to see of his friend and benefactor.
Three restless days passed as Ole tried vainly to contact Mike. To allay his fears he crowded his mind with trivialities. He drove to nearby Duluth to pick up several purchases he had ordered for his family. The heavy Saturday traffic forced him to walk several blocks to the department store. As he ap- proached a large newsstand he was struck motion- less; his eyes riveted to the cold black print. The stark headlines of a Chicago paper declared Mike's posthumous arrival into the fight game's big time — "OLE ANDBESON'S MANAGEB FOUND DEAD." The starded new.sboy gaped open-mouthed as Ole bellowed his rage, tearing to shreds the affirmation of his apathy.
The bitter memory no longer roused Ole to fur\' but remained to prod his conscience, sticking indeli- cately in his craw. He recalled the futility of the long hours with the police; he could tell them nothing they didn't already know. An investigation of the 'Wilson fight was to be held but there were few clues leading to Mike's murderer. He was returning from
one of the lengthy interrogations and upon rounding the corner of his apartment building, he noticed a light flicker in his third floor apartment. A man stood alongside a car parked across the street, directly in front of the apartment house. In the faint illumination cast by a distant street lamp he could make out the coarse features of a man he know only as Lafe. He was a brawler, a punchy fighter \\ho sold his services to the highest bidder. Ole ducked behind the safety of the building, flattening himself against the dull, craggy bricks. His breath came in short, harsh gasps while his mind raced. Mike's curious reference to the system echoed in his head.
And, "This guy, what's his name, Nick — yeah, Nick Adams," had just left his room after telliug him they were here. Nick said there were two of them. Max and Al, and they had waited for him at Henry's lunchroom where he usually ate supper.
"Okay, Mike, maybe I can't beat the system, but I'm through running. I won't make it easy for 'em."
He crossed the room and opened the worn suit- case. He found the box of cartridges and tossed them onto the bed as he rummaged through his sparse belongings for the revober. The door burst \'iolentl\- open and Ole stared down the unrelenting barrel of a shotgun. The empty pistol hung uselessly in his hand as he glanced toward the cartridges on the bed. Al followed his gaze and grinned.
"Hello, 'Bunion!' You're a real loser. You ain't never lost a fight but this time you're gonna' take the long count."
At that moment Mrs. Bell, the landlady, was mounting the stairs with her iron perched atop a stack of linen. When she spied Al standing in the doorway she dropped her bundle, and the iron clattered down the steps.
Al realized his folly even as he spun toward the noise. Ole leaped toward him as the hurtling pistol slammed into the killer's skull. He dragged Al's inert form onto the bed and bound his hands with a neck- tie. Mrs. Bell had gone for the police.
"That was too close," breathed Ole. He slipped the chain-lock into place and took a position in the far corner, the side on which the door was hinged. If die door were not opened wide he would be ob- scured from the \'iew of anyone standing in the doorway.
He crouched in the corner loading the pistol and the minutes ticked by. "Where are those cops?" he wondered. Al rusded on the bed. Ole cursed him softly and he was still.
Ole trained the pistol on the door, his breath cut short. He heard footsteps clammering up the ancient stairs.
29
"It's me, Mr. Andreson, Mrs. Bell, and the police." trigger. Ole's once graceful form plummeted gro-
Ole breathed a sigh of relief and hastened for the tesquely to the floor,
door. He slipped back the chain and turned the ;;The old woman," cried Al.
, rx,. 1 r^ -1 ■ 1 . r- 11 ■ 1 Don t worrv, snapped Max, tugging on the bind-
knob. The door tlew open, strikmg him full m the . , ^. ,.„, . ,^ . , .^, ^, ^ ,
'■ ° mg necktie. She aint going noplace with that lump
face. He staggered backward, stumbling over the on her head. Let's get out of here."
still opened bag. Max stepped into the room leveling Mrs. Bell's feeble cries went unheard as Ole's
the shortened barrel of a shotgun and squeezed the substance spread darkly around him.
Recognition Night 1966
HIGHLIGHT PRESENTATIONS
Outstanding Interest Club Phi Beta Lambda
Outstanding Service Club Circle K
Outstanding Club of the Year Circlettes
Club Leadership Award Bob Joynes
Outstanding Individual Service Clarkia Dennis
Honorable Mention Charles Drago, Ray CafoIIa
Special Service Award Beverly DriscoII
Freshman Woman of the Year Jean Holder
Honorable Mention Jan Souza
Freshman Man of the Year Bob Brevves
Honorable Mention Larry Ellis
Sophomore Woman of the Year Sharon Roesch
Honorable Mention Joan Nugent, Joyce Leagan
Sophomore Man of the Year Matthew Faison
Honorable Mention Terry Van Der Heyden
30
►
»
yiiu Kv* heem fafhifiWLTT -f ben^i-tj
T^Afi Up)
Canmep ovTI
li
I
/^*vv^r »
EIPP
*-'W«ll, io mucir^ •f-e,n the sfCll f-^sf- "
You got a letter from the
president of the college.
What happened?
Omigi I've flur
Sl'fo O^ tile Xok Tr^minq
./.
C »>V 5'» i" ~
l£_2_ _
SZ" Employment
JUNIOR COLLEGE
Mflt" fee- iiHe to jet ^/onj wiM "Jvlfe
S«n<f Z.B.ri. CdrJ ft) Tvnier Colir^c of B»Twar<| Covnty, p«\v»o,
^/^y\yoNe hoWinj ofF»c<? of Supenr\t<'n«lent oP Public Xn- st "auction nef^ not ^PfV'
f^'
?EI
/r>.
r-^'
/4c/-fa»
_z:r At^i/ifT
w
low express your pA</o£op|iy we//^ bi/T. , . ''
or maybe they found out about the frat orgy I went to . . .
I guess I'll be thrown out of school
and then I'll be
drafted. Off to
Viet Nam.
Well, I suppose I'd better open it . . .
"He wants me to buy
an encylclopedia." "Well, isn't that nice!"
Wei-
■PJl
1 i^
'>),
:v
it'
^
■^:vL«r>
?r.»:
^V^^
;^^-
M J^
-w''.\r*-'.>'
Candidates for the Associate in Arts Degree
Balsera, Rolando M.
Florida Atlantic University Geography
Bardsley, Ann C.
University of Florida Journalism
Bird, Barbara L.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Bohannon, Patsy L.
Florida Atlantic University English
Brand, Wynnifred G.
Florida Atlantic University English
Brenf, Barbara J.
Florida Atlantic University Art
Carter, Sarah C.
Florida Atlantic University
Education
Carveth, Constance S.
University of South Florida Education
Chapman, Diane E.
Florida Atlantic University History
Conti, Charlotte A.
Undecided
Cronin, Arleen B.
University of Florida Spanish
Davey, David R.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Doetsch, Kathleen A.
University of South Florida Elementary Education
Dyer, Carolann
Force, Sandra L.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Grass, Joe B.
Florida Atlantic University
Greenfield, Carol F.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Grove, Nelda
Florida Atlantic University Music
Hansen, Cheryl F.
Florida State University Physical Education
Jolly, Barbara J.
Florida Atlantic University Elementary Education
Kissinger, Donald C,
Leagan, Joyce A.
Florida State University Education
Mack, Nancy J.
Balsera, Rolando M.
Bird, Barbara L.
Bohannon, Patsy L.
Carveth, Constance S.
Chapman, Diane E.
Conti, Charlotte A.
Doetsch, Kathleen A.
Dyer, Carolann
Force. Sandra L.
Greenfield, Carol F.
Grove, Nelda
Jolly, Barbara J.
36
Madden, John E.
Florida Atlantic University Accounting
McGoldrick, Dolores F.
University of Florida Education
Metiger, Gary J.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Morrison, John W.
Nugent, Joan E.
Undecided
Palmer, Donna E.
University of Florida Nursing
Patrick, Marguerite M.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Pinder, Paula D.
Carson-Nevi/man Education
Pryor, Sandra L.
Florida State University Education
Ready, Terry L.
Florida Atlantic University Physical Education
Roesch, Sharon H.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Ruden, Elizabeth N.
Florida Atlantic University Language
Sansone, Cheryl L.
Schmidt, Vicki A.
University of Florida Education
Schulman, Barry H.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Shasek, Judith A.
University of Florida Education
Smith, Jolene A.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Stanton, Nancy M.
Florida Atlantic University Education
Susik, Carolann
Tabbert, Suzanne K.
University of South Florida Elementary Education
Thibedore, Gilbert W.
University of Notre Dame Language
Vernacchio, Beverly L.
University of Florida Education
Watson, Michael R.
Florida Atlantic University Accounting
Zeiss, Sarah H.
University of Florida
Leagan, Joyce A.
Morrison, John W.
Nugent, Joan E.
Palmer, Donna E.
Patrick, Marguerite M.
Pinder. Paula D.
Ready, Terry L
Roescfi, Sharon H.
Ruden. Elizabeth N.
Schmidt, Vicki A.
Schulman, Barry H.
Shasek, Judith A.
37
Smith, Jolene A.
Tabbert, Suzanne K.
Vernacchio, Beverly L.
Watson, Michael R.
Zeiss, Sarah H.
Candidates for the Associate in Science Degree
Bacon, David C.
Florida Atlantic University Business Administration
Barker, Craig S.
Florida Atlantic University Business Administration
Bassett, Samuel H.
University of Florida Architecture
Berg, Walter F.
Florida Atlantic University Accounting and Incorporate Law
Bieberbach, George
Black, Joy E.
Florida Atlantic University Elementary Education and Biology
Brestel, Eric P.
Florida Atlantic University Pre-Med and Biology
Brownlee, James P.
University of Florida Pre-Medicine
Bundy, Paul R. Jr.
Undecided
Carver, James
University of Florida Chemistry
Bacon, David C.
Bassett, Samuel H.
Black, Joy E.
Bundy, Paul R. Jr.
Carver, James
Grossman, Bruce R. Jr.
38
chapman, Neil C.
Florida State University Physics and Math
Clark, David W.
Coveney, John D.
Florida Atlantic University Ocean Engineering
Crossman, Bruce R. Jr.
Florida Atlantic University Pre-Mediclne
Day, Donald M.
Florida Atlantic University Business Administration
Dennis, Clarkia L.
Florida Atlantic University Chemistry
Dietrich, Frederick F. Jr.
University of Florida Wild Life Management
Dollar, Carol A.
Carson New/man College Home Economics
Dooley, Refer C.
Florida State University Business
Dugan, Marcia A.
University of Florida Education
Epple, Steven W.
University of Florida Architecture
Faison, Matthew J.
University of Florida Journalism
Fowler, Dorothy M.
Florida State University Accounting
Fox, Thomas S.
Florida State University History
Frazier, Thomas H.
University of Florida Business Administration
Giannontonio, Joseph J.
Florida Atlantic University Physical Education
Giordano, John
Florida Atlantic University Business Administration
Godin, Thomas J.
Green, Gary
East Carolina College Commercial Art
Gunzenhauser, Gail L,
Undecided
Guthrie, Ward
Hamm, Helen R.
University of Florida Education
Hamman, Thomas R.
Florida Atlantic University Accounting
Hancock, Jane H.
University of Florida Medical Technology
Day, Donald M.
Dennis, Clarkia L.
Dollar, Carol A.
Dugan, Marcia A.
Faison, Matthew J.
Fox, Thomas S.
Frazier, Thomas H.
Giannontonio, Joseph J,
Green, Gary
Hamm, Helen R.
Heiges, Bonnie L.
Klein, Robert L. Jr.
39
Hansell, Ross C.
Florida Atlantic University Investments Heiges, Bonnie L.
Florida Atlantic University Elementary Education Hurley, Harry T. Iwaniec, Theora
Florida Atlantic University Vocational Guidance Klein, Robert L. Jr.
Florida Atlantic University Chemistry Kulpa, Kathrin R.
Florida State University Physical Education Langston, Charles R., Ill Leathervt/ood, John E., Ill University of Miami English LIndeman, Bonnie J. University of Florida Architecture Little, Judy Lov/ry, Alice D.
Florida Atlantic University Art Education Lov/ry, Stephen, R. Lundgren, Edward A. University of Florida Dentistry Marant, Patricia L.
Florida State University Medical Technology Marino, Susette A.
Florida Atlantic University Elementary Education May, Victoria J.
Appalachian State Teachers' College Mazur, Andrew J. McArdle, Donald R. McEwen, David W. University of Georgia Education McFetridge, Bonnie M. University of Florida Education McTague, Patricia L.
Florida State University Meade, Kenneth W.
Undecided Meehan, William T. University of Florida Electrical Engineering Menees, Thomas
Florida Atlantic University Psychology Montagnari, Anthony A. University of Florida Drafting Moore, Timothy R.
Florida Atlantic University Business Administration Moses, William E. Muller, William F.
Florida Atlantic University Business Administration Mullis, Donald L.
Florida Atlantic University Pre-AAedical Mulkey, Jerry D. Muscatell, Ralph P.
Undecided Neff, Frank M. Oddo, Antoinette P.
Leatherwood, John E., Ill Lutidgren, Edward A.
Marant, Patricia L.
IVlay, Victoria J.
McArdle, Donald R.
McEwen, David W.
McFetridge, Bonnie M.
McTague, Patricia L.
Meade, Kenneth W.
Montagnari, Anthony A.
Mullis, Donald L.
Pawl, Donna J.
40
Pawl, Donna J.
Florida Atlantic University
Business Education Pawlowski, James Pfanner, Jonita K. Pickelt, Phillip E.
Florida State University
Mathematics
Pildner, Billie A.
Baptist Memorial Hospital, Memphis
Medical Librarian Reuss, Joseph S. Rice, Sharon K. Robinson, April I. Roof, Carl J. Saltus, Gary L.
Florida Atlantic University
Pre-Medical Sepielli, Russell J.
University of Miami
Speech Therapy Shaughnessy, Thomas H.
University of Florida
Architecture Smith, James W.
University of South Florida
Electronics Smith, Roy G., Jr.
University of Florida
Engineering Snyder, Robert I.
Florida Atlantic University
Systems Analysis Administration Stary, Roger R.
Florida Atlantic University
Business Administration Steadman, Jerry W.
United States Navy Strathie, Paul W.
Florida State University
Industrial Arts Stringfellow, Stephen K.
University of South Florida
Electrical Engineering Sundberg, Paul V.
University of Florida
Mechanical Engineering Swanson, Walter C.
University of Florida
Education Travers, Rita L.
Florida State University
Business Tumlin, Thomas M.
University of Florida
Engineering Vathauer, Karen I.
University of Florida
Education Van Buskirk, Lawrence H.
University of Miami
Accounting Vayda, Daniel J.
Florida State University
Physical Education Vordenberg, Dona L.
University of Florida
Pharmacy Warner, Carol A.
Florida State University
Physical Education Wilkinson, Tracy L.
Florida Atlantic University
Mathematics Winkelhake, Lawrence R, Zegel, Marylin J.
University of Florida
Mathematics
Pildner. Billie A.
Robinson, April
Salfus, Gary L.
Snyder, Robert I.
Strathie, Paul W.
Stringfellow, Stephen K.
Sundberg, Paul V.
Swanson, Walter C.
Tumlin. Thomas M.
Vathauer, Karen I.
Vordenberg. Dona L.
Wilkinson, Tracy L.
41
Candidates for the Associate in Science Degree in Business Administration
Dahl, Linda L. Graves, Donald E. Splittgerber, Joy A. Wigglesworth, Sherri E.
Dahl, Linda L.
Graves, Donald E.
Wigglesworth, Sherri E.
Candidates for the Associate in Science Degree in Nursing
Boyd, Margaret T. Brown, Joyce F. Bruderhausen, Gail M. Carlisle, Judith A. Cecil, Mavis M. Davies, Joan H. DeTorres, Catherine A. Galbraith, Judith E. Kimball, Connie K. Lynch, Stella A. McCarroll, Kitty A. McDougall, Patricia M. McKay, Mary J. McQuigg, Elizabeth L. Moore, Sylvia B. Mullejiax, Marjorie L. Pasquale, Madeline R. Phillips, Mary E. Riddle, Sara R. Schultz, Bernadine M. Spangter, Bette J. Steele, Nora Tapperson, Sigrid Walsh, Elaine
Brown, Joyce F.
Bruderhausen, Gail M.
Cecil, Mavis M.
McKay, Mary J.
Moore, Sylvia
Mullenax, Marjorie L.
Tapperson, Sigrid
Walsh, Elaine
42
DECEMBER GRADUATES Associate in Arts Degree
Brackebush, Jane L. Carter, Jimmy T. Fuller, Alva M.
Guido, Patricia A.
Florida Atlantic University Elementary Education
Hanson, Cheryl I.
Undecided
llowiecki, Katherine Johnson, Michael J.
Lopez, Sylvia
Florida State University Drama
Lorch, Lynne C.
McQuade, Brian J.
Florida Atlantic University Social Science
Murawski, Elaine T.
Florida State University Elementary Education
Phelan, Gladys J.
Scott, Nancy A.
Snyder, Richard L.
Florida State University Social Science
Suguitan, James J.
Florida Atlantic University English
Smith, William R.
West, Eleanor F.
Florida Atlantic University Art
Fuller, Alva M.
Johnson. Michael J.
Lopez, Sylvia
McQuade, Brian J.
Murawski. Elaine T, Snyder, Richard L,
West. Eleanor F.
43
Associate in Science Degree
Beimly, Kenneth Gordon
Florida State University Advertising
Blackwood, Thomas Burdette
University of Florida Accounting
Bowman, Robert Lee, Jr.
Brand, Richard Edward
Florida State University Business
Branner, Wilh'am Paul
Undecided
Brandt, George Paul
University of Florida
Burt, Charles G.
University of Florida
Campbell, Alice Rae
Florida Atlantic University Education
Christen, Carol Lynne
Ohio State University Education
Coleman, Ronald Edward
University of Miami
Coles, Nancy Jane
Florida State University International Relations
Cooper, Albert Edward
Dahlhofer, Gary Robert
Florida Atlantic University Marketing
DeBlasio, Nicholas George
Florida Atlantic University Accounting
Durgy, William Ralph
Foster, George Steven
Florida Atlantic University Business
Franks, James W.
Florida Atlantic University
Gayeski, Martin Joseph Gordon, Sharon Boozer
Gunter, Gary Wallis
Florida State University Hotel-Motel Administration
Blackwood, Thomas Burdette Christen, Carol Lynne
Coleman, Ronald Edward
Dahlhofer, Gary Robert
DeBlasio, Nicholas George Durgy, William Ralph
Gordon, Sharon Boozer
Halsey, Richard Bruce
Florida State University
Business Administration Harper, Karen MarMes
Florida Atlantic University Holden, Robert James
Florida Atlantic University
Accounting Howard, Thomas William
Florida Atlantic University Johnston, Thomas Anthony
University of Florida
Journalism Kite, Robert Bernat
University of Miami March, Steven John McLellan, William Francis
University of Florida
Lavi/ Midzalkowski, Joseph Harold
Florida Atlantic University Moore, Michael Munroe Rawe, James Herbert Sander, Woodrow W., Jr. Schneider, George Jesse
University of Florida Shetler, John Quentin
Florida Atlantic University
Education Shull, Judy Jane
Florida Atlantic University
Education Shuttleworth, Thomas Brady, I
Florida Atlantic University Smith, Lois Mae Southard, Gail Louella Stackpole, Margaret Ann
Florida Atlantic University Strickland, Janice
Florida Atlantic University
Education Thixton, Robert Gerald
Florida Atlantic University Vitello, Frank Dominick
Florida Atlantic University
History-Political Science West, Loise Claire White, John Jay
Associate in Science in Business Administration
Harper, Karen Marlies Midzalkowski. Joseph Harold
Rawe, James Herbert
Schneider, George Jesse
Williams, Terry R.
Smith, Lois Mae
Southard, Gail Louella
Associate in Science in Data Processing
Martin, James R.
Associate in Science in Law Enforcement
Fletcher, James M.
Florida State University Law Enforcement La Graves, Walter F., Jr.
Florida Atlantic University Law Enforcement Employed by the Pompano Beach Police Department
Fletcher, James M.
'\
Illustrated by John Leatherwood
46
When, Oh God, shall man
Stand beside his fellow man
And call him brother?
How long will it be
Till the chains of the bonded
Fall loosely away
Into rust and broken decay?
Why have we fallen
Into a den of fools
And sold our sacred souls
For power, for riches, and for fame?
Life is but a twilight of existence
Which decides our fate eternal;
Are we so blind. Dear God,
As to let it slip from our grasp
Without capturing one moment of its beauty?
We shut our ears
To the song of a bird,
And close our eyes
To the majesty of a mountain.
Thy gifts to us mean nothing;
Thy very presence goes unheeded;
Why, Oh God, is it so?
Why do we spend our precious time
Engulfed in self vanity?
And, yet, it is thought
That in death we can escape
From this society of void and uncertainty.
But yet. Almighty God, what is death?
A mere gate; a lonely bridge
Thrown across the path of existence;
It is but a boundary of separation
Between life and eternity.
A single moment of occurrence
Which transports us to endlessness;
An endlessness which is decided
By deeds done in a twilight of life.
But, Oh God, we shall go on;
On and on with our greed, our lust.
Our sin and our wars.
Marching ever onward to the brink
Of our own destruction;
For man shall be destroyed
By man's own being.
Oh weep, weep for Thy children
Gracious and All Powerful God,
For we know not what it is
To weep for ourselves.
But we go on preaching
Pure ideals of humanity,
And fail to accomplish our goals.
Oh God, would that it were not so;
But be it so and so be it.
For it is that which we call our destiny.
47
SEAHORSES
Bill Mandevllle lays one In.
And richly deserved they are. The Seahorse cagers finished with a 12-8 record o\'erall and a conference mark of 6-2, good enough for second place and a berth in the state tournament.
Good balance and a strong bench keyed Coach Clinton Morris' charges to the best season ever en- jo>'ed by a JCBC five, \\'hich included a win over arch-rival and nationally ranked Miami-Dade JC.
The season opener was an omen of the good things to come as the Seahorses smashed Florida Keys JC, 107-74. Kenny Kulp led the way with 28 points. Bryn Jones continually stole rebounds from the taller Wreckers and Marv Hodges' fine floor game kept the opponents off balance.
Traveling to the west coast, the JCBC quintet met disaster in the form of Manatee JC, losing 59-92. The Lancers' superior height and shooting simply over- whelmed the 'Horses, who just couldn't seem to get their offense moving.
They say you can't keep good men down and the Seahorses proved it the following night with an 88-78 win over Edison JC. Kulp was high scorer again with 25 points. Freshmen Bill Mandeville and John Gordon also played a fine game, contributing 18 and 17 points, respectively.
Over the Christmas holidays, the Seahorses jour- neyed to Columbus, Ga., for a tournament. In the opening round, the JCBC five faced the host team, Columbus JC. Leading at halftime, the 'Horses ran cold the second half, losing 79-84. Kenny Kulp re- mained the Seahorses' most prolific scorer with a game-high 25 points. In the consolation game, Brow- ard faced another Florida team, Gulf Coast JC. They also proved unfriendly, stifling the 'Horses' offense in winning, 83-68. Kulp, with 15 points, and
48
Steve Cairns with 10, were the only 'Horses to hit double figures.
Next the Seahorses traveled to DeLand where the\- romped over the Stetson JV team, 96-73, in what Coach Morris described as their best game all season. Ken Kulp, John Gordon, and Ste\e Cairns led tlie way with their fine all-aroimd play.
Another road trip found the Broward quintet in West Palm Beach blasting Palm Beach JC, 103-65. Kenny Kulp's scoring (22 points) and Rr\n Jones' rebounding paved the victory road.
The Seahorses found things a little tougher do\\ n Miami way, falling before arch-rival and the state's number one team, Miami-Dade JC. John Gordon played one of his finest games, finishing with 31 points, but to no avail as the Seahorses absorbed their fourth loss, 122-99.
The 'Horses home season opened with the Stetson JV team coming to town looking for revenge. It was nowhere to be found as the Seahorses continued their
High in the air, Bobby Kennedy hooks for two.
Bryn Jones dribbles off a tight screen.
domination of Stetson, 98-81. Trailing at half time, the 'Horses exploded out of the locker room to score 58 points in the final half. Seahorse Captain Bryn Jones paced the win with 24 points and excellent rebounding.
That old nemesis. Manatee JC, popi^ed up again, bouncing Broward to the tune of 60-54. Once again. Lancer size and defense pro\'ed too much for the boys from Broward.
The weekend wasn't a total loss as the Edison JC Bucs were sorry they ever visited the Stranahan gym. Still stinging from their loss to Manatee, the 'Horses grabbed the lead early and were ne\er headed the rest of the game. The fast break sizzling and their defense choking e\ery Edison spurt, the JCBC five coasted to a 104-81 win. Kenn\- Kulp led the scoring with 21 points.
The next weekend saw the Seahorses entertaining Indian Ri\er JC and Florida Ke\s JC. Indian River proved to be rude guests, pulling out a 102-98 \ic- tory in the final minutes. Led b\- Kulp's 35 points and Ste\-e Cairns' 19, the JCBC fi\e pla>ed fast, aggressi^•e ball, only to ha\e four final-second Indian Ri\er points put the whammy on them.
49
Surrounded by Falcons, Steve Hall soars to grab the rebound.
John Gordon slips between Falcons for two points.
I
Florida Keys was much nicer, bowing 125-84. Looking for a possible state tournament bertli, the 'Horses completely demolished the Wreckers" attack with a tough defense and hot shooting. Kulp was again high scorer with 24 points.
The Universit)' of Miami Freshmen were the Sea- horses' next victim, 90-89. Underdogs all the way, the JCBC cagers matched Miami point for point, winning it on Steve Cairns' final second foul shot. Cairns and John Gordon tied for scoring honors, with 22 points apiece.
The next evening saw tlie Seahorses chince a state tournament berth with a 104-85 re\'enge \'ictory over Indian Ri\'er JC. Ahead by a slim margin at halftime, the 'Horses spent the second half widening the gap over the hapless Pioneers. John Gordon, in addition to his fine rebounding, led the Broward cagers with 34 points.
The Seahorses' next opponent was Miami-Dade
JC. Ranked numlier one in the state and among the top ten national!), the Falcons were heavy favorites o\er their supposedh' weaker arch-rivals. Such was not the case as tiie Seahorses surprised the Falcons, 96-92, in o\ertime. The game was a fjnestion of wliether or not the Seahorses could keep up with the Falcons. Ne\'er more than six points behind, the 'Horses slowly crept closer, tying the score 82-82 as time ran out. The oxcrtime period belonged to little Marvin Hodges. The 511 guard sank five of six free throws and a field goal to put the stopper on the Miami attack. Gordon led the scoring w ith 2.'3 points, but Hodges' 9 points won the game.
Still up in the air from the win over Miami-Dade, the Broward fi\'e was rjuickly brought back to earth by the U. of Miami Frosh. Seeking revenge for an earlier defeat, the Babv "Canes ran the tired Sea- horses off the floor in a 113-95 victory. Kenne\' Kulp \\'as high man for Broward with 23 points.
50
^>-^
-v 'J:
"You aren't stoppin' this kid," warns Bill Fauerbach as he races by Edison opponent.
Rebounding from the Miami loss, the 'Horses traveled to Lakeland to swamp the Baby Moccasins of Florida Southern, 87-79. Hard pressed by the Mocs, the Broward quintet led from the start, win- ning their eleventh game. Gordon was high scorer with 19 points, followed closely by Steve Cairns and Bobby Kennedy, each with 18 points.
The Broward Seahorses continued their winning ways in the season final against Palm Beach JC, racking up a lop-sided 104-61 win. Bobby Kennedy led the scoring parade with 31 points.
By virtue of their second place conference finish, the Seahorses earned their first state tournament
berth. The opening round found Broward facing a strong, experienced Chipola JC five. Cold shooting and an ineffective fast break proved the 'Horses downfall, as they lost, 66-79. If it's any consolation, Chipola went on to win the state championship.
Although he couldn't kick. Coach Morris believed we could have done better had the new gym been completed. This, he said, would have given the 'Horses a practice court and a definite homecourt advantage.
Next year, with a completed gym (it's gotta be done by then) and six returnees, the Seahorses look for an even better season. Returning are Bob Ken- nedy, John Gordon, Greg Fitzpatrick, Bill Mande- ville. Bill Fauerbach, and Mark Brier. Coach Morris couldn't report any definite recruiting results, but if he's as successful as he was last year, WATCH OUT!
Congratulations again, Seahorses, and good luck next year.
SCORING STATISTICS
Player FG FT RB Total Average
Kulp 157 53 143 367 18.4
Gordon 116 81 180 313 15.6
Cairns 85 53 55 223 13.1
Jones 80 45 158 205 10.3
Kennedy 72 38 145 182 9.1
Mandeville 46 22 22 114 6.3
Hall 34 38 68 106 6.2
Hodges 38 26 9 102 6.0
Fauerbach 30 27 108 87 4.8
Fitzpatrick 26 10 13 62 4.4
Nealy 6 1 10 13 4.3
Allison 4 2 6 10 1.2
Brier 4 1 9 9 1.8
"Here I am!" Bob Kennedy waves frantically to Steve Cairns.
i
52
J
'ar^^
V
Chris Koutras (left) and Christine Johnson team up for doubles.
Jane Hancock stretches for the return of a high volley.
:'i^i''9i^*M
yH^-A: '-rr
TENNIS
Althougli usually referred to as "the weaker sex," the girls have been showing up their male counterparts at JCBC in spring sports competition. The girls' tennis team currently shows a five and zero chart, best of the spring sports at the Junior College. They also own a first place tie in the F.S.U. Invitational Tournament.
Their excellent record includes double victories over Palm Beach JC (6-1, 7-0), and single victories over Miami-Dade (5-2), Marymount College (5-2), and the U. of Miami (5-0).
In the F.S.U. Invitational, which included teams from many of the South's major universities, the JCBC girls tied for first place with Rollins College, each team finishing with twenty points. Stephanie DeFina, the Seahorse-ettes(?) No. 1 player, took first place in the singles competition.
The remainder of the season includes matches with the U. of Miami and Miami-Dade and the State Championships, April 15.
The men's tennis team isn't doing f|uite so well. At this time, they have a one and four record with an 0-4 conference mark. Their lone \ictory came in a "practice match" with Palm Beach JC.
The inexperienced (only two played high school tennis) Seahorses have lost twice to Edison JC (2-4, 2-4), Miami-Dade (0-9), and Palm Beach JC (3-4).
The rest of their season includes a match with Palm Beach JC on April 1, and two tournaments — the Florida State Championships at Cape Coral, April 22, 23, and the Florida junior College Championships, May 4, 5, 6.
Jim Tucker keeps his eye on the ball as he attempts to make a forehand drive.
{
wm
iMJm %^
tJ£^^
.1^
GOLF
AftLT losins tluir first two matclics, the JCBC links- men bouneed Ixiek to win their last fonr. IjrinRinK their record to four wins and two losses.
Miami-Dade, last year's state junior college cham- pions, beat the Seahorses by scores of 16-5 and 11-7. The Broward linksmen then rebounded with a 9'2-2'-.; N'ictory o\cr Palm Beach JC. Ba\ Isbell was medalist with an eighteen-hole total of 71. Both Isbell antl Mike Hines scored three points for their team.
The Seahorses evened their record to two antl two with a 17-1 win o\cr Biscayne CollcRt'. Xe.\t, the JCBG golfers did a repeat performance, romping o\er Indian Ri%er JC, 17-1. This time Hal Hutchinson was low man with a 74 total, followed by Hines, who had a 76. Their next victim was Edison JC, who fell I'^k-Wz. Hutchinson led this win with a S-O \ictory in the No. I match.
Their matches are scored by the Nassau S\stem. The golfers compete on a match play basis, scoring a point for winning either the front or the back nine. If tlir\ win both, they earn an extra point, making a maximum individual score of three. Normally only four golfers compete, but in several matches this >'car the Seahorses have used more, accounting for the higher .scores.
The rest of the season includes three major tourna- ments. There is the Florida collegiate tournament, at Gainesville, the Florida Jimior College Championships at Coral Gables, April 14 and 1.5, and the National Junior College Championships at Miami, June 7-10.
Hal Hutchison and his sand wedge blast from a trap.
Don Schroeder lines up a putt.
Top row: Bob Goldin, Ray Isbell, Jim Lyford, Bob Stacey, Jerry Rasmussen. Bottom row: Mike Hines, Hal Hutchison, Donald Schroeder.
'?/
firn.
^
■^->
55
Head Coach Leroy Wheat
he spring, they say a young fancy turns to girls and ill. How much of their fancy rned to girls, I can't say, but lung men of the JCBC base- eam have definitely turned ancy to baseball — and quite sfully, too. As this magazine :o press, the Seahorses own
an eleven and one chart, with a five and one conference mark.
Wlien interviewed before the season, Coach Leroy Wheat said his team ought to be strong con- tenders for the state championship. Looks like his prediction is com- ing true. So far, the Seahorses own triple wins over Dick Howser's
Baseball School, double victories over Palm Beach JC, U. of Miami Freshmen, and Edison JC, and single wins over Indian River JC and a squad of Yankee farmhands. Their lone loss came at the hands of Indian River.
Coach Wheat's charges boast strong pitching, sizzling bats, and
Dodging the catcher's
spikes, Bruce Kinder slides
safely home
"Comin' in knee-high, goin' out sky-high," hopes Jim Gurzynski
an exciting defense. Coach Wheat is overjoyed at his pitching staff, saying "it's real good for this time of year." At the plate, the Sea- horses got off to a rather slow start, but are sizzling now. Lead- ing the surge are Bob Martin, Bruce Kinder, Bill Adelman, and Paul Buzzella. Coach Wheat's a
bit disappointed at the defense, but said that it's improving and that it "ought to be exciting to watch." We're not quite sure what he meant by that last remark.
Not all is peaches and cream in the Seahorse camp though. In- juries have slowed the team a little bit. Adelman had a bad knee
and Alan Morell suffered an in- fected leg. Problems have also come from another source — tlie Junior College Baseball Commis- sion. It seems there is some ques- tion as to the eligibilit>' of three players — Adelman, Gary Bryce, and Larry Sanders. Coach Wheat is awaiting a decision with crossed fingers.
itt
Jim Bryce rounds third on his way to another Seahorse score
|
m |
|
|
'-**- |
^P^ ^ |
|
*'• \ |
|
|
!r~l|ki..i |
\ |
Don Newhouser grimaces as he uncorks a fastball
V
■=-v*.. ^1
57
THE JUDO CLUB
^ ^ ^
<!
58
DON'T ever say JCBC isn't a cosmopolitan college, for now a little bit of that isle of Japan has been transplanted to the campus. This is in reference to that ancient and honorable sport of jujitsu or judo.
Established to promote interest in the manual arts, especially judo, sportsmanship, competitive ability, and physical development, the Judo Club is in its first year of organized activities.
The club gives planned demonstrations to various church groups. Boy Scout troops, and clubs throughout the area as well as engaging in intercollegiate competition.
In their only dual meet to date, the Broward Judoakas, or judo men, fell to Miami-Dade JC. At the Florida State Tournament in Gainesville, Club President John Craddock placed fourth in his division. The club is scheduled to compete in a tournament in Coral Gables on March 15th and is trying to line up a few other matches.
Craddock holds a first degree brown belt in both judo and karate and another club member, Bill Bancroft, owns a karate black belt.
The club is composed of fourteen members. Other officers besides Craddock include Ray Shoaff, Vice-President, Ghet Meisner, Secretary, and Dave Richardson, Treasurer. The club sponsor is Mr. David Factor.
I
A Look at the Future
by Ann Bardsley
SEVEN years ago, the Junior College of Brow- ard County began. It started with a piece of paper, an au- thorization by the state legislature to build a junior college at Fort Lauderdale, Florida. A few months later, an advisory board was appointed, and then, in the spring of 1960, a president, Joe B. Rushing, of Texas.
When he took office on April 7, Dr. Rushing was the president of a college that existed only on paper. By August 30, the Junior College of Broward County had moved into temporary quarters at the old Fort Lauderdale naval air station barracks, and had opened its doors to nearly seven hundred students. The students and faculty of the little college endured the old military buildings for three years. Then, in 1963, the JCBC moved out to its big, breezy, 152 acre campus. There, a nucleus of seven buildings, Administration, Data Processing, Physical Educa- tion, Library, Technical Laboratories, and a Student Center were ready for occupancy.
In this year of 1966 there are approximately 3000 students attending the junior college, and they are taught by a faculty of 130, all with masters or doc- torate degrees. To the seven original buildings have been added a faculty office building, classroom build- ing, a two hundred seat lecture theatre, fine arts center, a gymnasium, and a modern planetarium. When the gymnasium is opened, phase two of the building program at JCBC will be completed.
In the immediate future is Phase III of the build- ing program at JCBC. Plans already on the drawing board call for three buildings to be begun in 1967. These will be a classroom building, central receiving center, and a much-waited-for cafeteria.
The proposed two-story classroom building will house the Medical Technology, Nursing, Medical Assisting, Police Science, and Business Administra- tion departments. Included in the facility will be laboratories for the medical program, drafting, and photography.
The central receiving center will have space for unloading and loading, storage, campus security, and for the maintenance and custodial equipment, as well as offices for the custodians and engineers and for the Dean of Administration.
The planned Hospitality Center will reward the students of JCBC for their many years of patience with adequate food facilities. The new student center will be a two-story structure costing one and one- half million dollars.
Most of the ground floor of the center will be used for a huge modern cafeteria. There will be a main cafeteria room for students and a faculty dining
59
room separated by soundproof partitions. The main serving line will handle soups, salads, and hot and cold meals, and a snack bar will dispense drinks, ice creams, and snacks. A conveyor belt for dishes, stor- age and refrigeration rooms, and a modern kitchen and bakery will insure a fresh, plentiful, and appetiz- ing variety of food for the student. Many part-time jobs will be available in the cafeteria.
The ground floor will also have offices for the counseling staff. Student Government, and the stu- dent publications staffs. Movable partitions in the cafeteria and student lounge area will make it pos- sible to use the building for small and large meet- ings, banquets, and assemblies.
Upstairs, the hospitality center will have four hotel rooms with baths, a conference room, two class rooms, and offices for the cafeteria manager and the Hotel-Motel Administration department. Mr. Ray Dietrich, director of the Hotel-Motel program at JCBC, explained that the hotel rooms and a model hotel office will be used as laboratories for his growing department, and can also be used to accom- modate guests of the college. Much of the space in the building can be adapted to a variety of uses, he said, so that the Hospitality Center can be used at its maximum efficiency.
What is the outlook for the more distant future? The campus will fill up with still more buildings, as many as thirty-five of them. They may include, for the Physical Education department, an Olympic size swimming pool and a bov/ling alley. The Aviation department may have as many as fifteen planes, with hangars and classrooms, at the airport. Also planned are an Auditorium, Music building, Audio- Visual center, Technical Education center, and Hor- ticulture facility. When it is completed, about 1972, JCBC will have cost the state, local, and possibly Federal governments an estimated ten million dollars.
For the present, Dr. Harvey Oates, Dean of Ad- ministration, is making efforts to alleviate some of the more irritating features of campus life. Ten thousand dollars has been appropriated to improve the drainage which causes a moat around the Class- room building after a heavy rain. Although money for landscaping is difficult to obtain, some landscap- ing will be done to protect floors and delicate equipment from the sweeping sands. To ease the serious food problem. Dr. Oates has promised hot food service next fall. Simply prepared stews, soups, and sandwiches will be available during the lunch hours on the ground floor of the HPR building.
Perhaps more important than buildings and equip- ment is the intellectual future of the college.
Broward started off with nothing, but in six years she has become one of the top ten junior colleges in the nation. The prominence JCBC has achieved in so short a time reflects favorably not only on the stu- dents and faculty of the college, but also upon the community that supports the school. In return, Broward has the duty to lead and to serve as the cultural leader of the community.
"Fort Lauderdale," according to Dr. Harvey Oates, "has the 'makings' of a fine community." He men- tioned that Fort Lauderdale is one of the smallest cities in the country to support its own symphony orchestra. Broward, he said, has a responsibility to educate the community. He sees the college as a place where the free exchange of ideas and of both
%*j
Ir^fc' "^ifc -H»*- ^1'. -^J "i^ * \- "^^ W^ i?s& •an nJ*
1 E Z^S ^ J
60
i
new and time-tested concepts form the intellectual and cultural base of the community.
Dean Edward Kotchi points to another facet of Broward's responsibility for community service. In addition to its university parallel program, JCBC has many students taking terminal courses which will place them in the main stream of business life after a two year professional course. Graduates with an associate degree in a terminal program fill a crying need for skilled, non-professional technicians. They are sought by doctors, architects, engineers, and researchers. As policemen, builders, managers, they have special training which puts them above the herd, and raises the quality of their occupation. Of particular importance, says Dean Kotchi, is the
value of the junior college in attracting new business to the area. Companies are anxious to move into areas where they are assured of trained workers, and the facility for training more. Dean Kotchi emphasized that college must not produce "mere me- chanics." They must, he said, be well rounded people who are capable of working with engineers and physicists, and of keeping up with advances and changes in his field.
What lies ahead for the college? With an en- thusiastic community, skilled faculty, a wide variety of courses, the finest possible facilities in which to teach them, and its avowed duty to lead and serve the community, the future that lies ahead of Brow- ard looks bright indeed.
i
i» •? t -1H'#* f-i^ 1*-^
"^ -i: * -• JPt ^^ »- °
61
i--^'*^-!:;'*' > ,m--
>-■
!«•..- *■
-aM«>
^^^#^w^ •■
S. G. A
MfUC
««»
»f.
^T^:M:E^UkE:. THE MAfi
'■-'•.■■■';?;:■••: •'<'"!"':l'-;!;'Wo6dCutl)y "
:H.:■;^;l;^..V^::■::ii]9J^Branner . ,■ ■
From pv^r the jmpuhtains of yesterday, through; tt^ei galley si of tbiday , I can sep ahothet ipoiirit' anead whose peak dloes beacon stalwiart he^rtis; a challenge hot unheard. • ';. ,
A golden hue basks, ithe peak as the sun creeps. up from beyc^nd the horizon to watch the cuiJipus creatures on earth spend another ,day Advancing toward an : unknown end; ■; !:|; ; V
And so it is as X-al^Q climb the moun- tains of ipy mitta;-f6r as I reach the . summit thereinjjl turn toward th(^e of yesterday, acfosis whose reach my shadow spansand I heat ithe echo bright ana keen : . ;i.l. what mciasure! — the. man ... »
'rrl.^l^^:^:■!^''^^wmn
liv K1
'1
M
iliir^j
A
t+s"-
i'^-^irf
THE poor in America are the twenty per cent of our population that the rest of the nation never sees. Somehow, in this land of abundance, one in five of its citizens lives a life of never ending need, cultural iso- lation, and despair. IN THE MIDST OF PLENTY, by Ben H. Bagdikian, is a newspaperman's report on poverty in America.
Each chapter of this disturbing book deals with another kind of poverty, hidden away among the slums of the cities and the leaking shacks of the countryside. The poor, migrant workers, slum dwel- lers, derelicts, a starving pension- er, and miners and farmers strug- gling with an exhausted land, tell their stories in their own words. With the exception of the skidrow derelicts, their poverty is not their fault. They long to escape from their misery, and they all hope for something better for their chil- dren, but for these human beings, poverty is a way of life they will never escape.
The author corrects, one by one, our misconceptions about American poverty, and explains why the Horatio Alger tradition just doesn't work any more. Ac- cording to Bagdikian, the worst effect of poverty in modern Amer- ica is that it isolates the poor from the mainstream of American culture. They have no opportunity to see how the more prosperous people live, for the rich and the middle class live far away from the East Side and Tobacco Road. Lacking political power, they have substandard schools and utilities.
Surrounded by poverty, the poor man's child goes to school for as long as his clothes hold out, with the children of other poor men. When he can no longer af- ford school he drops out to look for the unskilled job that he may or may not find, and the cycle goes on.
For anyone who wonders what the war on poverty and social welfare legislation are all about, IN THE MIDST OF PLENTY is recommended reading.
In the vocabulary of my native New England, there are three sacred words: Boston, money, and Harvard.
The economics books of this generation have endeavored to prove to us that money is intrinsi-
Ann Bardsley
cally worthless. Several years ago a very proper Bostonian wrote a funny book about his fellow prop- er Bostonians called (you guessed it) THE PROPER BOSTON- IANS. When New England recov- ered from that blow, there was but one more institution left to puncture. An lowan named Rich- ard Bissell (Harvard '36) has done the job on his alma mater.
YOU CAN ALWAYS TELL A HARVARD MAN is a humorous, rambling history of America's old- est college, digressing into discus- sions of customs, anecdotes, per- sonalities, and skeletons in the closet. The undergraduate days of three of Harvard's most distin- guished sons, Theodore and Frank- lin D. Roosevelt, and John F. Kennedy, are brought to rather surprising light. Teddy Roosevelt, says the author, was an outstand-
ing candidate for Freshman Odd- ball of the Year.
The book, however, has two faults. The author makes many references to people, places, and things that are meaningless to the deprived masses who never went to Harvard, and he thinks he is screamingly funny. Mr. Bissell has his moments of delightful humor, but all too often his laugh-lines are ponderous slapstick. Along with Harvard indifference and the Harvard accent there is a Har- vard sense of humor that is re- markable for its lack of subtlety, and the book is its unfortunate victim.
YOU CAN ALWAYS TELL A HARVARD MAN is light and pleasant reading for a quiet after- noon in a leather chair at the Harvard Club.
In the midst of all the popular trivia about the medical profes- sion, one book has come out within the past year which has real merit. INTERN, by "Doctor X" is an anonymous physician's diary of the most important year of his career, one which he begins as an awed student just out of medical school, and ends as a trained and confident healer.
The real life of a hospital in- tern, as "Dr. X" paints it, bears little resemblance to the dashing hero on the TV set. His life is one of constant pressure, little sleep, and hardly any financial reward. He has some successes, and some heartbreaking failures, and there are no pretty nurses around to mop his brow.
Some of the horrible mistakes, described in detail, that the in- tern makes will make you vow never to let one even take your temperature. Yet, the book is re- assuring, too, for the young doc- tor regards his patients as human beings and not, as the layman suspects, merely as a broken arm or an infected gall bladder.
64
^•^
^bi-LJ'^fc-
c
hange is inevitable. The high- est position in our college's adminis- tration has been vacated. To fill this void during the interim period, our Boards have selected an acting presi- dent. W^e sincerely believe that he has done well.
Representing the students of the Junior College of Broward County, the editors and staff of the Silver Sands proudly dedicate Silver Sands 1965-66 to Dr. Jack D. Taylor as one who with dignib.', leadership, and wisdom is successfulK' fulfilling his mission.
I
1
y